Owner's Manual L:7 :9>I>DC

S60 Owner's manual

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impair- will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile ment that could hinder your ability to drive. designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle, instructions in this manual. please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Contacting We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction" chapter for information on get- in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a ting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada. Contents

00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Locks and alarm Important information...... 6 Occupant safety...... 16 Remote key and key blade...... 52 Environment...... 12 Reporting safety defects...... 17 Valet locking ...... 60 Important warnings...... 13 Seat belts ...... 18 Keyless drive...... 61 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .... 22 Locks...... 65 Occupant Weight Sensor ...... 27 Alarm...... 70 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ..... 31 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...... 33 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS..... 34 Crash mode...... 36 Child safety...... 37 Child restraint systems...... 40 Infant seats...... 42 Convertible seats...... 44 00 Booster01 cushions...... 46 02 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors...... 47 Top tether anchors...... 48 Child safety locks...... 49

2 Contents

03 Your driving environment 04 Driver support 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Instruments and controls...... 76 Stability system...... 130 Volvo Sensus...... 186 Ignition modes...... 84 Road sign information (RSI) ...... 133 Menus and messages...... 187 Seats...... 86 Cruise control...... 135 The MY CAR menus...... 189 Steering wheel...... 92 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*...... 137 Climate system...... 195 Lighting...... 93 Distance Alert* ...... 148 Trip computer...... 203 Wipers and washers...... 101 City Safety™ ...... 151 Active chassis system–Four C*...... 205 Power windows...... 103 Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Passenger compartment convenience... 206 Mirrors...... 105 Pedestrian Detection*...... 157 Compass*...... 107 Driver Alert System* ...... 165 Power moonroof...... 108 Park assist*...... 171 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ...... 175 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*.... 110 Blind Spot Information System*...... 179 Starting the engine...... 113 Transmission...... 118 Brakes...... 03 121 04 05 Parking brake...... 124

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3 Contents

06 Infotainment 07 During your trip 08 Wheels and tires Introduction...... 212 Driving recommendations...... 254 General information ...... 274 Radio...... 222 Refueling...... 257 Tire inflation...... 277 Media player...... 231 Loading...... 262 Inflation pressure ...... 279 AUX/USB sockets...... 235 Towing a trailer...... 265 Tire designations ...... 280 Bluetooth media ...... 238 Emergency towing...... 268 Glossary of tire terminology ...... 282 Bluetooth® hands-free connection ...... 240 Vehicle loading ...... 283 Cell phone voice control...... 248 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 285 Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires . 286 Temporary Spare ...... 287 Tire Sealing System...... 288 Changing a wheel ...... 294 06 07 Tire08 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 298

4 Contents

09 Maintenance and 10 Specifications 11 Index specifications Label information...... 340 Index...... 354 Volvo maintenance...... 304 Specifications...... 342 Maintaining your car...... 305 Overview of information and warning sym- Hood and engine compartment...... 307 bols...... 349 Engine oil...... 308 Volvo programs...... 352 Fluids...... 310 Replacing bulbs...... 312 Wiper blades and washer fluid...... 318 Battery...... 320 Fuses...... 324 Vehicle09 care...... 332 10 11

5 Introduction

Important information

Contacting Volvo About this manual Decals In the USA: There are various types of decals in the vehicle • Before you operate your vehicle for the first whose purpose is to provide important infor- time, please familiarize yourself with the Volvo Cars of North America, LLC mation in a clear and concise way. The impor- information found in the chapters "Your Customer Care Center tance of these decals is explained as follows, Driving Environment" and "During Your in descending order of importance. 1 Volvo Drive, Trip." P.O. Box 914 • Information contained in the balance of the Risk of injury manual is extremely useful and should be Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 read after operating the vehicle for the first 1-800-458-1552 time. www.volvocars.us • The manual is structured so that it can be used for reference. For this reason, it In Canada: should be kept in the vehicle for ready access. Volvo Cars of Canada Corp Footnotes National Customer Service Certain pages of this manual contain informa- 175 Gordon Baker Road tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the page. This information supplements the North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 text that the footnote number refers to (a letter is used if the footnote refers to text in a table). 1-800-663-8255 G031590 www.volvocars.ca Display texts There are several displays in the driver’s field Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back- of vision that show messages generated by ground, white text/image on a black back- various systems and functions in the vehicle. ground. Decals of this type are used to indicate These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Man- potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this ual by being in slightly larger type than the sur- type could result in serious injury or death. rounding text and are printed in gray, (for example: Change doors unlock setting).

6 Introduction

Important information

Risk of damage to the vehicle Information Types of lists used in the manual Procedures Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or actions that must be carried out in a certain order, are arranged in numbered lists in this manual. If there is a series of illustrations associated with step-by-step instructions, each step in the procedure is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration. Lists in which letters are used can be found with series of illustrations in cases where the order in which the instructions are car- G031592 G031593 ried out is not important. Arrows with or without numbers are used White ISO symbols and white text/image on a White ISO symbols and white text/image on a to indicate the direction of a movement. black or blue warning background and space black background. These decals provide gen- for a message. If the information on decals of eral information. Arrows containing letters are used to indi- this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle cate movement. could result. NOTE If there are no illustrations associated with a step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are examples only and are not intended to are indicated by ordinary numbers. be reproductions of the decals actually used Position lists in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indi- Red circles containing a number are used cation of how they look and their approxi- in general overview illustrations in which mate location in the vehicle. The applicable certain components are pointed out. The information for your particular vehicle can be found on the respective decals in the corresponding number is also used in the vehicle. position list's description of the various components.

7 Introduction

Important information

Bullet lists NOTE WARNING Bullets are used to differentiate a number of components/functions/points of information • All information, illustrations and specifi- CALIFORNIA proposition 65 that can be listed in random order. cations contained in this manual are Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, based on the latest product information and certain vehicle components contain or For example: available at the time of publication. emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- • Coolant • Volvo reserves the right to make model fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain • Engine oil changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or without incurring obligation. Continued emit chemicals known to the State of Cali- This symbol can be found at the lower right • Do not export your Volvo to another fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page country before investigating that coun- other reproductive harm. to indicate that the current topic is continued try's applicable safety and emission on the following page. control requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply WARNING Options and accessories with these requirements. Modifications Certain components of this vehicle such as Optional or accessory equipment described in to the emission control system(s) may air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, this manual is indicated by an asterisk. render your Volvo not certifiable for adaptive steering columns, and button cell legal operation in the U.S., Canada and batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Optional or accessory equipment may not be other countries. Special handling may apply for service or available in all countries or markets. Please vehicle end of life disposal. note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ ferently, depending on special legal require- WARNING perchlorate. ments. If your vehicle is involved in an accident, Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor- unseen damage may affect its drivability mation. and safety.

8 Introduction

Important information

Shiftlock ficult or impossible to comply with these • How various systems in your vehicle were When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector requirements. Modifications to the emis- operating; is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the sion control system(s) may render your • Whether or not the driver and passenger selector from this position, the ignition must be Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in safety belts were buckled/fastened; the U.S., Canada and other countries. in mode II (see page 84) or the engine must • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing be running. Depress the brake pedal, press the • All information, illustrations and specifica- the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, button on the front side of the gear selector and tions contained in this manual are based on How fast the vehicle was traveling. move the selector from P (Park). the latest product information available at • the time of publication. Please note that These data can help provide a better under- Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) some vehicles may be equipped differ- standing of the circumstances in which The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnos- ently, depending on special legal require- crashes and injuries occur. tic test when the engine has been started and ments. Optional equipment described in driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto- this manual may not be available in all mar- NOTE matic test may be performed when the vehicle kets. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph Volvo reserves the right to make model • if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several changes at any time, or to change specifi- data are recorded by the EDR under normal times and a sound may be audible from the cations or design without notice and with- driving conditions and no personal data ABS control module. This is normal. out incurring obligation. (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, Fuel filler door Crash event data such as law enforcement, could combine Press the button on the light switch panel (see the EDR data with the type of personally the illustration on page 259) when the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with an event data identifying data routinely acquired during a is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door. recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is crash investigation. Please note that the fuel filler door will remain to record, in certain crash or near crash-like unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for- situations, such as an air bag deployment or To read data recorded by an EDR, special ward. An audible click will be heard when the hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in equipment is required, and access to the vehi- fuel filler door relocks. understanding how a vehicle's systems per- cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the formed. The EDR is designed to record data vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as Points to keep in mind related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems law enforcement, that have the special equip- Do not export your Volvo to another coun- • for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds ment, can read the information if they have try before investigating that country's or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to access to the vehicle or the EDR. applicable safety and exhaust emission record such data as: requirements. In some cases it may be dif-

9 Introduction

Important information

Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a that this handling is done in accordance with Volvo Structural Parts Statement number of computers whose task is to contin- applicable legal requirements. For additional Volvo has always been and continues to be a uously control and monitor the vehicle’s oper- information, contact: leader in automotive safety. Volvo engineers ation. They can also register information during For additional information, contact: and manufactures vehicles designed to help normal driving conditions if they detect a fault protect vehicle occupants in the event of a col- relating to the vehicle’s operation and func- In the United States lision. tionality. Some of the stored information is Volvo Cars of North America, LLC required by technicians when carrying out Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a service and maintenance to enable them to Customer Care Center collision. This energy absorption system including, but not limited to, structural compo- diagnose and rectify any faults that have 1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914 occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to nents such as bumper reinforcement bars, fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements. Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fender This information may be stored in the vehicle’s 1-800-458-1552 aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panels computers for a certain period of time. must work together to maintain cabin integrity www.volvocars.us and protect the vehicle occupants. Volvo will not contribute to spreading the above-mentioned information to third parties In Canada The supplemental restraint system including without the consent of the vehicle’s owner. but not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags, Volvo Cars of Canada Corp However, due to national legal requirements and deployment sensors work together with and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to National Customer Service the above components to provide proper timing for air bag deployment. provide information of this type to authorities 175 Gordon Baker Road such as law enforcement agencies or others Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North America who may assert a legal right to obtain such North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 does not support the use of aftermarket, alter- information. 1-800-663-8255 native or anything other than original Volvo parts for collision repair. Volvo and service and repair facilities with www.volvocars.ca agreements with Volvo have access to the spe- In addition Volvo does not support the use or cial technical equipment required in order to re-use of structural components from an exist- read and interpret the information stored by the ing vehicle that has been previously damaged. vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsible for Although these parts may appear equivalent, it ensuring that the information transmitted to is difficult to tell if the parts have been previ- Volvo during service and maintenance is ously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part stored and handled in a secure manner and has been damaged as a result of a prior colli-

10 Introduction

Important information sion. The quality of these used parts may also have been affected due to environmental exposure.

Information on the Internet Additional information about your vehicle is available at www.volvocars.com. In order to read a QR code, a QR reader is necessary, which is available as an app for a number of different cell phone and can be down- loaded from the App Store or Android Market.

QR code

11 Introduction

Environment

Volvo and the environment continuous environmental refinement of con- Recycling Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus- ventional gasoline-powered internal combus- As part of Volvo’s commitment to the environ- tomers. As a natural part of this commitment, tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at ment, it is essential for the vehicle to be recy- we care about the environment in which we all advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. cled in an environmentally sound way. Almost live. Caring for the environment means an the entire vehicle can be recycled and for that everyday involvement in reducing our environ- When you drive a Volvo, you become our part- reason, the vehicle’s final owner is requested mental impact. Volvo's environmental activities ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on to contact a Volvo retailer for information about are based on a holistic view, which means we the environment. To reduce your vehicle's approved and certified recycling facilities. consider the overall environmental impact of a environmental impact, you can: product throughout its complete life cycle. In • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. FSC this context, design, production, product use, Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- and recycling are all important considerations. omy with improperly inflated tires. In production, Volvo has partly or completely • Follow the recommended maintenance phased out several chemicals including CFCs, schedule in your Warranty and Service lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and Records Information booklet. reduced the number of chemicals used in our • Drive at a constant speed whenever pos- plants 50% since 1991. sible. Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into • See a trained and qualified Volvo service production a three-way catalytic converter with technician as soon as possible for inspec- a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen tion if the check engine (malfunction indi- The FSC (Forest Stewardship Council) sym- sensor, in 1976. The current version of this cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the bol indicates that the wood pulp used in this highly efficient system reduces emissions of vehicle has started. publication comes from FSC certified forests harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related and other responsible sources. exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and waste such as used motor oil, used batter- the search to eliminate the remaining emis- ies, brake pads, etc. sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile When cleaning your vehicle, please use manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for • genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo the air conditioning system of all models as far car care products are formulated to be back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec- environmentally friendly. tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

12 Introduction

Important warnings

Driver distraction cellular telephone use by a driver while the • Accessories that have not been approved A driver has a responsibility to do everything vehicle is moving. by Volvo may or may not be specifically possible to ensure his or her own safety and • If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga- tested for compatibility with your vehicle. the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth- tion system, set and make changes to your Additionally, an inexperienced installer may not be familiar with some of your car's ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked. systems. is part of that responsibility. • Never program your audio system while the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre- • Any of your car's performance and safety Driver distraction results from driver activities systems could be adversely affected if you that are not directly related to controlling the sets with the vehicle parked, and use your programmed presets to make radio use install accessories that Volvo has not tes- vehicle in the driving environment. Your new quicker and simpler. ted, or if you allow accessories to be instal- Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea- led by someone unfamiliar with your vehi- ture-rich entertainment and communication • Never use portable computers or personal cle. systems. These include hands-free cellular tel- digital assistants while the vehicle is moving. • Damage caused by unapproved or ephones, navigation systems, and multipur- improperly installed accessories may not pose audio systems. You may also own other be covered by your new vehicle warranty. portable electronic devices for your own con- Accessory installation See your Warranty and Service Records venience. When used properly and safely, they • We strongly recommend that Volvo owners Information booklet for more warranty enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, install only genuine, Volvo-approved information. Volvo assumes no responsi- any of these could cause a distraction. accessories, and that accessory installa- bility for death, injury, or expenses that For all of these systems, we want to provide the tions be performed only by a trained and may result from the installation of non-gen- following warning that reflects the strong Volvo qualified Volvo service technician. uine accessories. concern for your safety. Never use these devi- • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to ces or any feature of your vehicle in a way that ensure compatibility with the performance, distracts you from the task of driving safely. safety, and emission systems in your vehi- Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In cle. Additionally, a trained and qualified addition to this general warning, we offer the Volvo service technician knows where following guidance regarding specific newer accessories may and may not be safely features that may be found in your vehicle: installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv- • Never use a hand-held cellular telephone ice technician before installing any acces- while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit sory in or on your vehicle.

13 Occupant safety...... 16 Reporting safety defects...... 17 Seat belts ...... 18 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...... 22 Occupant Weight Sensor ...... 27 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ...... 31 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...... 33 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS...... 34 Crash mode...... 36 Child safety...... 37 Child restraint systems...... 40 Infant seats...... 42 Convertible seats...... 44 Booster cushions...... 46 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors...... 47 Top tether anchors...... 48 Child safety locks...... 49

14 SAFETY 01 Safety

01 Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety • Never drink and drive. Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern • If you are taking any medication, consult dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled your physician about its potential effects off the production line. Three-point seat belts on your driving abilities. (a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy- • Take a driver-retraining course. absorbing impact zones were designed into • Have your eyes checked regularly. Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable or required by government regulation. • Keep your windshield and headlights clean. We will not compromise our commitment to Replace wiper blades when they start to safety. We continue to seek out new safety • leave streaks. features and to refine those already in our vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate hear- • Take into account the traffic, road, and ing your suggestions about improving automo- weather conditions, particularly with bile safety. We also want to know if you ever regard to stopping distance. have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us • Never send text messages while driving. in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: • Refrain from using or minimize the use of a 1-800-663-8255. cell phone while driving. Occupant safety reminders How safely you drive doesn't depend on how Recall information old you are but rather on: Information regarding recalls or other service campaigns is available on our website at • How well you see. www.volvocars.com/us/. Select the tab YOUR • Your ability to concentrate. VOLVO and the heading RECALL INFORMA- • How quickly you make decisions under TION will be displayed at the lower left side of stress to avoid an accident. the screen. The following suggestions are intended to help you cope with the ever changing traffic environment.

16 01 Safety

Reporting safety defects 01

Reporting safety defects in the U.S. http://www.safercar.gov Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a Volvo strongly recommends that if If you believe your vehicle has a defect that defect which could cause a crash or could cause a crash or could cause injury or your vehicle is covered under a serv- death, you should immediately inform Trans- could cause injury or death, you ice campaign, safety or emission port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars should immediately inform the recall or similar action, it should be of Canada Corp. National Highway Traffic Safety completed as soon as possible. Transport Canada can be contacted at: Administration (NHTSA) in addition to Please check with your local retailer 1-800-333-0510 notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer- or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar if your vehicle is covered under these complaints, it may open an investiga- conditions. Fax: 1-819-994-3372 tion, and if it finds that a safety defect Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road exists in a group of vehicles, it may NHTSA can be reached at: Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z order a recall and remedy campaign. Internet: 0A1 However, NHTSA cannot become http://www.nhtsa.gov involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or Volvo Telephone: Cars of North America, LLC. To con- 1-888-DASH-2-DOT tact NHTSA, you may either call the (1-888-327-4236). Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- portation, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from:

17 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

General information in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces der section of the belt is across the seat occu- exerted by the seat belt on the occupant. pant's collarbone and not across the throat.

Fastening a seat belt Buckling Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is heard. The seat belt retractor is normally "unlocked" and you can move freely, provided that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far. Adjusting seat belt height (front seat belts only)

Adjusting the seat belt Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- Correct height adjustment pants of your vehicle. Children should be properly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster seat determined by age, weight and height. Volvo also believes no child should sit in the front seat of a vehicle. Most states and provinces make it mandatory for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners Adjusting seat belt height All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners The height of the shoulder section of the seat that reduce slack in the belts. These preten- belt must be correctly adjusted. Press the but- sioners are triggered in situations where the ton and move the upper seat belt anchor to Incorrect height adjustment front or side impact airbags deploy, and in cer- position it as high as possible so that the shoul- tain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts also include a tension reducing device which,

18 01 Safety

Seat belts 01

Seat belt retractor When wearing the seat belt remember: WARNING The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol- • The belt should not be twisted or turned. lowing situations: Never use a seat belt for more than one • The lap section of the belt must be posi- occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion • if the belt is pulled out rapidly tioned low on the hips (not pressing against of the belt under the arm, behind the back the abdomen). • during braking and acceleration or otherwise out of position. Such use could Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled cause injury in the event of an accident. As if the vehicle is leaning excessively • • up into its retractor and that the shoulder seat belts lose much of their strength when • when driving in turns and lap belts are taut. exposed to violent stretching, they should be replaced after any collision, even if they • if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- appear to be undamaged. gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is acti- Unbuckling the seat belt vated To remove the seat belt, press the red section on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the WARNING NOTE vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the • Never repair the belt yourself; have this Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) belt back into the retractor slot. work done by a trained and qualified is equipped with the ALR/ELR function, Volvo service technician only. which is designed to help keep the seat belt Seat belt maintenance • Any device used to induce slack into the taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is Check periodically that the seat belts are in shoulder belt portion of the three-point pulled out as far as possible. If this is done, good condition. Use water and a mild deter- belt system will have a detrimental a sound from the seat belt retractor will be gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism effect on the amount of protection avail- audible, which is normal, and the seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in place. This function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull able to you in the event of a collision. function is automatically disabled when the rapidly on the strap. • The seat back should not be tilted too seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted. far back. The shoulder belt must be taut in order to function properly. See also page 38 for information about using • Do not use child safety seats or child a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor a booster cushions/backrests in the front child seat. passenger's seat. We also recommend that children who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened.

19 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

Seat belt reminder • It provides information about which seat Seat belt use during pregnancy belts are fastened in the rear seat. A message will appear in the information display when a belt is being used. This message will disappear after approximately 6 seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button on the left steering wheel lever. • It also provides a reminder if one of the occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. A visual and audible signal will be given. These signals will stop when the

G017726 seat belt has been re-buckled or can be G020998 stopped by pressing the OK button. Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console • The message Unbelted in rear seat will The seat belt should always be worn during The seat belt reminder consists of an audible appear in the information display if one of pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the signal, an indicator light near the rearview mir- the rear doors has been opened. correct way. The diagonal section should wrap ror and a symbol in the instrument panel that The message in the information display can over the shoulder then be routed between the alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their always be accessed, even if it has been erased, breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap seat belts. The indicator light will be on for a by pressing the OK button to display stored section should lay flat over the thighs and as total of 6 seconds from the time the ignition is messages. low as possible under the belly. It must never switched on. There will also be an audible sig- be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack nal if the driver's seat belt is not fastened. from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the body without any twists. If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers warning light will be active for a total of 6 sec- should adjust their seats and steering wheel onds. such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means they must Rear seats be able to easily operate the foot pedals and The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two steering wheel). Within this context, they additional functions: should strive to position the seat with as large

20 01 Safety

Seat belts 01 a distance as possible between their belly and the steering wheel.

Child seats Please refer to page 40 for information on securing child seats with the seat belts.

21 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

General information properly, the general warning symbol illumi- WARNING nates and a text message will be displayed. See also page 78 and page 80 for more If your vehicle has become flood-damaged information about indicator and warning sym- in any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle), do not bols. attempt to start the vehicle or insert the remote key into the ignition slot before dis- WARNING connecting the battery (see below). This may cause airbag deployment which could • If the SRS warning light stays on after result in serious injury. Have the vehicle the engine has started or if it illuminates towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv- while you are driving, have the vehicle ice technician for repairs. inspected by a trained and qualified Before attempting to tow the vehicle: Volvo service technician as soon as possible. 1. Switch off the ignition for at least Warning symbols in the instrument panel • Never try to repair any component or 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. As an enhancement to the three-point seat part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer- 2. Follow the instructions for manually belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple- ence in the system could cause mal- overriding the shiftlock system on page 120. mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS function and serious injury. All work on these systems should be performed by consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air- a trained and qualified Volvo service bags, side impact airbags, a front passenger technician. occupant weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of these systems are monitored by the SRS control module. An SRS warning light in the instrument panel (see the illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in modes I or II, and will normally go out after approximately 6 seconds if no faults are detected in the system. Where applicable, a text message will also be displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning

22 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

Front airbags The passenger's side front airbag is folded behind a panel located above the glove compartment.

WARNING • The airbags in the vehicle are designed to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replacement for–the three-point seat belts. For maximum protection, wear seat belts at all times. Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. G018665 Location of the passenger's side front airbag • Never drive with your hands on the As the movement of the seats' occupants com- steering wheel pad/airbag housing. The front airbag system presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel- The front airbags supplement the three-point • The front airbags are designed to help led at a controlled rate to provide better cush- prevent serious injury. Deployment seat belts. For these airbags to provide the ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also protection intended, seat belts must be worn occurs very quickly and with consider- deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire able force. During normal deployment at all times. process, including inflation and deflation of the and depending on variables such as The front airbag system includes gas genera- airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec- seating position, one may experience tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- ond. abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other tion sensors that activate the gas generators, The location of the front airbags is indicated by injuries as a result from deployment of causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel one or both of the airbags. gas. pad and above the glove compartment, and by • When installing any accessory equip- decals on both sun visors and on the front and ment, make sure that the front airbag far right side of the dash. system is not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause mal- The driver's side front airbag is folded and function. located in the steering wheel hub.

23 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Front airbag deployment WARNING Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 • The front airbags are designed to deploy 1-800-458-1552 during certain frontal or front-angular col- • Do not use child safety seats or child lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend- booster cushions/backrests in the front www.volvocars.us passenger's seat. We also recommend ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and In Canada object impacted. The airbags may also that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches deploy in certain non-frontal collisions (140 cm) in height who have outgrown Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. where rapid deceleration occurs. these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened1. National Customer Service • The SRS sensors, which trigger the front airbags, are designed to react to both the • Never drive with the airbags deployed. 175 Gordon Baker Road impact of the collision and the inertial The fact that they hang out can impair North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 forces generated by it, and to determine if the steering of your vehicle. Other the intensity of the collision is sufficient for safety systems can also be damaged. 1-800-663-8255 the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags • The smoke and dust formed when the www.volvocars.ca to be deployed. airbags are deployed can cause skin However, not all frontal collisions activate the and eye irritation in the event of pro- front airbags. longed exposure. • If the collision involves a nonrigid object (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed Should you have questions about any compo- object at a low speed, the front airbags will nent in the SRS system, please contact a not necessarily deploy. trained and qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo customer support: • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a side impact collision, in a collision from the In the USA rear or in a rollover situation. Volvo Cars of North America, LLC • The amount of damage to the bodywork does not reliably indicate if the airbags Customer Care Center should have deployed or not. 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 27.

24 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

NOTE Airbag decals WARNING • Deployment of front airbags occurs only • Children must never be allowed in the one time during an accident. In a colli- front passenger's seat. sion where deployment occurs, the air- • Occupants in the front passenger's seat bags and seat belt pretensioners acti- must never sit on the edge of the seat, vate. Some noise occurs and a small sit leaning toward the instrument panel amount of powder is released. The or otherwise sit out of position. release of the powder may appear as smoke-like matter. This is a normal • The occupant's back must be as upright characteristic and does not indicate fire. as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly G008335 • Volvo's front airbags use special sen- fastened. sors that are integrated with the front Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors seat buckles. The point at which the air- • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on bag deploys is determined by whether the dash, seat or out of the window. or not the seat belt is being used, as well as the severity of the collision. • Collisions can occur where only one of the airbags deploys. If the impact is less severe, but severe enough to present a clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is more severe, the airbags are triggered at full capacity.

Passenger's side airbag decal

25 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

WARNING • No objects or accessory equipment, e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed on, attached to, or installed near the air bag hatch (the area above the glove compartment) or the area affected by airbag deployment (see the illustration on page 23). • There should be no loose articles, such as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dashboard area. • Never try to open the airbag cover on the steering wheel or the passenger's side dashboard. This should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

26 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

General information The OWS works with sensors that are part of airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead sensors are designed to detect the presence of console, near the base of the rearview mirror. a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger's side front airbag should be 2 NOTE enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not inflate). When the ignition is switched on, the OWS indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- while the system performs a self-diagnostic senger's side front airbag when: test. • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, 2 or has small/medium objects in the front However, if a fault is detected in the system:

G017724 seat, • The OWS indicator light will stay on Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light • the system determines that an infant is • The SRS warning light (see page 22) will present in a rear-facing infant seat that is come on and stay on Disabling the passenger's side front installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, • The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service airbag urgent will be displayed in the information Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults • the system determines that a small child is display. and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches present in a forward-facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufac- (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any WARNING vehicle with a front passenger side airbag, and turer's instructions, be properly restrained for their size and weight. • the system determines that a small child is If a fault in the system is detected and indi- For child safety recommendations,see present in a booster seat, cated as described, be aware that the pas- page 38. senger's side front airbag will not deploy in • a front passenger takes his/her weight off the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is of the seat for a period of time, system and Occupant Weight Sensor designed to meet the regulatory requirements • a child or a small person occupies the front should be inspected by a trained and quali- of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard passenger's seat. fied Volvo service technician as soon as (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will possible. The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on under certain conditions. to remind you that the passenger's side front

27 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor

WARNING Passeng- OWS indi- Passeng- BAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off. • Never try to open, remove, or repair any er's seat cator light er's side components in the OWS system. This occu- status front air- If a person of adult size is sitting in the front could result in system malfunction. pancy sta- bag status passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR- Maintenance or repairs should only be tus BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that carried out by an a trained and qualified the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If Volvo service technician. Seat unoc- OWS indica- Passenger's this happens: cupied tor light side front The front passenger's seat should not • lights up. airbag disa- • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to be modified in any way. This could place the seatback in an upright position. bled reduce pressure on the seat cushion, • Have the person sit upright in the seat, which might interfere with the OWS sys- Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's centered on the seat cushion, with the per- tem's function. pied by low tor light side front son's legs comfortably extended. weight lights up airbag disa- • Restart the vehicle and have the person occupant/ bled remain in this position for about two objectA minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the pas- Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's senger's frontal airbag. pied by tor light is side front heavy occu- not lit airbag ena- • If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator pant/object bled lamp remains on even after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat. A Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do This condition reflects limitations of the OWS not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled classification capability. It does not indicate unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is OWS malfunction. any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat. Modifications The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) If you are considering modifying your vehicle in the passenger's side front airbag in the event any way to accommodate a disability, for of a collision anytime the system senses that a example by altering or adapting the driver's or person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys- front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIR- tems, please contact Volvo at:

28 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

In the USA WARNING WARNING Volvo Cars of North America, LLC • No objects that add to the total weight • Keep the following points in mind with Customer Care Center on the seat should be placed on the respect to the OWS system. Failure to front passenger's seat. If a child is follow these instructions could 1 Volvo Drive seated in the front passenger's seat adversely affect the system's function P.O. Box 914 with any additional weight, this extra and result in serious injury to the occu- weight could cause the OWS system to pant of the front passenger's seat: Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 enable the airbag, which might cause it • The full weight of the front seat passen- 1-800-458-1552 to deploy in the event of a collision, ger should always be on the seat cush- thereby injuring the child. In Canada ion. The passenger should never lift • The seat belt should never be wrapped him/herself off the seat cushion using Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. around an object on the front passeng- the armrest in the door or the center National Customer Service er's seat. This could interfere with the console, by pressing the feet on the OWS system's function. floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario • The front passenger's seat belt should cushion, or by pressing against the M2H 2N7 never be used in a way that exerts more backrest in a way that reduces pressure on the seat cushion. This could cause 1-800-663-8255 pressure on the passenger than normal. This could increase the pressure exer- OWS to disable the front, passenger's ted on the weight sensor by a child, and side airbag. could result in the airbag being enabled, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child.

29 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor

WARNING • Do not place any type of object on the front passenger's seat in such a way that jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 38). • No objects should be placed under the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.

30 01 Safety

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags 01

General information NOTE SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas generator, the side airbag modules built into the outboard sides of both front seat backrests, G024377 and electronic sensors/wiring.

G032949 Driver's side SIPS airbag Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front seats only) As an enhancement to the structural side impact protection built into your vehicle, it is also equipped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS) airbags. The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the G024378 crash severity, angle, speed and point of Passenger's side SIPS airbag impact. SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

31 01 Safety

01 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

WARNING • The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact Pro- tection System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations. • The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment. • No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment. • Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident.

32 01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01

General information WARNING WARNING • The IC system is a supplement to the In order for the IC to provide its best pro- Side Impact Protection System. It is not tection, both front seat occupants and both designed to deploy during collisions outboard rear seat occupants should sit in from the rear of the vehicle. an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened; adults using the seat belt and • Never try to open or repair any compo- children using the proper child restraint sys- nents of the IC system. This should be tem. Only adults should sit in the front seats. done only by a trained and qualified Children must never be allowed in the front Volvo service technician. passenger seat, see page 38 for guide- • Never hang heavy items from the ceiling lines. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an handles. This could impede deployment accident. of the Inflatable Curtain. • The rear seat should not be loaded to a This system consists of inflatable curtains level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the located along the sides of the roof liners, upper edge of the rear side windows. stretching from the center of both front side Objects placed higher than this level windows to the rear edge of the rear side door could impede the function of the Inflat- windows. It is designed to help protect the able Curtain. heads of the occupants of the front seats and the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions. In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur- tain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag System (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains inflated for approximately 3 seconds.

33 01 Safety

01 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS

General information Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – WARNING front seats only Occupants in the front seats must never The WHIPS system consists of specially • sit out of position. The occupant's back designed hinges and brackets on the front seat must be as upright as comfort allows backrests designed to help absorb some of the and be against the seat back with the energy generated in a collision from the rear seat belt properly fastened. (when the vehicle is rear-ended). • If your vehicle has been involved in a In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges rear-end collision, the front seat back- and brackets of the front seat backrests are rests must be inspected by a trained designed to change position slightly to allow and qualified Volvo service technician, the backrest/head restraint to help support the even if the seats appear to be undam- occupant's head before moving slightly rear- aged. Certain components in the ward. This movement helps absorb some of WHIPS system may need to be the forces that could result in whiplash. replaced. • Do not attempt to service any compo- WARNING nent in the WHIPS system yourself. • The WHIPS system is designed to supplement the other safety systems in your vehicle. For this system to function properly, the three-point seat belt must be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. • The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear, depending on the crash severity, angle and speed.

34 01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS 01

WARNING WARNING • Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind Any contact between the front seat back- the front seats could impede the func- rests and the folded rear seat or a rear-fac- tion of the WHIPS system. ing child seat could impede the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded • If the rear seat backrests are folded down, the occupied front seats must be down, cargo must be secured to pre- adjusted forward so that they do not touch vent it from sliding forward against the the folded rear seat. front seat backrests in the event of a collision from the rear. This could interfere with the action of the WHIPS system.

35 01 Safety

01 Crash mode

function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, 2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the sensors for one of the safety systems, the remote key in the ignition slot. brake system, etc. 3. Try to start the vehicle. WARNING If the message Safety mode See manual is still displayed, the vehicle should not be driven • Never attempt to repair the vehicle and must be towed. Concealed faults may yourself or to reset the electrical system make the vehicle difficult to control. after the vehicle has displayed Safety mode See manual. This could result in Moving the vehicle injury or improper system function. If the message Normal mode is displayed • Restoring the vehicle to normal operat- when Safety mode See manual is no longer ing status should only be done by a displayed, the vehicle may be moved carefully Driving after a collision trained and qualified Volvo service tech- from its present position, if for example, it is If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, nician. blocking traffic. It should, however, not be the text Safety mode See manual may • After Safety mode See manual has moved farther than is absolutely necessary. appear in the information display. This indi- been displayed, if you detect the odor cates that the vehicle's functionality has been of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel WARNING leakage, do not attempt to start the reduced. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. after Safety mode has been set, it should NOTE not be driven or towed (pulled by another vehicle). There may be concealed damage This text can only be shown if the display is Attempting to start the vehicle If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is that could make it difficult or impossible to undamaged and the vehicle's electrical sys- control. The vehicle should be transported tem is intact. no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali- vehicle. To do so: fied Volvo service technician for inspection/ Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one 1. Remove the remote key from the ignition repairs. or more of the safety systems (e.g. front or side slot and open the driver's door. If a mes- airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of sage is displayed that the ignition is on, the seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. The press the start button. collision may have damaged an important

36 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Children should be seated safely restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring When a child has outgrown the child safety Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint or increasing the injury of a child. seat, you should use the rear seat with the standard seat belt fastened. The best way to systems for all occupants including children. All states and provinces have legislation gov- help protect the child here is to place the child Remember that, regardless of age and size, a erning how and where children should be car- on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly child should always be properly restrained in a ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist- located on the hips (see the illustration on page vehicle. ing in your state or province. Recent accident 46). Legislation in your state or province may statistics have shown that children are safer in Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in rear seating positions than front seating posi- LATCH attachments, which make it more con- combination with the seat belt, depending on tions when properly restrained. A child restraint venient to install child seats. the child's age and/or size. Please check local system can help protect a child in a vehicle. regulations. Some restraint systems for children are Here's what to look for when selecting a child designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap restraint system: A specially designed and tested booster cush- belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. ion and backrest can be obtained from your It should have a label certifying that it meets Such child restraint systems can help protect Volvo retailer. children in vehicles in the event of an accident applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety only if they are used properly. However, chil- Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. dren could be endangered in a crash if the child CMVSS 213. (15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in height restraints are not properly secured in the vehi- Make sure the child restraint system is cle. Failure to follow the installation instructions approved for the child's height, weight and Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs. for your child restraint can result in your child development – the label required by the stand- (18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm) striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop. ard or regulation, or instructions for infant in height Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable restraints, typically provide this information. substitute for a child restraint system. In an In using any child restraint system, we urge you accident, a child held in a person's arms can to carefully look over the instructions that are be crushed between the vehicle's interior and provided with the restraint. Be sure you under- an unrestrained person. The child could also be stand them and can use the device properly injured by striking the interior, or by being ejec- and safely in this vehicle. A misused child ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver restraint system can result in increased injuries or impact. The same can also happen if the for both the infant or child and other occupants infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat. in the vehicle. Other occupants should also be properly

37 01 Safety

01 Child safety

WARNING Automatic Locking Retractor/ WARNING Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ • Do not use child safety seats or child ELR) Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend To make child seat installation easier, each passenger's seat. We also recommend that that children under 4 feet 7 inches seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- children who have outgrown these devices (140 cm) in height who have outgrown ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt taut. fastened. seat belt fastened. When attaching the seat belt to a child • Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked seat: Volvo's recommendations and keep remote controls out of a 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit child’s reach. Unsupervised children according to the child seat manufacturer's in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. could lock themselves in an open trunk and risk injury. Children should be instructions. A front airbag is a very powerful device designed, by law, to help protect an adult. taught not to play in vehicles. 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. Because of the size of the airbag and its speed • On hot days, the temperature in the 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the of inflation, a child should never be placed in vehicle interior can rise very quickly. buckle (lock) in the usual way. Exposure to these high temperatures the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel- for even a short period of time can 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo cause heat-related injury or death. the child seat. has been an innovator in safety for over sev- Small children are particularly at risk. A sound from the seat belt retractor will be enty-five years, and we'll continue to do our audible at this time and is normal. The belt will part. But we need your help. Please remember Child seat should always be registered. See now be locked in place. This function is auto- to put your children in the back seat, and page 39 for more information. matically disabled when the seat belt is buckle them up. unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. Volvo has some very specific recommendations: • Always wear your seat belt. • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety device which, when used with a three- point seat belt can help reduce serious injuries during certain types of accidents.

38 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehicle. • Volvo strongly recommends that everyone in the vehicle be properly restrained. • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag. • Drive safely!

Child restraint registration and recalls Registering a child restraint Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay informed about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints. Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern- ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

39 01 Safety

01 Child restraint systems

Child restraints G022847 G023269

G022840 Convertible seat Booster cushion Infant seat WARNING WARNING There are three main types of child restraint systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and A child seat should never be used in the Always refer to the child restraint manufac- booster cushions. They are classified accord- front passenger seat of any vehicle with a turer's instructions for detailed information ing to the child's age and size. front passenger airbag – not even if the on securing the restraint. "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the The following section provides general infor- rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles mation on securing a child restraint using a equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If three-point seat belt. Refer to page 47–48 the severity of an accident were to cause the for information on securing a child restraint airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this posi- using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top tion. tether anchorages.

40 01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.

41 01 Safety

01 Infant seats

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. G023270

G022844 Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng- plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct er's seat WARNING click is audible. • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing NOTE position only. Refer to page 47–48 for information on • The infant seat should not be positioned securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/ behind the driver's seat unless there is LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether adequate space for safe installation. anchorages.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat

according to the manufacturer's instruc- G023271 tions. Fasten the seat belt

42 01 Safety

Infant seats 01 G022846 G022850

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat out as far as possible to activate the belt's belt path to ensure that it is held securely automatic locking function. in place by the seat belt.

NOTE WARNING The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child release when the seat belt is unbuckled and restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) allowed to retract fully. in any direction along the seat belt path.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound the seat belt and letting it retract completely. from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place.

43 01 Safety

01 Convertible seats

Securing a convertible seat with a seat WARNING belt • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • Convertible child seats should be instal-

G022847 led in the rear seat only. Route the seat belt through the convertible seat • A rear-facing convertible seat should not

G018630 be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas- WARNING installation. senger's seat Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the con- NOTE vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda- 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat tions. according to the manufacturer's instruc- Refer to pages 47 and 48 for information tions. on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat anchorages. of the vehicle.

Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child.

44 01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G022848 G022850

Fasten the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch G022849 plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt WARNING click is audible. 6. Push and pull the convertible seat along A child seat should never be used in the 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt the seat belt path to ensure that it is held front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the out as far as possible to activate the belt's securely in place by the seat belt. "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the automatic locking function. rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity WARNING of an accident were to cause the airbag to NOTE inflate, this could lead to serious injury or It should not be possible to move the child death to a child seated in this position. The locking retractor will automatically restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) release when the seat belt is unbuckled and in any direction along the seat belt path. allowed to retract fully. The convertible seat can be removed by 5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A completely. sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this

45 01 Safety

01 Booster cushions

Securing a booster cushion G022852

G022851 Positioning the seat belt Position the child correctly on the booster cushion 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and Booster cushions are recommended for chil- fits snugly around the child. dren who have outgrown convertible seats. WARNING 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of the vehicle. • The hip section of the three-point seat belt must fit snugly across the child's 2. With the child properly seated on the hips, not across the stomach. booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the cushion according to the man- • The shoulder section of the three-point ufacturer's instructions. seat belt should be positioned across the chest and shoulder. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch • The shoulder belt must never be placed plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct behind the child's back or under the click is audible. arm.

46 01 Safety

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 01

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child 3. Fasten the attachment on the child seat anchors restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ LATCH/LATCH lower anchors. 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to

FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to G018631 the child restraint system's manual for weight and size ratings. Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped NOTE WARNING child seats are located in the rear, outboard • The rear seat's center position is not Be sure to fasten the attachment cor- seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. • equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower rectly to the anchor (see the illustration). Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the anchors. When installing a child If the attachment is not correctly fas- anchor positions as shown. To access the restraint in this position, attach the tened, the child restraint may not be anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate restraint's top tether strap (if it is so properly secured in the event of a colli- the anchors by feel. Always follow your child equipped) to the top tether anchorage sion. seat manufacturer's installation instructions, point and secure the restraint with the and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors vehicle's center seat belt. • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint and top tethers whenever possible. anchors are only intended for use with • Always follow your child seat manufac- child seats positioned in the outboard turer's installation instructions, and use seating positions. These anchors are To access the anchors both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and 1. Put the child restraint in position. not certified for use with any child top tethers whenever possible. restraint that is positioned in the center 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down seating position. When securing a child the seat cushion and locate the anchors by restraint in the center seating position, feel. use only the vehicle's center seat belt.

47 01 Safety

01 Top tether anchors

Child restraint anchorages not equipped with lower tether straps, or WARNING the restraint is used in the center seating position, follow instructions for securing a • Never route a top tether strap over the child restraint using the Automatic Locking top of the head restraint. The strap Retractor seat belt (see page 38). should be routed beneath the head restraint. 6. Firmly tension all straps. • Child restraint anchorages are designed Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's to withstand only those loads imposed instructions for information on securing the by correctly fitted child restraints. Under child seat. no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. The anchorages are not able to withstand excessive forces on them in the event of collision if full harness seat belts or adult Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top seat belts are installed to them. An adult tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are who uses a belt anchored in a child located on the rear parcel shelf. restraint anchorage runs a great risk of suffering severe injuries should a colli- Securing a child seat sion occur. Do not install rear speakers that require 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. • the removal of the top tether anchors or 2. Fold up the plastic cover over the anchor- interfere with the proper use of the top age to be used. tether strap. 3. Route the top tether strap under the head restraint and attach it to the anchor. 4. Fold down the outboard head restraints or lower the center head restraint for easier access to the ISOFIX/LATCH anchor. 5. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISO- FIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is

48 01 Safety

Child safety locks 01

Child safety locks

Child safety locks – rear doors The controls are located on the rear door jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or a screwdriver to adjust these controls. The rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the slot is in the horizontal position. The rear doors can be opened from the inside when the slot is in the vertical position.

49 Remote key and key blade...... 52 Valet locking ...... 60 Keyless drive...... 61 Locks...... 65 Alarm...... 70

50 LOCKS AND ALARM 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Introduction Detachable key blade NOTE Two remote keys or optional Personal Car Each remote key or PCC contains a detachable 02 metal key blade for mechanically locking or Additional or duplicate remote control keys Communicators (PCC) are provided with your can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo vehicle. They enable you to unlock the doors unlocking the driver's door and the glove com- Retailer. and trunk, and also function as ignition keys to partment, and to enable the valet locking func- You can also obtain additional or duplicate start the vehicle or operate electrical compo- tion. See page 57 for more information on the key blade and see page 60 for information on remote control keys from certain independ- nents. The remote keys contain detachable ent repair facilities and locksmiths that are metal key blades for manually locking or the valet locking function. The key blades have qualified to make remote control keys. Each unlocking the driver's door and the glove com- a unique code, which is used if new ones need key must be programmed to work with your partment. The visible ends of these key blades to be produced. This code is available at an vehicle. authorized Volvo retailer. are unique to make it easier to identify "your" California Only: remote key. Up to six remotes can be pro- The visible ends of these key blades are unique grammed for use on the same vehicle. A list of independent repair facilities and/or to make it easier to identify "your" remote key. locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and The PCCs have enhanced functionality com- code replacement keys can be found: pared with the standard remote key. Loss of a remote key If either of the remote keys is lost, the other • on the Volvo website at should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer. http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys NOTE As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost • by calling Volvo Customer Care at In the remainder of this chapter, all referen- remote key must be erased from the system. 1-800-458-1552 ces to the remote key also pertain to the PCC unless otherwise stated. The number of registered keys for the vehicle can be found by pressing MY CAR and going WARNING into Information Number of keys. See Never leave the remote key in the ignition page 189 for a description of the menu sys- slot if children are to remain in the vehicle. tem. USA-5WK49264 See page 84 for more information on the var- FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO ious ignition modes. 5WK49236 FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266

52 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO driver's door is unlocked with the same remote Confirmation will only be given when all doors 5WK49233 key and the door is opened within 2 minutes, and the trunk are properly closed and locked. the power driver's seat and side door mirrors 02 FCC ID:KR55WK49233 will automatically move to the position that they NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC were in when the doors were most recently rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the locked with the same remote key. If the seat/ If you do not receive confirmation when following conditions: (1) This device may not locking the vehicle, check whether a door or mirrors have not been readjusted since the the trunk is ajar, or if this feature has been cause harmful interference, and (2) this device vehicle was locked, they will already be in the turned off in the menu. must accept any interference received, includ- position stored in that particular remote key ing interference that may cause undesired and will not move. See page 87 for more operation. information. See also page 88 for more infor- Unlocking confirmation mation on this feature. • The turn signals will flash twice and the Canada-5WK49264 door mirrors will fold* out. This feature can be activated or deactivated in IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO Making a setting the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CAR and 5WK49236 Different alternatives for locking/unlocking going into Settings Car settings Car IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266 confirmation can be selected in the menus by key memory. See page 189 for a description pressing MY CAR on the center console con- IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO of the menu system. trol panel. 5WK49233 See also page 61 for information regarding • To activate visual confirmation: go to IC:267T-5WK49233 vehicles with the optional keyless drive. Settings Car settings Light Operation is subject to the following condi- Confirmation when locking/unlocking settings and select Door lock tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- the vehicle confirmation light and/or Unlock ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- confirmation light by pressing OK/ Settings can be made in the menu system for ference, including interference that may cause MENU. audible and visual confirmation when the vehi- undesired operation of the device. cle has been locked or unlocked. With these • To activate audible confirmation: go to Settings Car settings Lock Key memory: door mirrors and driver's functions activated, the following will occur settings and select Audible seat when the vehicle is locked/unlocked: confirmation by pressing OK/MENU. The position of the side door mirrors and power Locking confirmation driver's seat* are stored in the remote keys • The turn signals flash once, an audible sig- See page 189 for a description of the menu when the vehicle is locked. The next time the nal sounds and the door mirrors will fold* system. in.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Lock indicator Message Meaning This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following con- 02 Insert car key Remote key not rec- dition: (1) This device may not cause harmful ognized during start. interference, and (2) this device must accept Try to start the vehi- any interference received, including interfer- cle again. ence that may cause undesired operation.

Car key not found PCC with keyless Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO drive only. Remote Operation is subject to the following condi- key not recognized tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- during start. Try to ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- start the vehicle ference, including interference that may cause again. undesired operation of the device. Lock/alarm indicator light If the problem con- See page 113 for information on starting the A flashing indicator light at the base of the tinues, insert the vehicle. windshield verifies that the vehicle is locked. remote key into the ignition slot and try Replacing the battery in the remote key Immobilizer (start inhibitor) to start the vehicle The batteries should be replaced if: Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle again. • The information symbol illuminates and contains a coded transponder. The code in the Low battery in remote control. Please Immobilizer Try Remote key fault key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition change batteries. is shown in the display start again during start. Contact slot where it is compared to the code stored in and/or an authorized Volvo the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start workshop. • if the locks do not react after several only with a properly coded key. If you misplace attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle. a key, take the other keys to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for reprog- CAUTION NOTE ramming as an anti-theft measure. The follow- Never use force when inserting the remote ing messages (which may appear in the instru- The remote key's range is normally approx- key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot imately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle. ment panel display) are related to the immobil- be started if the transponder is damaged. izer: See page 58 for information about replacing USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO the battery.

54 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Remote key/Personal Car After a short pause, press the Unlock button a Communicator (PCC) - common second time within 10 seconds to unlock the functions* other doors and the trunk. 02 This function can be changed so that all doors unlock at the same time by pressing My Car and going to Settings Car settings Lock settings Change doors unlock setting. See page 189 for a description of the menu system. Approach lighting – As you approach the vehicle, press the button on the remote key to Personal Car Communicator (PCC)* light the interior lighting, parking lights, license Lock plate lighting and the lights in the door mirrors*. Standard remote key Unlock These lights will switch off automatically after Lock Approach lighting 30, 60 or 90 seconds. See page 189 for a description of the menu system. Unlock Trunk unlock/open Unlock/open trunk Approach lighting Panic alarm Press once: This unlocks the trunk (but does Trunk unlock/open Buttons on the remote not open it) and disarms the alarm and optional Lock – Press the Lock button on the Panic alarm movement sensor (the alarm indicator light on remote once to lock all doors and the trunk. the dashboard will go out). If the trunk is not The turn signals will flash once to confirm lock- opened within two minutes it will automatically ing. relock and the alarm will be rearmed. Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk and remote once to unlock the driver's door. pops it open slightly.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

NOTE NOTE Unique functions—PCC* 02 Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunk Buildings or other obstacles may interfere lid may prevent it from opening. with the function of the remote key. The vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with the key blade, see page 57. See also page 67 for information on opening the trunk from the passenger compartment. If the remote key is removed from the vehicle After closing, the trunk will not automatically while the engine is running or if the ignition is relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the in mode I or II and all of the doors are closed, alarm. a message will appear in the instrument panel Panic alarm – This button can be used to display and there will be an audible signal. attract attention during emergency situations. When the remote key is returned to the vehicle, the message will be erased and the audible To activate the panic alarm, press and hold this Information button button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice signal will stop after one of the following has within 3 seconds. The turn signals and horn will been done: Indicator lights be activated. The panic alarm will stop auto- • The remote key is inserted in the ignition Pressing the information button provides cer- matically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds. slot tain information about the vehicle with the help To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds • The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph of the indicator lights. and press the button again. (30 km/h) Using the information button • The OK button on the left steering wheel The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehi- 1. Press the information button . cle. lever is pressed 2. All of the indicator lights will flash sequen- Range tially for approximately 7 seconds to indi- The remote key has a range of approximately cate that the PCC is receiving information 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle. from the vehicle. If any of the buttons are pressed during this 7-second period, transmission of information to the PCC will be interrupted.

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

NOTE Range NOTE The PCC's lock and unlock functions have a If none of the indicator lights flash when the range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the If none of the indicator lights illuminate when 02 information button has been pressed sev- the information button is pressed, this may eral times from different places in relation to vehicle. be because the most recent transmission the vehicle, contact an authorized Volvo between the vehicle and the PCC was inter- service technician. NOTE rupted or impeded by buildings or other objects. • The approach lighting, panic alarm, and The indicator lights provide information the functions controlled by the informa- according to the illustration: tion button have a range of approxi- Keyless drive mately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle. Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal • Radio waves, buildings or other obsta- Car Communicator have the keyless drive cles may interfere with the function of function, see page 61 for detailed informa- the PCC. tion.

If the vehicle does not provide confirmation Detachable key blade when a button has been pressed, try moving The key blade can be removed from the remote closer and pressing the button again. key. When removed, the key blade can be used to: Outside of the PCC´s range If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft • Lock/unlock the driver's door if the remote (100 m) from the vehicle when the information key is not functioning properly button is pressed, no new information will be • Lock/unlock the glove compartment (see Steady green light: the vehicle is correctly received. The PCC most recently used to lock page 67) locked. or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle's • Override the transmission's shiftlock sys- Steady yellow light: the vehicle is not most recently received status. The indicator tem (see page 120) locked. lights will not flash when the information button Enable/disable the valet locking function is pressed while the PCC is out of range. • Steady red light: the alarm has been trig- (see page 60) gered since the vehicle was most recently If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlock locked. the vehicle, only the one used most recently will Both red lights flash alternatively: the alarm show the correct locking status. was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.

57 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

• The front passenger's door and the rear Unlocking the doors with the detached side doors can be locked manually if nec- key blade 02 essary Insert the key blade as far as possible in the • The trunk can be opened manually if nec- driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clock- essary (see page 67) wise approximately one-quarter turn to unlock the driver's door only. Removing the key blade NOTE After unlocking the driver's door with the key blade, opening the door will trigger the alarm.

To disable the alarm: Insert the remote key in the ignition slot. This also applies to vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive.

Replacing batteries in the remote key/ Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. PCC Pull the key blade straight out of the remote The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCC key. should be replaced if: • The information symbol lights up and a text Reinserting the key blade in the remote appears in the information display. key and/or 1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up. • the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not react when a button on the remote key/PCC is 2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. pressed within approximately 60 ft (20 m) Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in the 3. Gently press the key blade in the groove from the vehicle. remote key, two batteries in the PCC) until it clicks into place.

58 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Opening the remote key/PCC PCC (two batteries) Slide the spring loaded catch to the 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat- 02 side. teries. Pull the key blade straight out of the 2. Insert the first new battery with the (+) side remote key. upward. 3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery. Insert a small screwdriver in the hole Insert the second new battery on top of the behind the spring loaded catch and care- plastic spacer, with the + side downward. fully pry up the cover. Re-assembling the remote key NOTE 1. Press the remote key's cover into place. Turn the remote key with the buttons 2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the upward so that the batteries do not fall out key blade up. when the cover is removed. 3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. Replacing the batteries 4. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place. CAUTION Old batteries should be properly recycled. When handling batteries, avoid touching their contact surfaces as this could result in poor battery function in the remote key.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–) sides. Remote key (one battery) 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old battery. 2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward.

59 02 Locks and alarm

Valet locking

Blocking access to the trunk to block access to the trunk and glove com- Turn the key blade180 degrees clockwise. partment for e.g., valet parking or when the 02 vehicle is brought to the retailer for service. Remove the key blade from the lock. A message will appear in the instrument With the valet locking function activated: panel display. • The vehicle's doors can be locked or unlocked with the remote Deactivating the valet locking function Turn the key blade 180 degrees counterclock- • The engine can be started wise in the glove compartment lock to deacti- • The glove compartment cannot be vate valet locking. unlocked See page 67 for information on locking the Access to the trunk is blocked (the trunk lid • glove compartment normally, without activat- cannot be unlocked or opened with the G021083 ing the valet locking function. remote, and the rear seat backrests cannot Normal locking/unlocking function be lowered Activating the valet locking function G021084

Locking/unlocking points with valet locking activated By utilizing the remote key with the key blade Insert the key blade in the glove compart- removed, the valet locking feature enables you ment lock.

60 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

Keyless drive* (models with Personal NOTE Lock settings Keyless entry. See page Car Communicator only) 189 for a description of the menu system. • The gear selector must in the P position 02 Keyless locking and unlocking before the vehicle can be locked and the alarm can be armed. NOTE • The buttons on the keyless drive remote In some cases, wearing thick gloves or pull- key can also be used to lock and unlock ing the door handle too quickly may affect the vehicle, see page 55 for more infor- the unlocking function. If this occurs, try mation. pulling the door handle again or pull it after taking off the glove.

Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle Unlocking the vehicle with the key blade have the keyless function, and additional ones can be ordered. The system can accommodate up to six PCCs.

G020577 The red rings in the illustration indicate the area Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft around the vehicle that is within range of the (1.5 meters) keyless drive antennas. This system makes it possible to unlock and Unlocking the vehicle lock the vehicle without having to press any • A keyless drive remote key must be on the buttons on the Personal Car Communicators same side of the vehicle as the door to be (PCC). It is only necessary to have a keyless opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) drive remote key in your possession to operate of the door's lock or the trunk (see the sha- the central locking system. ded areas in the illustration). Keyless drive keyhole cover • Pull a door handle to unlock and open the door or press the trunk opening control on If the PCC does not function normally (weak the trunk lid. battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked with the detachable key blade. See page 58 for The number of doors that are unlocked at the instructions on detaching the key blade from same time can be set in the vehicle's menu the PCC. To access the keyhole in the driver's system. Press MY CAR and go to Car settings door:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

1. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm) The doors and the trunk can be locked by NOTE straight up in the hole on the underside of pressing the pressure-sensitive area on each 02 the keyhole cover. of the outside door handles or the rubber-cov- If several people carrying PCCs approach ered button next to the trunk opening control. the vehicle at the same time, the driver's > The cover will come off due to the pres- seat and door mirrors will assume the posi- sure exerted when the key blade is The lock indicator on the dash will begin to tions they were in for the person who opens pushed upward. flash. the driver's door. 2. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the NOTE driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to See also page 87 for information on adjusting unlock the driver's door only. This will trig- On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector and storing the seat's position in the seat mem- ger the alarm. Press the remote key into the must be in the Park (P) position, all doors ory. ignition slot to turn off the alarm. and the trunk must be closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle Keyless drive information messages 3. Press the cover back into place after the can be locked. If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehicle door has been unlocked. while the engine is running or if the ignition is in mode II (see page 84) and all of the doors Locking the vehicle Keyless drive remote key and driver's seat/door mirror memory are closed, a message will appear in the instru- • When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in ment panel display and an audible signal will your possession and lock any door, the sound. position of the driver's seat and door mir- When at least one PCC has been returned to rors will be stored in the seat's memory. the car, the message will be erased in the dis- • The next time a door is opened by a person play and the audible signal will stop when: with the same PCC in his/her possession, A door has been opened and closed the driver's seat and door mirrors will auto- • matically move to the position that they • The PCC has been inserted in the ignition were in when the door was most recently slot locked. • The OK button (see page 187 for the location of this button) has been pressed. Models with keyless drive have a pressure-sensitive area on the outside door handles and a rubber-covered button next to the trunk opening control

62 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

CAUTION Tested To Comply With FCC Standards Location of the keyless drive antennas • Keyless drive remote keys should never For Automobile Use 02 be left in the vehicle. In the event of a Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952, break-in, a remote found in the vehicle 267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891 could make it possible to start the engine. NOTE • Electromagnetic fields or metal This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry obstructions can interfere with the key- Canada. Operation is subject to the following less drive system. The remote key two conditions: (1) This device may not cause should never be placed closer than harmful interference, and (2) this device must approximately 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) to cell accept interference received, including inter- phones, metallic objects or e.g., stored ference that may cause undesired operation. in a metal briefcase. CAUTION The keyless drive system has a number of USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964 Changes or modifications not expressly antennas located at various points in the vehi- approved by the manufacturer could void the cle. NOTE user's authority to operate the equipment. On the inside center of the rear bumper This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Left rear door handle conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must Center of the parcel shelf, on the underside accept interference received, including inter- Right rear door handle ference that may cause undesired operation. Under the rear section of the center con- CAUTION sole Changes or modifications not expressly Under the front section of the center con- approved by the manufacturer could void the sole user's authority to operate the equipment. Siemens VDO 5WK48891

63 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

WARNING 02 People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless drive system's antennas. This is to help prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless drive system.

64 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Locking and unlocking the vehicle Manual locking In the horizontal position, the door cannot In certain situations (e.g., if there is no electrical be opened from the outside. From outside the vehicle 02 current in the vehicle), the doors can be locked In the vertical position, the door can be The remote key locks and unlocks all of the manually. opened from the inside and the outside. doors and the trunk. The detachable key blade (see page 58) can be Before the vehicle can be locked from the out- used in the lock cylinder in the driver's door to NOTE side with the remote key, the driver's door must lock that door. be closed. Any other door/trunk that is open If the manual child safety lock (see page 49) is activated for a rear side door and will be locked and the alarm will be armed. The other doors do not have lock cylinders and the slot on the rear edge of each door has to that door is also locked manually, the door be used to lock it. This will lock the door from cannot be opened from the outside or NOTE inside. The door can only be unlocked with the outside but it can still be opened from the remote key or the central locking button. Be sure the remote key is outside of the inside the vehicle. To do so: vehicle before the other doors/trunk are closed to help avoid locking the remote From inside the vehicle (central locking inside the vehicle. button)

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional keyless drive system, all doors/trunk must be closed before the vehicle can be locked. The first press on the unlock button unlocks the driver's door and a second press unlocks the other doors and the trunk (see also page 55). This setting can be changed in the menu system. See page 189 for a description. If the locks repeatedly do not react when the Manually locking a door unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary – Insert the key blade into the slot and turn it to replace the batteries in the remote, see 90 degrees to lock that door (the slot in a Central locking button page 54. In this case the vehicle can be particular door locks that door only). unlocked with the detachable key blade. See The lock buttons on the door panel can be used page 58. to lock or unlock all doors and the trunk at the

65 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

same time. Press to lock and to NOTE Lock buttons in the rear side doors unlock. 02 Please be aware that locking the vehicle in Unlocking this way makes it possible to lock the The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the remote key in the passenger compartment. vehicle in two ways: To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from the outside by pressing the lock button on the • By pressing the unlock button . remote key. • The front doors can be unlocked and If the vehicle is locked using the central opened by pulling the door handle once. locking button, be sure that the remote key The rear doors can be unlocked by pulling is in your possession before closing the the door handle once and opened by pull- door. ing the handle again. Locking Indicator light in the lock buttons There are two versions of the central locking The indicator light in the button is on when the • Press the lock button : all of the doors door is locked system that affect the indicator light in the driv- that are closed will lock. er's door central locking button. The button in each of the rear side doors locks Alternative locking when parking that door only. The central locking button on the driver's door If only the driver's door has a central locking To unlock the door: can also be used to lock the vehicle when you button: leave it. To do so: • If the light is on, this indicates that all of the • The door can be unlocked by pulling the doors are locked. door handle once and opened by pulling 1. Open the door. the handle again. If there are central locking buttons in both front 2. Press the lock section of the button. doors and electric lock buttons in the rear side Automatic relocking 3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle doors: If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto- completely and arm the alarm. • If a light is on in one of the buttons, this matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will means that only that door is locked. When rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the trunk the lights are on in all of the buttons, all of has been opened. the doors are locked. Automatic locking When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and trunk can be locked automatically. This feature

66 02 Locks and alarm

Locks can be turned on or off by pressing MY CAR Opening the trunk manually Locking/unlocking the trunk and going to Car settings Lock settings 02 Automatic door locking. See page 189 for a description of the menu system.

Glove compartment

Trunk unlock button on the remote key The trunk is held closed by an electronic locking mechanism. To open: Unlocking the trunk with the remote key – Press the trunk unlock button on the 1. Press lightly on the rubberized plate under remote. the handle to release the lock. Press once: This unlocks but does not open 2. Lift the handle to open the trunk lid. The glove compartment can only be locked the trunk. The trunk can then be opened by and unlocked using the detachable key blade pressing the rubber plate near the trunk lock. If CAUTION in the remote key. See page 57 for information the trunk is not opened within two minutes it on removing the key blade from the remote • When pressing the rubberized plate, will automatically relock and the alarm will be key. only light pressure is necessary to rearmed. release the trunk's electronic locking Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk and mechanism. Insert the key blade in the glove compart- pops it open slightly. ment lock. • When opening the trunk lid, pull it up Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. using the handle. Too much pressure on NOTE the rubberized plate can damage its Remove the key blade from the lock. electrical connections. Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunk lid may prevent it from opening.

67 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

The alarm indicator light on the dashboard will Unlocking the trunk with the key blade Locking the trunk with the remote key stop flashing to indicate that the alarm is not – Press the lock button on the remote, see 02 monitoring the entire vehicle. The accessory page 55 movement and inclination sensors will be auto- The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin matically disconnected. flashing to show that the vehicle is locked and When the trunk is closed again (which has to that the alarm has been armed. be done manually), it will have to be relocked and the alarm rearmed by pressing the lock NOTE button on the remote key. • If the doors are locked while the trunk is Unlocking/opening the trunk from the open, the trunk will remain unlocked passenger compartment until the vehicle is relocked by pressing the Lock button on the remote key. • On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position, all doors and the trunk must be closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked.

If the remote key is not functioning properly, the trunk can be unlocked with the detachable key blade. See page 57 for information on removing the key blade from the remote key. – Press the button on the lighting panel (1) to Pull out the cover over the trunk’s keyhole. unlock and pop open the trunk Unlock the trunk by inserting the key blade NOTE in the keyhole and turning a half turn counterclockwise as shown in the illustration. The taillights will illuminate automatically for a short period when the trunk has been opened.

68 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Opening the trunk from the inside (U.S. WARNING models only) • Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked 02 and keep keys out of a child’s reach. Unsupervised children could lock themselves in an open trunk and risk injury. Children should be taught not to play in vehicles. • On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk. The vehicle is equipped with a florescent handle on the inside of the trunk lid, which can be used in an emergency situation to open the trunk from the inside. Pull the handle down to release the trunk lid. After use, the handle must be pushed back into its original position before the trunk can be closed. This handle is not intended to be used to anchor the trunk lid when long loads are being transported.

69 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

The alarm system NOTE Arming the alarm The alarm is automatically armed whenever the – Press the Lock button on the remote key. 02 Do not attempt to repair any of the compo- vehicle is locked with the remote key or nents in the alarm system yourself. This One long flash of the turn signals will con- optional Personal Car Communicator. could affect the insurance policy on the firm that the alarm is armed. When armed, the alarm continuously monitors vehicle. Alarm confirmation settings can be changed in a number of points on the vehicle. The follow- MY CAR, under Car settings Lock ing conditions will trigger the alarm: The alarm indicator light settings Keyless entry. See page 189 for • The hood is forced open. a description of the menu system. • The trunk is forced open USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) • A door is forced open. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC • The ignition slot is tampered with. rules. Operation is subject to the following con- • An attempt is made to start the vehicle with ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful a non-approved key (a key not coded to interference, and (2) this device must accept the car's ignition). any interference received, including interfer- • If there is movement in the passenger com- ence that may cause undesired operation. partment (if the vehicle is equipped with Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) the accessory movement sensor). • The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation is equipped with the accessory inclination The status of the alarm system is indicated by is subject to the following conditions: (1) this sensor). the red indicator light on the dashboard (see device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including • The battery is disconnected (while the illustration): interference that may cause undesired opera- alarm is armed). Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed • tion of the device. • The siren is disconnected when the alarm • The indicator light flashes at one-second is disarmed. intervals – the alarm is armed A message will appear in the information dis- • The indicator light flashes rapidly before play if a fault should occur in the alarm system. the remote key is inserted in the ignition Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service slot and the ignition is put in mode I—the technician. alarm has been triggered.

70 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

Disarming the alarm Remote key not functioning Reduced alarm function – Press the Unlock button on the remote key. If the remote key is not functioning properly, Turning off the accessory alarm sensors 02 > Two short flashes from the car's direc- the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can be started as follows: In certain situations it may be desirable to turn tion indicators confirm that the alarm off the accessory inclination and movement has been deactivated and that all doors 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your are unlocked. (see page 58 for information on detaching vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the the key blade). boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in Turning off (stopping) the alarm > This will trigger the alarm. the vehicle with the doors locked. If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by The vehicle's menu system is used for turning pressing the Unlock button on the remote key off these sensors (see page 189 for a descrip- or by inserting the remote key in the ignition tion of the menu system). slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm has been 1. Go into the menu under Car settings. turned off. 2. Select Reduced Guard (Press OK/ MENU to choose). Other alarm-related functions 3. Two alternatives are now available: Automatic re-arming • Activate once. If this alternative is If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto- selected, Reduced guard See matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will manual will appear in the instrument re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the panel display and the accessory incli- trunk has been opened. 2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot nation and movement alarm sensors will (also on vehicles with the optional keyless be deactivated when the vehicle is Audible/visual alarm signal drive). This will turn off the alarm. locked. • An audible alarm signal is given by a bat- 3. Start the engine (see page 113 for instruc- • Ask when exiting. If this alternative is tery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts tions). selected, a message will appear in the for 30 seconds. center console display each time the • The visual alarm signal is given by flashing engine is turned off. Press OK/MENU to all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes accept and the accessory inclination or until the alarm is turned off. and movement alarm sensors will be

71 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

deactivated when the vehicle is locked. Press EXIT to cancel. 02 4. Press OK/MENU and lock the vehicle. The next time the engine is started, the alarm system will be reset and Full guard will appear in the instrument panel display. The accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will be reactivated. In either of the alternatives, if you prefer not to deactivate the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors, do not make a choice in the menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.

72 02 Locks and alarm

73 Instruments and controls...... 76 Ignition modes...... 84 Seats...... 86 Steering wheel...... 92 Lighting...... 93 Wipers and washers...... 101 Power windows...... 103 Mirrors...... 105 Compass*...... 107 Power moonroof...... 108 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*...... 110 Starting the engine...... 113 Transmission...... 118 Brakes...... 121 Parking brake...... 124

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

76 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Function Page Function Page Information displays Menus and mes- see Infotainment sys- 212 sages, turn signals, page 189, tem controls high/low beams, 98, 93, trip computer 203 Climate system 198 controls 03 Cruise control 135 Gear selector 118 Horn, airbag 92, 23 Controls for active 205 Main instrument 77 chassis (Four-C)* panel Wipers and washers 101, 102 Infotainment sys- 212, 240 Information displays in the instrument panel tem/Bluetooth Steering wheel 92 The information displays show information on hands-free controls adjustment some of the vehicle's functions, such as cruise START/STOP 84 Hood opening con- 307 control, the trip computer and messages. The ENGINE button trol information is shown with text and symbols. More detailed information can be found in the Ignition slot 84 Parking brake 124 descriptions of the functions that use the infor- Information display 77 Power seat* adjust- 86 mation displays. ment controls Door handle – Lighting panel, con- 93, 259, In-door control pan- 103, 105, trols for opening 67 els (power win- 65 fuel filler door/trunk dows, mirrors, central locking button)

Hazard warning 98 flashers

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Gauges This will be noticeable as a pronounced If the engine does not start or if the function unevenness in engine speed. check is carried out in ignition mode II, all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol Indicator and warning symbols for faults in the vehicle's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure. Certain symbols may not have their functions 03 illustrated, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

Indicator symbols Symbol Description Fault in the Active Bending Gauges in the instrument panel Light (ABL)*system Speedometer Malfunction indicator light Fuel gauge. Please note that the fuel level Indicator and warning symbols indicator in the gauge moves from right to Anti-lock brake system (ABS) left as the amount of fuel in the tank High beam and turn signal indicators decreases. The arrow indicates the side of Indicator and warning symbols Rear fog light on the vehicle that the fuel filler door is on. See also the section on refueling beginning on Information and warning symbols page 257. See page 203 for more infor- Stability system mation on fuel level and consumption. Indicator and warning symbols Tire pressure monitoring sen- The tachometer shows engine speed in Function check sor (TPMS)A thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). All indicator and warning symbols light up in Do not drive continuously with the needle ignition mode II or when the engine is started. Low fuel level in the red area of the gauge. The engine When the engine has started, all the symbols management system will automatically should go out except the parking brake sym- Information symbol, see text prevent excessively high engines speeds. bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis- in information display engaged.

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Description A malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light Canadian models are equipped with this may have many causes. Sometimes, you may symbol. High beam indicator not notice a change in your car's behavior. Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt Rear fog light fuel economy, emission controls, and drivabil- Left turn signal indicator This symbol indicates that the rear fog light ity. Extended driving without correcting the (located in the driver's side tail light cluster) is cause could even damage other components on. 03 Right turn signal indicator in your vehicle. Stability system This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC The stability system's Sport not closed tightly or if the engine was running mode is activated. (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys- while the vehicle was refueled. tem) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle, A Option in Canada see page 130 for more detailed information. Canadian models are equipped with this symbol for the Malfunction Indicator Light. Tire pressure monitoring system Fault in the Active Bending Light Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (TPMS)* (ABL) system This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire warning light This symbol will illuminate if the there is a fault pressure in one or more tires is low, see If the warning light comes on, there may be a in the ABL system. See page 96 for more page 298 for detailed information. information about this system. malfunction in the ABS system (the standard braking system will still function). Check the Low fuel level Malfunction Indicator Light system by: When this light comes on, the vehicle should As you drive, a computer called On-Board 1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off be refueled as soon as possible. See page Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's the ignition. 257 for information about fuel and refueling. engine, transmission, electrical and emission systems. 2. Restart the engine. Information symbol The information symbol lights up and a text The malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) 3. If the warning light goes off, no further message is displayed to provide the driver with light will illuminate if the computer senses a action is required. necessary information about one of the vehi- condition that potentially may need correcting. If the warning light remains on, the vehicle cle's systems. The message can be erased and When this happens, please have your vehicle should be driven to a trained and qualified the symbol can be turned off by pressing the checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- Volvo service technician for inspection, see OK button (see page 187 for information) or ice technician as soon as possible. page 121 for additional information. this will take place automatically after a short

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

time (the length of time varies, depending on Warning symbols brake is being applied and then glows steadily the function affected). when the parking brake has been set. Symbol Description The information symbol may also illuminate If the symbol continues to flash after the brake together with other symbols. Low oil pressure has been set, this indicates that a fault has been detected. See the message in the infor- High beam indicator Parking brake applied mation display. 03 This symbol illuminates when the high beam headlights are on, or if the high beam flash Canadian models are equipped with this function is used. SRS airbags symbol. Left turn signal indicator See page 124 for more information about Seat belt reminder using the parking brake. Right turn signal indicator Generator not charging Airbags – SRS NOTE If this light comes on while the vehicle is being driven, or remains on for longer than approxi- Fault in the brake system • Both turn signal indicators will flash mately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been when the hazard warning flashers are started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions used. Warning symbol have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pre- • If either of these indicators flash faster tensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag, than normal, the direction indicators are and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s) not functioning properly. Low oil pressure inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo If the light comes on while driving, stop the service technician as soon as possible. vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and Sport mode See page 22 for more information about the check the engine oil level. Add oil if necessary. airbag system. This symbol illuminates to indicate that the sta- If the oil level is normal and the light stays on bility system's Sport mode has been activated after restart, have the vehicle towed to the Seat belt reminder to help provide maximum tractive force, for nearest trained and qualified Volvo service This symbol comes on for approximately 6 sec- example when driving with snow chains, or technician. onds if the driver has not fastened his or her driving in deep snow or loose sand. Parking brake applied seat belt. This symbol illuminates when the parking brake is applied. This symbol flashes while the

80 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Generator not charging Canadian models are equipped with this WARNING symbol. This symbol comes on during driving if a fault • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark has occurred in the electrical system. Contact If the and symbols come on at the in the reservoir or if a warning message an authorized Volvo workshop. same time, there may be a fault in the brake is displayed in the text window: DO Engine temperature force distribution system. NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to Engine overheating can result from low oil or a trained and qualified Volvo service 03 coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off technician and have the brake system heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction. the engine. inspected. Engine overheating will be signaled with text 2. Restart the engine. • If the ABS and Brake system lights are and a red warning triangle in the middle of the on at the same time, there is a risk of If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- instrument display. The exact text will depend • reduced vehicle stability. ing. on the degree of overheating. It may range from High engine temp Reduce speed to High • If the symbols remain on, check the level in Warning symbol engine temp Stop engine. If appropriate, the brake fluid reservoir, see page 310. If other messages, such as Coolant level low, the brake fluid level is normal but the sym- The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a bols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven, problem related to safety and/or drivability. A Stop safely will also be displayed. If your with great care, to an authorized Volvo message will also appear in the main instru- engine does overheat so that you must stop the workshop to have the brake system ments panel's display. The symbol remains engine, always allow the engine to cool before checked. visible until the fault has been rectified but the attempting to check oil and coolant levels. • If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the text message can be cleared with the OK but- See page 310 for more information. vehicle should be transported to an author- ton, see page 187. The warning symbol can Fault in brake system ized Volvo workshop to have the brake also come on in conjunction with other sym- system checked. If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may bols. be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and Action: check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehi- page 310. If the level in the reservoir is below cle further. MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake 2. Read the information on the information system checked. display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear the message using OK.

81 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Reminder – doors not closed Trip odometers Clock If one of the doors, the hood or trunk lid is not closed properly, the information or warning symbol comes on together with an explanatory text message in the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and 03 close the door, hood or trunk. If the vehicle is driven at a speed lower than approximately 5 mph (7 km/h), the information symbol comes on. If the vehicle is driven at a speed higher than approximately 5 mph (7 km/h), the warning symbol comes on. Trip odometers and reset button Clock and setting control Road Sign Information (RSI) Odometer display Display Road Sign Information (RSI) is a feature that Control for setting the clock helps the driver see road signs with information Button for toggling between T1 and T2, such as current speed. See page 133 for and for resetting the odometer Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwise detailed information. The trip odometers are used to measure short to set the time. The set time is shown in the distances. The distance is shown in the dis- information display. play. A short press the button toggles between The clock may be temporarily replaced by a the two trip odometers T1 and T2. A long press symbol in conjunction with a message, see (more than 2 seconds) resets the currently dis- page 187. played trip odometer to zero. Setting the clock in MY CAR In addition to setting the clock manually as described above, it can also be set in the MY CAR menu system. See page 189 for additional information about these menus.

82 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

the 24-hour format or the 12-hour format (AM/ PM).

1. Go to Settings System options Time. 2. The hour box will be selected. Press OK to activate this box. 3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and press OK to confirm the setting and deactivate this box. 4. Turn TUNE to select the minute box (A) and press OK to activate this box (B). 5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and press OK to confirm the setting and deactivate this box. 6. Turn TUNE to select OK and press OK to complete the procedure. Use the menu selection Settings System options Time format to display the time in

83 03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Inserting and removing the remote key Functions Mode Function The remote key has 3 modes: 0, I, and II that can be used without starting the engine. The 0 The odometer, clock and tem- following table shows examples of which func- perature gauge are illuminated. tions are available in the respective modes. Power seats* can be adjusted and the infotainment system can 03 NOTE be used for a limited time (to minimize battery drain see To access ignition modes I or II without star- page 212). ting the engine, the brake pedal must not be depressed. I The Moonroof*, power windows, 12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment, navigation system*, climate system blower, Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP ENGINE button. windshield wipers can be used. The headlights/taillights illumi- Inserting the remote key1 II nate. Warning/indicator lights Holding the end of the remote key with the illuminate for 5 seconds. Other base of the key blade, insert the remote key systems are activated. However, into the ignition slot as shown in the illustration the heated seats* and heated and press it in as far as possible. rear window function can only be activated when the engine is run- CAUTION ning. Mode II should only be Foreign objects in the ignition slot can used for very short periods to impair function or cause damage. help avoid draining the battery.

Removing the remote key The remote key can be removed from the ignition slot by pulling it out.

1 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Ignition modes Emergency towing See page 269 for important information about Ignition mode 0 the remote key when the vehicle is being – The vehicle is unlocked. towed. Ignition mode I – With the remote key fully pressed into the 03 ignition slot1, press START/STOP ENGINE briefly. Ignition mode II – With the remote key fully pressed into the ignition slot1, press START/STOP ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds. Returning to mode 0 To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press START/STOP ENGINE briefly.

Starting and stopping the engine See page 113 for information on starting the engine and switching it off.

1 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

85 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Front seats WARNING Adjust the backrest to an upright position. • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest. seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In Without releasing the catches, push the addition, position the seat as far rear- backrest forward. ward as comfort and control allow. 03 Move the seat as far forward as possible • Check that the seat is securely locked so that the head restraint slides under the into position after adjusting. glove compartment.

Folding the front seat backrest WARNING • When transporting long objects, cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer injury to occupants. Secure the load to or softer lumbar support. help prevent shifting during sudden stops. Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and move the seat to the position of your • When the seat's backrest is returned to choice. the upright position, push and pull it to be sure that it is securely locked in this Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion, position. pump up/down. Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the angle of the backrest. Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down. The front passenger seat backrest can be folded to a horizontal position to make room for Control panel for power seat*. a long load. Fold the backrest as follows: Move the seat as far back and down as possible.

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Power seat1 NOTE Button for storing a position • Only one of the power seat's controls M (memory) button can be used at the same time. Programming the seat's memory • The power seats have an overload pro- Three different seating and door mirror posi- tector that activates if a seat is blocked tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory. by any object. If this occurs, switch off 03 the ignition (key in position 0) and wait The following example explains how button (1) for a short period before operating the can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) are seat again. programmed in the same way. To program (store) a seat and door mirror posi- Power seat memory function tion in button (1): 1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the Power seat adjustment controls desired positions using the seat and mirror Front edge of seat cushion up/down adjustment controls. Seat forward/rearward and up/down 2. Press and hold down the M (memory) button (4). Backrest tilt 3. With the memory button depressed, press Operation button (1) briefly to store the current posi- The seats can be adjusted for a short period tion for the seat/mirrors. after unlocking the door with the remote con- To move the seat and mirrors to the position trol without the key in the ignition slot. Seat that they were in when a button was pro- adjustment is normally made when the ignition Power seat memory buttons grammed: is on and can always be made when the engine – is running. Button for storing a position Press and hold down button (1) until the seat and mirrors stop moving. Button for storing a position

1 Optional on certain models

87 03 Your driving environment

Seats

NOTE 2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to NOTE Settings Car settings Car key As a safety precaution, the seat will stop The remote key's memory feature and the automatically if the button is released before memory power driver's seat memory function (the the seat has reached the preset position. 3. To activate the remote key memory fea- settings made using the buttons on the side ture, press ENTER (check the box). of the seat, see the section "Power seat memory function" on page 87) work inde- 03 Remote key memory and the power > The remote key is now ready to store the pendently of each other. driver's seat* and door mirrors2 position of the power driver's seat and door mirrors. Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored Repeat this procedure for each of the vehicle's positions remote keys. To move the seat and door mirrors to the posi- See page 189 for a description of the menu tion stored in the remote key: system. 1. Unlock the driver's door with the same Storing the positions of the power remote key (the one used to lock the driver's seat/mirrors in the remote key doors). For models equipped with the 1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the optional keyless drive, you must have the desired position using the seat and mirror same remote key in your possession. adjustment controls. 2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes. 2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with the The driver's seat and door mirrors will auto- Each remote key has a feature that enables it remote key (or close the driver's door and matically move to the position in which you left to store (remember) the position of the power press the lock button on the door handle them (if the vehicle has been unlocked with one driver's seat and door mirrors when the vehicle with the remote key in your possession on of the other keys and new seat/mirror adjust- is locked with that remote key. vehicles with the optional keyless drive). ments have been made). This feature has to be activated for each of the > The positions of the power driver's seat remote keys used in the vehicle as follows: and door mirrors are now stored in the remote key's memory. 1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot.

2 This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Seats

NOTE Heated seats* See page 199. • The seat will move to this position even if someone else has moved it to a different position and locked the vehicle Rear seats with a different remote key. Rear center head restraint • This feature will work in the same way 03 with all of the remote keys that you use with your vehicle.

Emergency stop

WARNING • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children The center head restraint should be adjusted should never be left unattended in the according to the passenger's height. The vehicle. restraint should be carefully adjusted to sup- • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED port the occupant's head. at any time by pressing any button on • Pull the head restraint up as required. the power seat control panel. • To lower, press the button at the base of • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The the head restraint’s left support while seat should be adjusted so that the pressing the head restrain down carefully. brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow. • The seat rails on the floor must not be obstructed in any way when the seat is in motion.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89 03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING NOTE Folding down the rear seat backrests The center rear seat head restraint should • The head restraint must be returned to only be in its lowest position when this seat the upright position manually. is NOT occupied. When the center position is occupied, the head restraint should be • The outboard head restraints cannot be correctly adjusted to the passenger’s folded down on models that are not 03 height. The upper edge of the head restraint equipped with this button. should be at least on a level with the upper- most point of the seat occupant's ear. CAUTION Automatically folding down the rear The rear head restraints should not be kept folded down for prolonged periods. This seat’s outboard head restraints could result in pressure marks in leather upholstery. The rear seat backrests are split and can be folded down together or separately WARNING 1. Pull the release control handle(s). For safety reasons, no one should be 2. Fold the backrest forward. Adjust the cen- allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi- ter seat head restraint if necessary. tions if the head restraints are folded down. If these positions are occupied, the head restraints should be in the upright (fixed) NOTE position. When the backrests are folded down, move the outboard head restraints forward slightly so that they do not catch on the seat cushion. 1. The ignition must be in mode II. 2. Press the button to lower the rear head restraints for improved visibility.

90 03 Your driving environment

Seats

CAUTION WARNING To help avoid damage to the upholstery, • When one or more sections of the back- there should be no objects on the rear seat rest is returned to the upright position, and the seat belt should not be buckled check that it is properly locked in place when the backrest is folded down. by pushing and pulling it. The red indicators should also not be visible. 03 WARNING • Return the outboard head restraints to the upright position. • Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked and keep keys out of a child’s reach. • Long loads should always be securely Unsupervised children could lock them- anchored to help avoid injury in the selves in an open trunk and risk injury. event of a sudden stop. Children should be taught not to play in • Always turn the engine off and apply the vehicles. parking brake when loading/unloading • On hot days, the temperature in the the vehicle. trunk or vehicle interior can rise very • Place the transmission in the Park (P) quickly. Exposure of people to these position to help prevent inadvertent high temperatures for even a short movement of the gear selector. period of time can cause heat-related • On hot days, the temperature in the injury or death. Small children are par- vehicle interior can rise very quickly. ticularly at risk. Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk.

91 03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

Adjusting WARNING Horn Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.

With the optional speed-dependent power 03 steering the level of steering force can be adjusted, see page 205.

Keypads G021138

Adjusting the steering wheel Horn Lever for releasing/locking the steering – Press the steering wheel hub to sound the wheel horn. Possible positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and reach: 1. Pull the lever toward you to release the steering wheel. Keypads in the steering wheel 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position Cruise control, see page 135. Adaptive that suits you. cruise control*, see page 137. 3. Push back the lever to lock the steering Infotainment controls, see page 214. wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to push into place, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever.

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Lighting panel High/low beam headlights

Overview, light switches with AUTO function Overview, light switches Thumb wheel for adjusting display and Headlight switch and lever Thumb wheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting High beam flash instrument lighting Rear fog light Toggle between high and low beams Rear fog light Headlights/parking lights Headlights/parking lights Position Description Instrument lighting Illumination of the display and instrument lights Daytime running lights/high will vary, depending on ignition mode. beams/high beam flash

The display lighting is automatically subdued Parking lights in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the thumb wheel. Low beams/high beams/high The intensity of the instrument lighting is beam flash adjusted with the thumb wheel.

93 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Position Description between high and low beams (this also applies on models equipped with the Low beams/high beams/high optional Active Bending Lights). beam flash > The symbol illuminates in the "Tunnel detection"* will acti- instrument panel to indicate that the vate the low beams in poor high beams are on. 03 lighting conditions Low beams The "Active high beam"* func- When the engine is started, the low beams are tion can be used activated automatically (daytime running lights) High beam flash if the headlight control is in position 0 or . Headlight switch with AUTO and lever Low beams/high beams/high High beam flash beam flash Daytime running lights can be deactivated in the MY CAR menu system under Settings Toggle between high and low beams Volvo recommends using the position Car settings Light settings Daytime whenever weather conditions allow the use of running lights. the "Active high beam"* function (see Position Description However, please be aware that these lights page 95). Daytime running lights/high may not be deactivated in Canada. beams/high beam flash High beam flash Move the lever toward the steering wheel to NOTE Parking lights position 1. The high beams come on until the • The use of daytime running lights is lever is released. mandatory in Canada. High/low beam headlights • Continuous high beams cannot be activated when the headlight switch is in Continuous high beams position . High beam flash will 1. Set the ignition to mode II. function in this position. 2. With the light switch in position 0 or , pull the turn signal lever toward the steering wheel to position 2 to toggle

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Active high beams – AHB* Activate/deactivate AHB by pulling the left If the symbol illuminates in the instru- AHB is a feature that uses a camera at the steering wheel lever rearward (toward the ment panel and is displayed, upper edge of the windshield to detect the steering wheel) as far as possible and releasing AHB unavailable switching between high and low beams will headlights of oncoming vehicles or the tail- it. If AHB is deactivated while the high beams have to be done manually. The light switch can lights of a vehicle directly ahead. When this are on, the headlights will switch to low beams. happens, the headlights will automatically remain in the AUTO position. The same applies if Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed switch from high beams to low beams. When 03 the camera no longer detects the headlights/ and the symbol is displayed. The taillights of other vehicles, your headlights will switch back to high beams after several sec- symbol will go out when these mes- onds. sages are displayed. To activate this feature, turn the light switch to AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in the position. Activation will occur if the heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active engine has been running for at least again or if the sensors in the windshield are no 20 seconds and the vehicle's speed is at least longer obscured, the messages will disappear 12 mph (20 km/h). and the symbol will illuminate.

When AHB is activated, the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. The high beam indicator ( ) in the instrument panel will also illuminate when the high beams are on.

NOTE • Keep the windshield in front of the camera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. • Do not mount or in any way attach any- Light switch in the AUTO position thing on the windshield that could obstruct the camera.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

CAUTION Tunnel detection (standard on models When this function is activated, the headlight with a rain sensor) beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve In the following situations, it may be neces- The optional rain sensor reacts to the change according to movements of the steering wheel sary to switch between high and low beams (see the right-pointing beam in the illustration). manually: in lighting conditions when, for example, the vehicle is driven into a tunnel. If the daytime 1 • In heavy fog or rain ABL is activated automatically when the running lights have been deactivated, tunnel engine is started. 03 • In blowing snow or slush detection will activate the low beam headlights The function can be deactivated/reactivated in • In bright moonlight while the vehicle is in the tunnel. The low beams will be switched off approx. the MY CAR menu system under My S60 • In freezing rain 20 seconds after the vehicle leaves the tunnel. Active Bending Lights or under Settings • In areas with dim street lighting The rain sensor does not have to be activated Car settings Light settings Active When oncoming vehicles have dim front • for tunnel detection to function. Bending Lights. lighting See page 189 for a description of the menu • If there are pedestrians on or near the Active Bending Lights (ABL)* road system. • If there are reflective objects, such as signs, near the road NOTE • When oncoming vehicles' lights are This function is only active in twilight or dark obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc. conditions, and only when the vehicle is in motion. • When there are vehicles on connecting roads If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol • At the top of hills or in dips in the road will illuminate and a message will be displayed • In sharp curves as shown in the table.

See page161 for more information about the Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light camera's limitations. function deactivated (left) and activated (right)

1 The factory default setting is on.

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Symbol Display Explana- Parking lights Rear fog light tion Headlamp The system failure is not func- Service tioning required properly and 03 should be inspected/ repaired by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- Headlight control in position for parking lights cian. The single rear fog light is located in the driver's The parking lights (the license plate lights also side taillight cluster. The rear fog light will only come on) can be turned on even when the igni- Auxiliary lights* function in combination with the high/low tion is switched off. If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the beam headlights. driver can use the MY CAR menu system to Turn the headlight control to the center posi- – Press the button to switch the rear fog light choose to deactivate and turn these lights on tion (the license plate lighting comes on at the on/off. 2 and off along with the high beam headlights . same time). > The rear fog light indicator symbol In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear on the instrument panel and the parking lights also illuminate when the trunk is light in the button come on when the opened to alert anyone traveling behind your rear fog light is switched on. vehicle. This happens regardless of the position that the headlight control is in or which mode the ignition is in.

2 The auxiliary lights must be connected to the vehicle's electrical system, which should only be done by a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. See page 189 for more information about the menu system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

NOTE NOTE When turning Move the lever as far up or down as possi- The rear fog light is considerably brighter • Regulations regarding the use of the than the normal taillights and should be hazard warning flasher may vary, ble to start the turn signals. The turn signals will used only when conditions such as fog, rain, depending on where you live. be cancelled automatically by the movement of snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned other vehicles to less than 500 ft. • The hazard warning flashers will be acti- to its initial position by hand. 03 (150 meters). vated automatically if an airbag deploys. NOTE Hazard warning flashers • This automatic flashing sequence can Turn signals be interrupted by immediately moving the lever in the opposite direction. • If the turn signal indicator flashes faster than normal, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb.

Location of the hazard warning flasher button Turn signals The hazard warning flasher should be used to indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic When changing lanes hazard. The driver can automatically flash the turn – To activate the flashers, press the button signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever in the center dash. Press the button again up or down to the first position and releasing it. to turn off the flashers.

98 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Interior lighting, front "Theater lighting" Glove compartment lighting When the overhead courtesy lighting has gone The glove compartment lighting switches on/ out and the engine is running, several LEDs off automatically when the lid is opened/ located near the roof console illuminate to pro- closed. vide faint lighting for the occupants of the front seats. This lighting goes out just after the over- Overhead courtesy lighting head courtesy lighting when the vehicle is The passenger compartment lighting is 03 locked. switched on and off automatically when button (3) is in the neutral position. Interior lighting, rear The lighting comes on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

G021149 • the vehicle is unlocked from the outside with the key or remote control Light switches, front roof lighting • the engine is switched off and the ignition Drivers side front reading light, on/off is in mode 0. Passenger's side front reading light, on/off The lighting switches off when: Overhead courtesy lighting. • the engine is started the vehicle is locked from the outside. The lighting in the front part of the passenger • compartment is controlled with the buttons (1) The lighting comes on and remains on for two and (2) in the roof console. G021150 minutes if one of the doors is open. Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger Rear reading lights The passenger compartment lighting can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes compartment lighting: The lights are switched on or off by pressing after the vehicle has been unlocked. • Off: right side depressed, automatic light- each respective button. ing off. If the lighting is switched on manually and the Courtesy lights/door step lighting* • Neutral position: automatic lighting is on. vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch switch off automatically after one minute. • On – left side depressed, passenger com- on/off automatically when one of the front partment lighting on. doors is opened/closed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Trunk lighting Approach lighting The trunk lighting comes on automatically Approach lighting is activated by pressing the when the trunk lid is opened. approach light button on the remote key (see the illustration on page 55). Home safe lighting When the function has been activated, the When you leave your vehicle at night, you can parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror 03 make use of the home safe lighting function to lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting and illuminate the area in front of the vehicle. door step lighting come on. 1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to put The time interval for this lighting can be set by the ignition in mode 0 (see page 85 for pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings information about the ignition modes). Light settings Approach light 2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible duration. See page 189 for a description of towards the steering wheel and release it. the menu system. 3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors. The headlights, parking lights, turn signals, lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights, and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain on for 30 3, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be set in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Home safe light duration. See page 189 for a description of the menu system.

3 Factory setting

100 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

Windshield wipers/washers Windshield wipers off (the wipers will sweep the windshield more fre- Move the lever to position 0 to switch quently) or down (the wipers will sweep the off the windshield wipers. windshield less frequently).

Single sweep NOTE Move the lever upward from position The wipers will make an extra sweep each 0 to sweep the windshield one stroke 03 at a time for as long as the lever is held up. time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.

Intermittent wiping When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol With the lever in this position, you can will illuminate in the instrument panel. set the wiper interval by twisting the thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed Activating and setting the sensitivity or downward to decrease the speed. When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle Windshield wipers and washers must be running or in ignition mode II and the Rain sensor* on/off Continuous wiping windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 or The wipers operate at normal speed. in the single sweep position. Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button The wipers operate at high speed. CAUTION . The windshield wipers will make one sweep. Use ample washer fluid when washing • Windshield wiper service position the windshield. The windshield should Press the lever up for the wipers to make an be thoroughly wet when the wipers are The windshield wipers must be in the service extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active in operation. position before the wiper blades can be mode when the stalk is released back to posi- cleaned or replaced. See page 318 for addition 0. • Before using the wipers, ice and snow tional information. should be removed from the wind- Deactivating shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper Rain sensor* Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but- blades are not frozen in place. The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper ton or press the lever down to another speed according to the amount of water on the wiper position. windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated Heated washer nozzles* when the key is removed from the ignition slot The washer nozzles are heated automatically or five minutes after the ignition has been in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid switched off. from freezing.

CAUTION High-pressure headlight washing* 03 High-pressure headlight washing consumes a The rain sensor should be deactivated when large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the washing the car in an automatic car wash, headlights are washed using two alternatives: etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the car • Low/high beam headlights on. The head- wash and could be damaged. lights will be washed the first time the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the head- Windshield washing lights will only be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed within a 10-minute period. • Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend- ing Lights will be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed. Nor- mal halogen headlights will not be washed.

CAUTION • Use ample washer fluid when washing the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation. Washing function • When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of Move the lever toward the steering wheel to washer fluid remains in the reservoir, start the windshield and headlight washers. the headlights will no longer be washed. After the lever is released the wipers make sev- A text message will also be displayed to eral extra sweeps. remind the driver to fill the washer fluid reservoir.

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Power windows

Power windows WARNING panels in the other doors only operate the window in the respective doors. • Always remove the ignition key when the vehicle is unattended to put the igni- For the power windows to function, the ignition tion in mode 0 (see page 85 for infor- must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle mation about the ignition modes). has been running, the power windows can be operated for several minutes after the remote • Never leave children unattended in the 03 vehicle. key has been removed from the ignition slot, or until a door has been opened. • Make sure that the windows are completely unobstructed before they are operated. NOTE • Movement of the windows will stop if Operating they are obstructed in any way. Driver's door control panel • To reduce buffeting wind noise if the Switch for disengaging rear door power rear windows are opened, also open the window buttons front windows slightly. Rear door window controls Manual up/down Front door window controls. – Move one of the controls up/down slightly. > The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position. Auto up/down – Move one of the controls up/down as far as possible and release it. Operating the power windows > The window will open or close com- Manual up/down pletely. Auto up/down. All power windows can be operated using the control panel in the driver's door. The control

103 03 Your driving environment

Power windows

Resetting When not in use, release the hooks and hold If the battery has been disconnected, the auto the sun shade while it retracts. open function must be reset so that it will work properly. 1. Gently raise the front section of the button to close the window and hold it for one 03 second. 2. Release the button briefly. 3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second.

Integrated rear sun shade*

Integrated sun shade – Pull up the sun shade and attach its hooks to the ceiling clips. > The sun shade's spring-loading will pull it taut.

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

Power door mirrors Retractable power door mirrors* To activate this function, select reverse gear The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt in narrow spaces: the mirror down. 1. Press down the L and R buttons at the The function can be activated/deactivated in same time. MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt 2. Release them after approximately one sec- 03 ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the right mirror. See page 189 for a description fully retracted position. of the menu system. Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L The door mirror will reset to its normal position: and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors • after 10 seconds when reverse is disen- automatically stop in the fully extended posi- gaged and the car remains stopped. tion. Door mirror controls • immediately when reverse is disengaged Storing the position* and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds Adjusting The mirror positions are stored in the key mem- approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). 1. Press the L button for the left door mirror ory when the vehicle has been locked with the • immediately if you press the correspond- or the R button for the right door mirror. remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with ing L or R button again. The light in the button comes on. the same remote control the mirrors and the • when the engine is turned off. driver's seat adopt the stored positions when 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the • when the side mirrors are folded in. center. the driver's door is opened. 3. Press the L or R button again. The light The function can be activated/deactivated in NOTE MY CAR under Settings Car settings should no longer be on. Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time. Car key memory Personal settings in key WARNING memory. See page 189 for a description of the menu system. Automatically tilting the door mirrors Objects seen in the mirrors may appear fur- when parking ther away than they actually are. Tilting the door mirrors when parking* The door mirrors can tilt down automatically to The door mirrors can be tilted down to help help give the driver a better view along the give the driver a better view along the sides of sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel the vehicle, for example when parallel parking. parking. When the transmission is no longer in

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105 03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

reverse, the mirrors will automatically return to Home safe and approach lighting Settings Climate settings Automatic their original position. The light on the door mirrors comes on when rear defroster. See page 189 for a description This function can be activated/deactivated in approach lighting or home safe lighting is of the menu system. selected, see page 100. MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt Interior rearview mirror left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right Rear window and door mirror 03 Auto-dim function mirror. See page 189 for information about defrosters An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from the MY CAR menu system. following traffic and automatically reduces Automatic retraction when locking glare in the mirror. When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the remote key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended. The function can be activated/deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors when locking. See page 189 for a description of the menu system. Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and ice by an external force must be electrically reset from the rear window and the door mirrors. to the neutral position for electric retracting/ Press the button once to start simultaneous extending to work. rear window and door mirror defrosting. The • Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- light in the button indicates that the function is tons. active. Switch the function off when then win- • Fold them out again with the L and R but- dows have cleared to help avoid battery drain. tons. The rear window is defogged/de-iced auto- The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. matically if the vehicle is started in an outside temperature lower than 48 °F (9 °C). Auto- defrosting can be selected in MY CAR under

106 03 Your driving environment

Compass*

Operation 1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely Selecting a magnetic zone out of traffic and away from steel structures 1 and high-tension electrical wires. 2 2. Start the vehicle. 15 14 3 NOTE 13 03 For best results from calibration, switch off 4 all electrical equipment in the vehicle (cli- 12 mate system, windshield wipers, audio sys- 5 8 11 tem, etc.) and make sure that all doors are 9 closed. 10 6 7 G018632 3. Using a pen or similar object, press and Rearview mirror with compass. Magnetic zones. hold the button on the underside of mirror The rearview mirror has an integrated display until C is shown again in the mirror (after The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. that shows the compass direction in which the approx. 6 seconds). The correct zone must be selected for the com- vehicle is pointing. Eight different directions are pass to work correctly. 4. Drive as usual. C disappears from the dis- shown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE 1. Put the ignition in mode II. (north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), play when calibration is complete. SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest). Alternative calibration method: 2. Using a pen or similar object, press and hold the button on the rear side of mirror The compass is displayed automatically when Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no for at least 3 seconds. The number for the the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To more than 5 mph (8 km/h) until C disap- current area will be shown. switch the compass on/off use a pen or similar pears from the display when calibration is 3. Press the button repeatedly until the num- object and press in the button on the underside complete. of the mirror. ber for the required geographic area (1 – 15) is shown. Calibration 4. The display will revert to showing the com- The compass will need to be calibrated if the pass direction after several seconds. vehicle is driven into a new magnetic zone (see the magnetic zones on the map at the end of this section). To do so:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107 03 Your driving environment

Power moonroof

Introduction Sliding moonroof until the moonroof has opened to the posi- The moonroof1 controls are located in the ceil- tion of your choice. ing console near the rearview mirror. The Manual closing moonroof can be opened vertically and hori- – Push the switch forward to the first stop zontally. The vehicle's ignition must be in mode (the position for manual closing) and hold I or II for the moonroof to be operated. it until the moonroof has closed to the posi- 03 tion of your choice, or has closed com- CAUTION pletely. • Remove ice and snow before opening Automatic closing the moonroof. – Push the switch as far forward as possible • Do not operate the moonroof if it is fro- (the position for automatic closing) and zen closed. G021343 release it to automatically close the moonroof. • Never place heavy objects on the Sliding moonroof, forward/rearward moonroof. Opening, automatic Opening, manual Closing, manual Closing, automatic Automatic opening – Pull the switch as far back as possible (to the position for automatic opening) and release it to automatically fully slide open the moonroof. Manual opening – Pull the switch back to the first stop (the position for manual opening) and hold it

1 Option on certain models

108 03 Your driving environment

Power moonroof

WARNING Tilt position Wind blocker • During manual closing, if the moonroof is obstructed, immediately open it again. • Never open or close the moonroof if it is obstructed in any way. 03 • Never allow a child to operate the moonroof. • Never leave a child alone in a vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, ensure that

the ignition is in mode 0 (see page 84 for G028899 information about the various ignition Tilt position, raised at the rear edge modes) to disable the moonroof. Never The moonroof is equipped with a wind blocker Open by pressing the rear edge of the con- leave the remote key/PCC* in the vehi- that folds up when the moonroof is open. cle. trol upward. • Never extend any object or body part Close by pulling the rear edge of the con- though the open moonroof, even if the trol downward and hold it until the moon- vehicle's ignition is completely roof has closed completely. switched off. Visor The moonroof features a sliding visor. The visor slides open automatically when the moonroof is opened, and must be closed manually.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Introduction WARNING Programming HomeLink

• If you use HomeLink to open a garage NOTE door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion. Some vehicles may require the ignition to be When programming a garage door switched on or be in the “accessories” posi- • tion for programming and/or operation of 03 opener, it is advised to park outside of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a the garage. new battery be placed in the hand-held • Do not use HomeLink with any garage transmitter of the device being programmed door opener that lacks safety stop and to HomeLink for quicker training and accu- reverse features as required by U.S. rate transmission of the radio-frequency federal safety standards (this includes signal. The HomeLink buttons must be reset any garage door opener model manu- first. When this has been completed, Home- link is in learning mode so that you can per- factured before April 1, 1982). A garage form programming. The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro- door that cannot detect an object - sig- vides a convenient way to replace up to three naling the door to stop and reverse - hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters does not meet current U.S. federal 1. Position the end of your hand-held trans- used to activate devices such as gate opera- safety standards. For more information, mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the tors, garage door openers, entry door locks, contact HomeLink at: HomeLink button you wish to program security systems, even home lighting. Addi- www.homelink.com. while keeping the indicator light in view. tional HomeLink information can be found on 2. Simultaneously press and hold both the the Internet at www.homelink.com or by phon- Retain the original transmitter of the RF device chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit- ing the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. you are programming for use in other vehicles ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator as well as for future HomeLink programming. It light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink- is also suggested that upon the sale of the ing light. Now you may release both the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be HomeLink and hand-held transmitter but- erased for security purposes. Refer to “Reset- tons. ting HomeLink Buttons” on page 112.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

NOTE or “smart” button. This can usually be cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink” found where the hanging antenna wire is step 2 with the following: Some devices may require you to replace attached to the motor-head unit. this Programming Step 2 with procedures • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- 5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or button while you press and release - gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica- “smart” button. (The name and color of the every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand- tor light does not change to a rapidly blink- button may vary by manufacturer.) There held transmitter until the HomeLink indica- ing light after performing these steps, con- are 30 seconds to initiate step 6. tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly 03 tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or by blinking light. Now you may release both phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter for two seconds and release the pro- buttons. grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the 3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com- “press/hold/release” sequence a second release the programmed HomeLink but- plete. ton up to two separate times to activate the time, and, depending on the brand of the door. If the door does not activate, press garage door opener (or other rolling code and hold the just-trained HomeLink button equipped device), repeat this sequence a Using HomeLink and observe the indicator light. third time to complete the programming To operate, simply press and hold the pro- process. grammed HomeLink button until the trained • If the indicator light stays on con- HomeLink should now activate your rolling device begins to operate (this may take several stantly, programming is complete seconds). Activation will now occur for the and your device should activate when code equipped device. trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate the HomeLink button is pressed and operator, security system, entry door lock, released. Gate Operator/Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans- home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, • If the indicator light blinks rapidly for mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev- the hand-held transmitter of the device may two seconds and then turns to a con- eral seconds of transmission – which may not also be used at any time. In the event that there stant light continue with “Program- be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the are still programming difficulties or questions, to complete the pro- ming” steps 4-6 signal during programming. Similar to this contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or gramming of a rolling code equipped Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are by phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. device (most commonly a garage door designed to “time-out” in the same manner. opener). If you live in Canada or you are having difficul- 4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor- ties programming a gate operator or garage head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn” door opener by using the “Programming” pro-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

NOTE Reprogramming a Single HomeLink NOTE Button If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will The transmitter has been tested and com- function for 30 minutes after the driver's To program a device to HomeLink using a plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or door has been opened. HomeLink button previously trained, follow modifications not expressly approved by these steps: the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but- 03 device.2 Resetting HomeLink Buttons ton. DO NOT release the button. Use the following procedure to reset (erase programming) from the three HomeLink but- 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after tons (individual buttons cannot be reset but 20 seconds. Without releasing the Home- can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the fol- Link button, proceed with “Programming” lowing section): - step 1. 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink For questions or comments, contact HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to at: www.homelink.com or phone 1–800–355– flash. 3515. 2. Release both buttons. This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation > HomeLink is now in the training (or is subject to the following two conditions: (1) learning) mode and can be programmed This device may not cause harmful interfer- at any time beginning with “Program- ence, and (2) This device must accept any ming” - step 1. interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Start WARNING The starter motor operates for a maximum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not • Never use more than one floor mat at a started, repeat the procedure. time on the driver's floor. An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the CAUTION accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that the movement of If the engine does not start after the third try, these pedals is not impeded. wait for approximately 3 minutes before try- 03 ing to start it again to give the battery time Volvo's floor mats are specially manu- • to recover its starting capacity. factured for your car. They must be firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that they cannot slide and become trap- NOTE ped under the pedals on the driver's side. Keyless drive* Ignition slot with remote key inserted ( see To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless page 84 for more information on ignition modes) drive feature, one of the remote keys must 1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot be in the passenger compartment. Follow WARNING as far as possible, with the metallic key the instructions in steps 2 and 3 to start the blade pointing outward (not inserted into vehicle. Before starting the engine: the slot)1. Fasten the seat belt. • 2. Depress the brake pedal2. • Check that the seat, steering wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly. 3. Press and release the START/STOP ENGINE button. The autostart function will Make sure the brake pedal can be • operate the starter motor until the engine depressed completely. Adjust the seat starts or until its overheating function stops if necessary. it.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment. 2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

WARNING NOTE CAUTION • Always remove the remote key from the • After a cold start, idle speed may be • When starting in cold weather, the auto- ignition slot when leaving the vehicle noticeably higher than normal for a matic transmission may shift up at and ensure that the ignition in mode 0 short period. This is done to help bring slightly higher engine speeds than nor- (see page 85 for information about the components in the emission control mal until the automatic transmission ignition modes), especially if there are system to their normal operating tem- fluid reaches normal operating tem- 03 children in the vehicle. perature as quickly as possible, which perature. • On vehicles with th optional keyless enables them to control emissions and • Do not race a cold engine immediately drive, never remove the remote key help reduce the vehicle's impact on the after starting. Oil flow may not reach 3 from the vehicle while it is being driven environment . some lubrication points fast enough to or towed. prevent engine damage. • Always place the gear selector in Park • The engine should be idling when you and apply the parking brake before move the gear selector. Never acceler- leaving the vehicle. Never leave the ate until after you feel the transmission vehicle unattended with the engine run- engage. Accelerating immediately after ning. selecting a gear will cause harsh • Always open garage doors fully before engagement and premature transmis- starting the engine inside a garage to sion wear. ensure adequate ventilation. The • Selecting P or N when idling at a stand- exhaust gases contain carbon monox- still for prolonged periods of time will ide, which is invisible and odorless but help prevent overheating of the auto- very poisonous. matic transmission fluid.

3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

114 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* Using ERS If the requirements for ERS have been met, the following will occur: Introduction ERS is a feature that makes it possible to 1. The turn signals will flash several times. remotely start the engine to cool or heat the 2. The engine will start. passenger compartment before driving. 3. The turn signals will illuminate for The climate control system will start using the 3 seconds to indicate that the engine has 03 same settings as when the engine was started. switched off. After the engine has started, the vehicle remains locked but the alarm is disarmed. When the engine is started using ERS, it will run for a maximum of 15 minutes before automat- Models with a Personal Car ically switching off again. After 2 ERS starts, Communicator (PCC) remote key* (see the engine must be started in the normal way Remote key buttons used for remote engine start page 56) before ERS can be used again. The indicator light for approach light- Lock ing will flash several times and then NOTE Approach lighting glow continuously if all of the require- Always adhere to applicable State, Province ments for ERS have been met. How- Information4. and or Local laws regarding engine idling ever, this does not indicate that ERS has when using ERS. started the engine. Starting the engine To check if ERS has started the engine, press The maximum range for ERS is approximately the information button (3). If the engine has WARNING 100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is started, the indicator light for button 2 will illu- unobstructed. The vehicle must also be Keep the following in mind before using ERS minate. locked. • The vehicle should be in view. Active functions To start the engine: • The vehicle should be unoccupied. When the engine is started with ERS, the fol- • The vehicle must not be parked indoors 1. Press button 1 briefly. lowing functions are activated: or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes 2. Immediately press button 2 for approxi- • The climate control system are harmful to the health. mately 2 seconds. • The infotainment system.

4 PCC keys only, see page 56

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Deactivated functions Switching off the engine To jump start your vehicle: When the engine is started with ERS, the fol- With the engine running, press the START/ 1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to lowing functions are deactivated: STOP ENGINE button. mode 0, see page 84). • Headlights If the gear selector is not in the P position or if 2. First connect the red jumper cable to the • Parking lights the vehicle is moving, press the START/STOP auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1). ENGINE button twice or press and hold it in 03 • License plate lights until the engine switches off. 3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+) • Windshield wipers terminal on your vehicle's battery (2), marked with a "+" sign, located under a Switching off an engine started with ERS Jump starting folding cover. Any of the following will switch off the engine if it has been started with ERS: 4. Connect the black jumper cable to the auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) and • Pressing the lock button (1) on the remote to the ground point in your vehicle's engine key compartment (right engine mount at the • Unlocking the vehicle top, on the outer screw) (4). • Opening a door 5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, • Depressing the throttle or brake pedal then start the engine in the vehicle with • Moving the gear selector from the P posi- dead battery. tion 6. After the engine has started, first remove

• If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons G021347 the negative (–) terminal jumper cable (10 liters) of fuel in the tank (black). Then remove the positive (+) termi- Connecting the jumper cables • More than 15 minutes have elapsed. nal jumper cable (red). Follow these instructions to jump start your If the engine has been started with ERS and vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the 3 seconds. 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another Message in the instrument panel display vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touch- If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be ing to prevent premature completion of a cir- displayed in the instrument panel. cuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle.

116 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

WARNING WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! • Do not connect the jumper cable to any Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- part of the fuel system or to any moving sories contain lead and lead compounds, parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds. chemicals known to the state of California • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which to cause cancer and reproductive harm. is flammable and explosive. Wash hands after handling. 03 • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, CAUTION skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area Connect the jumper cables carefully to immediately with water. Obtain medical avoid short circuits with other components help immediately if eyes are affected. in the engine compartment. • Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark. • Do not smoke near the battery. • Failure to follow the instructions for jump starting can lead to injury.

117 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

Automatic transmission CAUTION The transmission’s temperature is monitored to help prevent damage to the transmission or other drivetrain components. If there is a risk of overheating, the warning symbol on the instrument panel will illumi- 03 nate and a text message will be displayed. Follow the instructions provided there.

Park position (P) Select the P position when starting or parking.

G021351 Shiftlock When has been selected, the transmission is Shiftgate positions1 P CAUTION mechanically blocked in this position. The Depress the button on the front of the gear brake pedal must be depressed and the igni- The vehicle must be stationary when posi- selector knob to move the gear selector tion must be in at least mode II (see page 84) tion P is selected. between the R, N, D, and P positions. before the gear lever can be moved from the The gear selector can be moved freely between P position. Reverse (R) the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D) The vehicle must be stationary when position positions while driving. WARNING R is selected. Always apply the parking brake when the Neutral position (N) vehicle is parked, particularly when parking No gear is engaged and the engine can be on a hill. The transmission's P mode may not be able to keep the vehicle stationary if started with the gear selector in this position. it is parked on an incline. Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is stationary with the gear selector in position N. Press the control to apply the parking brake, Drive (D) see page 124. D is the normal driving position. The car automatically shifts between the various forward

1 The information display (see page 77) shows the gear selector's position or the selected gear by displaying the following: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

118 03 Your driving environment

Transmission gears, based on the level of acceleration and not occur until the speed has decreased NOTE speed. The car must be at a standstill when enough to allow the lower gear to be used. On vehicles equipped with Sport mode, shifting from position R to position D. If you slow to a very low speed, the trans- • • the transmission symbol in the main mission will automatically shift down. Geartronic–manual shifting instrument panel will change from D to Geartronic allows you to manually shift among Shiftlock – Neutral (N) S when the gear selector is moved to your vehicle's six forward speeds. Geartronic If the gear selector is in the N position and the the manual shifting mode. If the gear 03 can be selected at any time. vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 sec- selector is moved toward "+" or "-", the onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run- number of the gear currently being used • To access the manual shifting position ning) then the gear selector is locked. will be displayed, see page 77). from Drive (D), move the gear selector to the right (to the area marked M in the illus- To be able to move the gear selector from N to • Please be aware that using Sport mode tration. another gear position, the brake pedal must be may result in a slight decrease in fuel depressed and the ignition must be in posi- economy. Driving in D can help improve • To return to the D position from the manual fuel economy. shifting position, move the gear selector to tion II, see page 84. the left. Geartronic–Sport mode (S)2 This transmission mode provides sportier shift- Geartronic–starting on slippery surfaces While driving Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual shift- If you select the manual shifting position ing characteristics and enables a more active • ing mode can help provide better traction when while driving, the gear that was being used driving style by making it possible to drive at starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so: in the Drive position will also initially be higher rpm in each gear before shifting up. The selected in the manual shifting position. engine also responds faster when the throttle 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the • Move the gear selector forward (toward pedal is pressed. gear selector to the right from the D posi- "+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move the tion to the manual shifting position. The (toward "–") to shift to a lower gear. gear selector to the right. The transmission will text in the instrument panel display will change from to . • If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the not switch to manual shifting mode until the D 1 transmission will downshift one gear at a gear selector is moved forward or rearward 2. Press the gear selector forward and time and will utilize the braking power of toward + or –. release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the the engine. If the current speed is too high Sport mode can be selected any time. selector forward again and release it to for using a lower gear, the downshift will select 3rd gear.

2 Certain models only

119 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

3. Release the brake pedal and press gently Move the gear selector from the P position. NOTE on the accelerator pedal. For information on the key blade, see page 57. The message AWD disabled Service Shiftlock override required will be appear in the information All Wheel Drive – AWD4 display if an electrical fault should occur in the AWD system. A warning light will also illuminate in the instrument panel. If this 03 occurs, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example because of a dead battery, the gear selector Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent must be moved from the P position before the All Wheel Drive, which means that power is distributed automatically between the front vehicle can be moved3. and rear wheels. Under normal driving condi- Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the tions, most of the engine's power is directed to storage compartment behind the center the front wheels. However, if there is any ten- console to expose the small opening for dency for the front wheels to spin, an electron- overriding the shiftlock system. ically controlled coupling distributes power to Insert the key blade into the opening. Press the wheels that have the best traction. the key blade down as far as possible and keep it held down.

3 If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 116. 4 Standard on certain models.

120 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

Brake system Brake pad inspection WARNING The brake system is a hydraulic system con- On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi- Use the jack intended for the vehicle sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob- tion of the brake pads can be checked by rais- • when changing a tire. For any other job, lem should occur in one of these circuits, it is ing the vehicle (see page 294 for information use stands to support the vehicle. still possible to stop the vehicle with the other about using the jack and removing a wheel) brake circuit. and performing a visual inspection of the brake • The jack should be kept well-greased pads. and clean, and should not be damaged. 03 If the brake pedal must be depressed farther • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- than normal and requires greater foot pressure, slippery surface. the stopping distance will be longer. WARNING • No objects should be placed between A warning light in the instrument panel will light • If the vehicle has been driven immediately prior to a brake pad inspection, the the base of jack and the ground, or up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred. wheel hub, brake components, etc., will between the jack and the attachment If this light comes on while driving or braking, be very hot. Allow time for these com- bar on the vehicle. stop immediately and check the brake fluid ponents to cool before carrying out the • The jack must correctly engage the jack level in the reservoir. inspection. attachment. • Apply the parking brake and put the • Never allow any part of your body to be NOTE gear selector in the Park (P) position. extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. Press the brake pedal hard and maintain • Block the wheels standing on the pressure on the pedal – do not pump the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or brakes. large stones. Brake lights The brake lights come on automatically when WARNING the brakes are applied. If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the Adaptive brake lights reservoir or if a brake system message is The adaptive brake lights activate in the event shown in the information display: DO NOT of sudden braking or if the ABS system is acti- DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained vated. This function causes an additional tail- and qualified Volvo service technician and light on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to have the brake system inspected. help alert vehicles traveling behind. The adaptive brake lights activate if:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

• The ABS system activates for more than brakes are needed, depress the pedal occa- (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several approximately a half second sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc. times and a sound may be audible from the • In the event of sudden braking while the This will remove the water from the brakes. ABS control module, which is normal. vehicle is moving at speeds above approx- Check that brake application feels normal. This imately 6 mph (10 km/h) should also be done after washing or starting Cleaning the brake discs in very damp or cold weather. Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake may result in delayed brake function. This delay 03 lights and additional taillights remain on for as Severe strain on the brake system is minimized by cleaning the brake linings. long as the brake pedal is depressed or until The brakes will be subject to severe strain Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet braking force on the vehicle is reduced. when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or weather, prior to long-term parking, and after when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually Power brakes function only when the the vehicle has been washed. Do this by brak- slower, which means that the cooling of the engine is running ing gently for a short period while the vehicle is brakes is less efficient than when driving on The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure moving. level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes, which is only created when the engine is run- shift into a lower gear and let the engine help ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the Emergency Brake Assistance with the braking. Do not forget that if you are engine switched off. EBA is designed to provide full brake effect towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak- If the power brakes are not working, consider- a greater than normal load. ing. The system is activated by the speed with ably higher pressure will be required on the which the brake pedal is depressed. brake pedal to compensate for the lack of Anti-lock braking system (ABS) power assistance. This can happen for exam- The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to When the EBA system is activated, the brake ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) pedal will go down and pressure in the brake switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The during severe braking conditions by limiting system immediately increases to the maximum brake pedal feels harder than usual. brake lockup. When the system "senses" level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal impending lockup, braking pressure is auto- in order to utilize the system completely. EBA Water on brake discs and brake pads matically modulated in order to help prevent is automatically deactivated when the brake affects braking lockup that could lead to a skid. pedal is released. Driving in rain and slush or passing through an The system performs a brief self-diagnostic automatic car wash can cause water to collect test when the engine has been started and on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto- delay in braking effect when the pedal is matic test may be performed when the vehicle depressed. To avoid such a delay when the first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph

122 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

NOTE Symbols in the instrument panel • When the EBA system is activated, the Symbol Specification brake pedal will go down and pressure Steady glow – Check the brake in the brake system immediately increa- fluid level. If the level is low, fill ses to the maximum level. You must maintain full pressure on the brake with brake fluid and check for pedal in order to utilize the system com- the cause of the brake fluid 03 pletely. There will be no braking effect if loss. the pedal is released. EBA is automati- Steady glow for two seconds cally deactivated when the brake pedal when the engine is started – is released. There was a fault in the brake • When the vehicle has been parked for system's ABS function when some time, the brake pedal may sink the engine was last running. more than usual when the engine is started. This is normal and the pedal will return to its usual position when it is WARNING released. If and come on at the same time and the brake level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system-related message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected.

123 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Electric parking brake Applying the electric parking brake NOTE An electric parking brake has the same func- In an emergency the parking brake can tion as a manual parking brake. • be applied when the vehicle is moving by holding in the control. Braking will be NOTE interrupted when the accelerator pedal is depressed or the control is released. 03 • A faint sound from the parking brake's electric motor can be heard when the • An audible signal will sound during this parking brake is being applied. This procedure if the vehicle is moving at sound can also be heard during the speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). automatic function check of the parking brake. Parking on a hill • The brake pedal will move slightly when • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front the electric parking brake is applied or Parking brake control wheels so that they point away from the released. curb. 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the Low battery voltage 2. Push the control. front wheels so that they point toward the If the battery voltage is too low, the parking > The symbol in the instrument curb. brake cannot be applied or released. Connect panel flashes while the parking bake is The parking brake should also be applied. an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too being applied, and glows steadily when low, see page 116. the parking brake has been fully applied. 3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is at a standstill. 4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selector must be in position P.

124 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Releasing the electric parking brake NOTE Symbols • For safety reasons, the parking brake is Symbol Specification only released automatically if the engine Read the message in the infor- is running and the driver is wearing a seat mation display belt. • The electric parking brake will be A flashing symbol indicates that 03 released immediately when the acceler- the parking brake is being ator pedal is pressed and the gear selec- applied. If the symbol flashes in tor is in position D or R. any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. 2. Fasten the seat belt. Read the message on the information display. 3. Move the gear selector to position D or R Parking brake control and press the accelerator pedal. The park- Messages Manual release ing brake will release when the vehicle 1. Fasten the seat belt. begins to move. 2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and Heavy load uphill press the START/STOP ENGINE button A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the (or press the START/STOP ENGINE but- vehicle to roll backward when the parking ton with a valid remote key in the passen- brake is released automatically on a steep ger compartment on vehicles with the incline. To help avoid this: optional keyless drive). 1. Keep the electric parking brake lever 3. Press firmly on the brake pedal. pushed in with the left hand while shifting into Drive with the right. 4. Pull the parking brake control. 2. While pressing the throttle pedal to pull Automatic release away, release the parking brake lever only 1. Start the engine. after the vehicle begins to move. Park brake not fully released – A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several times. If the problem persists, contact

125 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds. Parking brake not applied – A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it 03 several times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds. Parking brake Service required – A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains.

WARNING If the vehicle must be parked before the fault has been corrected, always put the gear selector in P and turn the wheels so that they point away from the curb if the vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is pointing downhill.

126 03 Your driving environment

127 128 *

Option/accessory, for more information, seeIntroduction. Adaptive CruiseControl(ACC)* Park assist* Distance Alert* Blind SpotInformation Driver AlertSystem* Collision warningwithFullAuto-brakeandPedestrianDetection* City Safety™ Road signinformation 130 Stability system...... riecnrl...... 135 Cruise control...... erPr sitCmr PC*...... 175 Rear ParkAssistCamera(PAC)* ...... 171 ...... 151 ...... 148 ...... 165 ...... (RSI) ...... ytm...... 179 System*...... 137 ...... 157 ...... 133

G000000 DRIVER SUPPORT 04 Driver support

Stability system

Introduction Spin control (SC) Operation The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control The spin control function is designed to help Sport mode system (DSTC) consists of a number of func- prevent the drive wheels from spinning while The stability system is always activated and tions designed to help reduce wheel spin, the vehicle is accelerating. cannot be switched off. counteract skidding, and to generally help improve directional stability. Corner Traction Control – CTC However, the driver can select Sport mode, CTC compensates for understeering and helps which offers more active driving characteris- provide additional stability when accelerating CAUTION tics. In this mode, the engine management sys- through a curve by preventing the inside wheel tem monitors movement of the accelerator A pulsating sound will be audible when the from spinning. This is particularly useful when pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving by system is actively operating and is normal. accelerating on a curving highway on-ramp. 04 allowing more lateral movement of the rear CTC is most effective if the stability system's wheels before DSTC is activated. Traction control (TC) Sport mode is selected. See the section about Under certain circumstances, such as when This function is designed to help reduce wheel Sport mode. driving with snow chains, or driving in deep spin by transferring power from a drive wheel snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the Engine Drag Control (EDC) temporarily use Sport mode for maximum opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle). EDC helps keep the engine running if the wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when tractive force. TC is most active at low speeds. shifting down in the Geartronic manual shifting If the driver releases pressure on the acceler- This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and mode or while using the engine's braking func- ator pedal, DSTC will also activate to help sta- cannot be switched off. tion on a slippery surface. If the engine were to bilize the vehicle. stop, power steering would not function, mak- To switch to Sport mode: Active Yaw Control (AYC) ing the vehicle more difficult to steer. This function helps maintain directional stabil- 1. Press the My Car button in the center con- ity, for example when cornering, by braking Trailer Stability Assist – TSA* sole control panel and select My S60 one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows Trailer Stability Assist helps stabilize a vehicle DSTC in the menu. a tendency to skid or slide laterally. that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and 2. Unselect the symbol and leave the menu This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and trailer have begun to sway. See page 266 for by pressing EXIT. cannot be switched off. more information. This system is automatically deactivated if the > This puts DSTC in Sport mode. driver selects Sport mode. Sport mode remains active until the driver switches it off in the menu or until the engine is

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Stability system switched off. DSTC will return to normal mode when the engine is restarted.

Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel Symbol Message Description DSTC Temporarily OFF The DSTC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. DSTC reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required The DSTC system is not functioning properly.

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it. 04 • If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected.

"Message" Read the message in the information display

and

Steady glow for 2 secs. The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

Flashing symbol DSTC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

- Sport mode has been activated.

131 04 Driver support

Stability system

WARNING The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but can never replace, the driver's judgment and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

132 04 Driver support

Road sign information (RSI)

Introduction Operation Displaying the speed limit indication can be deactivated. To do so: • Deselect the alternative in MY CAR Settings Car settings Road Sign Information or cancel by pressing EXIT. Speed alert The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle exceeds the posted speed limit by more than 3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the symbol with the posted speed limit in the instrument panel begins to flash. 04 To activate speed alert: Examples of readable road signs Registered speed information • Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR Road Sign Information (RSI) is a feature that When RSI registers a road sign showing the Settings Car settings Speed alert helps the driver see road signs with the posted speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol or cancel by pressing EXIT. speed limit. on the instrument panel.

If the vehicle passes a sign showing the speed Settings in MY CAR Limitations limit, this will be displayed in the center con- RSI's camera has the same limitations as the sole. human eye. See page 161 for more information about the camera's limitations. WARNING Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit RSI does not function in all situations and is (such as a sign with a town's name and the only intended to provide supplementary permitted speed limit) will not be registered by information. RSI. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle safely. Other factors that may interfere with RSI include: Possible settings in MY CAR • Faded signs • Signs located in a curve

133 04 Driver support

Road sign information (RSI)

• Twisted or damaged signs • Obstructed signs • Signs that are partially covered by snow, ice, etc.

134 04 Driver support

Cruise control

Operation > The symbol illuminates and the text 2. Press or for approximately a half (---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con- second and release the button to increase trol is in standby mode. or decrease vehicle speed by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h). NOTE NOTE • Putting cruise control in standby mode does not set a cruising speed. • A temporary increase in speed by • When cruise control is in standby mode, pressing the accelerator pedal, for less the driver's seat belt must be fastened than 1 minute (e.g. when passing before a cruising speed can be set. another car), does not affect the current cruise control setting. The vehicle will 04 automatically return to the previously Setting a speed set speed when the accelerator pedal is Steering wheel-mounted controls and display Use the or buttons set the vehicle's cur- released. Standby mode rent speed. The set speed is shown in the dis- • If one of the cruise control buttons is play. kept depressed for more than approx. Resume set speed 1 minute cruise control is disengaged. Deactivating NOTE The engine must then be switched off in order to reset cruise control. Activate/set speed Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). Set speed indicator (parentheses indicate Automatic deactivation standby mode) Adjusting the set speed Cruise control is automatically deactivated temporarily if one of the following occurs: Engaging the cruise control function After a speed has been set, it can be increased Before a speed can be set, the cruise control or decreased by using the or buttons. • If the speed drops below approximately system must be engaged (put in standby 20 mph (30 km/h). 1. Press and hold down or until the mode). • When the brake pedal is depressed. vehicle reaches the desired speed. – • If the gear selector is moved to position N. Press the symbol (1). > This will become the set speed when the button is released.

135 04 Driver support

Cruise control

• During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. WARNING If the vehicle's speed is increased by using • Cruise control should not be used in heavy the accelerator pedal for more than traffic or when driving on wet or slippery 1 minute. roads. Cruise control may not maintain set The currently set speed will be saved in the speed on steep downgrades. system's memory.

Temporary deactivation The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise control by pressing 0. The saved speed is 04 shown in brackets in the information display. Resume set speed If cruise control has been deactivated temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set speed.

WARNING There may be a significant increase in speed after the button has been pressed.

Deactivation Cruise control is disengaged by pressing or by switching off the engine. The set speed is cleared.

136 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Introduction WARNING Function Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover system designed to assist the driver by main- • all driving situations and traffic, weather taining a set speed or a set time interval to the and road conditions. The "Function" vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for use section provides information about lim- on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as itations that the driver must be aware of on highways and other main roads. before using this feature. When the driver has set the desired speed and • This system is designed to be a supple- the time interval to the vehicle ahead, ACC mentary driving aid. It is not, however, functions as follows: intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is 04 • If there are no other vehicles in the lane responsible for maintaining a safe dis- ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at the tance and speed and must intervene if set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control does not main- Function overview1 • If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower tain a suitable speed or suitable dis- Warning light, braking by driver required moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys- tance to the vehicle ahead. tem will adapt your vehicle's speed to help Controls in steering wheel Maintenance of ACC components may maintain the set time interval to the vehicle • only be performed by a trained and ahead. When there are no longer slower Radar sensor in front grille qualified Volvo technician. moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will Adaptive Cruise Control consists of: accelerate to resume the set speed. A cruise control system to maintain a set If ACC is switched off completely or in standby • speed mode and your vehicle comes too close to another vehicle ahead, the driver will be • A system to maintain a set distance to the warned by the Distance Alert system (see vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a page 148). time interval. For example, you can choose to remain approximately 2 seconds behind the vehicle ahead. The actual distance required to maintain a 2-second interval will vary according the speed of the vehicles.

1 The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING WARNING WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli- The brake pedal moves when the adaptive When Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby sion avoidance system. The driver is cruise control system modulates the mode or is switched off completely, the always responsible for applying the brakes. Do not rest your foot under the brakes will not be modulated automatically. brakes if the system does not detect brake pedal. The driver must assume full control over the another vehicle. vehicle. • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react The ACC system is designed to smoothly reg- to people or animals, or small vehicles ulate speed. However, the driver must apply Warning light—driver braking required such as bicycles and motorcycles. It the brakes in situations that require immediate Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force also does not react to slow moving, braking. This applies when there are great dif- that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the 04 parked or approaching vehicles, or sta- ferences in speed between vehicles, or if the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations tionary objects. vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. requiring more brake force than ACC can pro- • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in vide and if the driver does not apply the brakes, demanding driving conditions such as WARNING an audible signal from the Collision Warning city driving or other heavy traffic situa- system will sound and warning light will illumi- Due to limitations in the radar sensor, brak- nate (see page 158) in the windshield to alert tions, in slippery conditions, when there ing may occur unexpectedly or not at all, is a great deal of water or slush on the see page 143. the driver to react. road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on high- NOTE way on- or off-ramps. Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active mode at any permitted speed. However, if the Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h) contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, ACC driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the wind- lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehi- disengages (goes into standby mode) and will cle's speed is regulated by accelerating and shield difficult to see. no longer modulate the brakes2. The driver will braking. The brakes may emit a sound when then have to maintain a safe distance to the they are being modulated by the adaptive vehicle ahead. cruise control system. This is normal.

2 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional Queue Assist. See page 141 for more information.

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING Operation Putting ACC in standby mode Before ACC can be used to regulate speed Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehi- and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it must cles detected by the radar sensor, see page 143. In some cases there may be no first be put in standby mode. warning or the warning may be delayed. The To do so: driver should always apply the brakes when necessary. Press . The symbol appears in the display and Steep inclines and/or heavy loads parentheses (---) indicate that ACC is in ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly level standby mode. roads. The system may have difficulty main- 04 taining the correct distance to a vehicle ahead NOTE on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or is towing a trailer. In these situa- Controls and display The driver's door must be closed and the tions, the driver should always be prepared to Resume previous settings, increase speed driver's seat belt must be fastened before apply the brakes if necessary. (each additional press increases speed by ACC can be put in active mode. If the driver's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h). door is opened, ACC will return to standby Standby mode on/off mode. Set time interval Setting a speed Put in active mode and set a speed Once ACC has been put in standby mode, use Set speed (parentheses indicate standby the or buttons to store (set) the vehicle's mode) current speed. This puts the system in active mode. The set speed, for example 55 mph, is Time interval while it is being set shown in the display. Time interval after it has been set

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

When the symbol on the Setting a time interval left side of the display The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be changes to , the radar sen- increased by pressing and decreased by sor has detected another pressing . The current time interval is shown vehicle ahead. The distance briefly in the display following adjustment. to a vehicle ahead is only Different time intervals can be regulated when this symbol ( ) is illumi- selected and are shown in the The number of bars indicating the selected nated. display as 1–5 horizontal bars. time interval are shown while the setting is being made and for several seconds afterward. Changing the set speed The greater the number of bars, the longer the time inter- A smaller version of the symbol is then shown After a speed has been set, it can be increased 04 val. One bar represents a time to the right in the display. The same symbol is or decreased by using the or buttons. interval of approximately also displayed when Distance Alert is in active Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds. mode, see page 148 . vehicle's speed changes by 5 mph At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle Standby mode (temporary deactivation) (approximately 8 km/h). ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval Press to temporarily deactivate cruise con- When the system is in active mode, the but- slightly. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as trol (put it in standby mode). The set speed, for ton has the same function as , but results in smoothly as possible, ACC allows the time interval to vary considerably in certain situa- example 55 mph, is then shown in parenthe- a smaller increase in speed. tions. ses. The previously set speed and time interval are NOTE WARNING resumed by pressing . If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control • Only use a time interval that is suitable buttons is pressed for more than • in current traffic conditions. WARNING approximately one minute, ACC will be deactivated. The engine must then be • A short time interval gives the driver lim- There may be a significant increase in speed switched off and restarted to reset ACC. ited reaction time if an unexpected sit- after the button has been pressed. uation occurs in traffic. • In some situations Adaptive Cruise Control cannot be put in active mode. When ACC is in active mode, the vehicle’s Cruise control Unavailable is shown speed increases by approximately 1 mph in the display, see page 146. (1 km/h) each additional time is pressed.

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Standby mode due to action by the driver vehicle's speed to the surrounding traffic and left turn signal, ACC can assist by accelerating ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in regulate the distance to the vehicle ahead. briefly. standby mode: An automatic switch to standby mode may be This function is active at speeds above approx- • if the brakes are applied caused if: imately 45 mph (70 km/h). • if the gear selector is moved to N • engine speed (rpm) is too high/low WARNING • if the driver drives at a speed higher than • the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph the set speed for more than 1 minute. (30 km/h)3 Please be aware that this function will also In this happens, the driver will have to regulate cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in • the wheels lose traction certain situations other than passing the vehicle's speed. • brake temperature is high another vehicle, for example using the left the radar sensor is obstructed by, for turn signal to indicate a lane change or a 04 • turn toward a highway exit at speeds above NOTE example, wet snow or rain. approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for a short time, such as when passing another Resuming the set speed vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactivated Queue Assist is reactivated when the pedal is released. by pressing the button on the steering Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is wheel keypad. The vehicle will return to the linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis- Automatic standby mode most recently set speed. sion. Adaptive cruise control is linked to other sys- Queue Assist consists of the following func- tems such as the stability and traction control WARNING tions: system (DSTC). If this system is not functioning The vehicle may accelerate quickly after properly, adaptive cruise control is automati- • Enhanced speed interval (including when has been pressed if its current speed is cally deactivated and will go into standby the vehicle is at a complete stop or is mov- considerably lower than the set speed. ing at speed below 18 mph (30 km/h)) mode. • Automatic standby mode when ACC In the event of automatic deactivation, an audi- changes target vehicles ble signal will sound and the message Cruise Passing another vehicle No automatic braking when at a standstill control Cancelled is shown in the display. If your vehicle’s speed is being regulated by • The driver must then intervene and adapt the ACC and the driver indicates that he/she would • The parking brake is applied automatically like to pass the vehicle ahead by using the

3 Does not apply to vehicles equipped with the optional Queue Assist

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Please note that the lowest speed that can be During short stops (less than approximately Automatic standby mode when ACC set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can 3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehicle changes target vehicles maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle will begin moving again automatically as soon ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist con- as the vehicle ahead begins to move. sists of the following features: If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle Enhanced speed interval ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automatically go into standby mode. NOTE The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in The driver's door must be closed and the one of the following ways: driver's seat belt must be fastened before • By pressing 04 ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv- If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's • By accelerating up to at least 3 mph a stationary vehicle ahead door is opened, ACC will return to standby (4 km/h). ACC will then resume following mode. the vehicle ahead. The following only applies at speeds below approximately 18 mph (30 km/h): Your vehicle will then resume following the Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval vehicle ahead at the set time interval. If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle that to the vehicle ahead at any permissible speed, the radar sensor has detected) from a moving including a complete stop. NOTE vehicle to a stationary one, the system will apply the brakes in your vehicle. In order to activate ACC at speeds below ACC can remain active and keep your vehi- 18 mph (30 km/h): cle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes. After WARNING • The vehicle ahead must be within a rea- 4 minutes have elapsed, the parking brake will be engaged and ACC will go into At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC sonable distance (not farther away than standby mode. approx. 100 ft/30 meters) will not react to a stationary vehicle and To reactivate ACC, the driver must release apply the brakes but will instead accelerate • The lowest speed that can be selected is the parking brake (see page 125). to the previously set speed. The driver must 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle. help maintain the set time interval to the vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including a complete stop. ACC disengages and goes into standby mode if:

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

• Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph • The driver opens the door or takes off WARNING (15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if the his/her seat belt Accessories or other objects, such as extra target object is a stationary vehicle or some • DSTC is put in Sport mode (see page 130) other type of object such as e.g., a speed headlights, must not be installed in front of bump. • ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for the grille. more than 2 minutes • Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph Modification of the radar sensor could make (15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so • The engine has been switched off its use illegal. that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to • The brakes have overheated follow. The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles Turning ACC off completely No automatic braking when at a ahead is impeded: • From standby mode, press once. standstill • if the radar sensor is obstructed and can- 04 In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply • From active mode, press twice. not detect other vehicles, for example in the brakes and go into standby mode while the The set speed and time interval are then heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are vehicle is not moving. This means that the cleared from the system's memory and cannot obscuring the radar sensor. driver will have to apply the brakes. be resumed by pressing . This happens if: NOTE The driver presses the brake pedal The radar sensor and its limitations Keep the area in front of the radar sensor • clean. • The parking brake is activated In addition to being used by ACC, the radar • The gear selected is moved to P,N or R sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see page 148) and Collision Warning with Full • if the speed of vehicles ahead is significantly different from your own speed. • The driver presses the button to put Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection (see ACC in standby mode page 157). This sensor is designed to detect The parking brake is applied cars or larger vehicles driving in the same automatically direction as your vehicle, in the same lane. In certain situations, ACC will apply the parking brake in order to continue keeping the vehicle at a standstill. This happens if:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Situations where ACC may not function In curves, the radar sensor may detect the optimally wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehicle. WARNING WARNING • The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may detect • Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover a vehicle later than expected or not all driving situations and traffic, weather detect other vehicles at all. and road conditions. The "Function" section provides information about lim- If ACC is not functioning properly, • itations that the driver must be aware of cruise control will also be disabled. 04 before using this feature. • This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead.

Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink) • Maintenance of ACC components may only be performed by a trained and In certain situations, the radar sensor can- qualified Volvo technician. not detect vehicles at close quarters, for example a vehicle that suddenly enters the lane between your vehicle and the target vehicle. Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the center of the lane may remain undetected.

144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING Fault tracing and actions If the message Radar blocked See manual is Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli- • displayed, this means that the radar signals sion avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the from the sensor have been obstructed and that brakes if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead cannot be detected. another vehicle. This, in turn, means that the functions of the • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning to people or animals, or small vehicles System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian such as bicycles and motorcycles. It Detection will not function. also does not react to slow moving, The table lists possible causes for this mes- parked or approaching vehicles, or sta- 04 sage being displayed, and suitable actions. tionary objects. • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in demanding driving conditions such as city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

Cause Action The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Cause Action Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the radar signals. the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description 04 - Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected.

- Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed/distance.

- Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

- Turn on DSTC to enable ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC is in Sport mode. Switch DSTC to Cruise normal operating mode, see page 130 for more information. ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC's Spin control is switched off. See page 130 for more information.

- Cruise control Cancelled ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver must regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the vehicle ahead.

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Symbol Message Description - Cruise control Unavailable ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to: • high brake temperature • the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.) Radar blocked See manual ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. See page 143 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

04 Cruise control Service ACC is not functioning. required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Press Brake To hold + an The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep audible signal the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll. The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

– Below 20 mph Only follow- This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle ing ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147 04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

Introduction NOTE Depending on the optional equipment Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- selected, there may not be room for a Distance Distance Alert only monitors distance to the trol and is a function that provides information Alert button in the center console. In this case, vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control the function is controlled through the menu about the time interval to the vehicle ahead. is in standby mode or off. system. Press MY CAR and go to Settings Distance Alert is active at speeds above Car settings Distance alert On/Off. approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time interval WARNING information is only given for a vehicle that is Setting a time interval driving ahead of your vehicle in the same direc- Distance Alert only indicates the distance to tion. No information is provided for vehicles the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a speed of your vehicle. 04 standstill. Operation

Controls and display Time interval: Increase/decrease Time interval: On, while it is being set Amber warning light1. Time interval: On, after it has been set An amber warning light in the windshield glows Press the button in the center instrument panel Press to increase the interval or to steadily if your vehicle is closer to the one to switch this function on or off. The indicator decrease it. ahead than the set time interval. light in the button illuminates when the function is on.

1 The illustration is schematic - certain details may vary from model to model

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

Five different time intervals WARNING WARNING can be selected and are shown in the display as 1–5 Only use a time interval that is suitable in • Bad weather or winding roads may horizontal bars. The greater current traffic conditions. affect the radar sensor’s capacity to the number of bars, the longer detect vehicles ahead. The size of the vehicle ahead, such as a the time interval. One bar rep- Limitations • resents approximately motorcycle, may also make it difficult to 1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor detect. This may result in the warning approximately 2.5 seconds. used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col- light illuminating at a shorter distance lision Warning system. See page 143 for more than the one that has been set, or that The number of bars indicating information on the radar sensor’s limitations. the light will not come on at all. the selected time interval are 04 shown while the setting is NOTE being made and for several seconds afterward. A smaller Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light version of the symbol is then contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may shown to the right in the dis- make the visual warning signal in the wind- play. The same symbol is displayed when shield difficult to see. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is activated.

NOTE • The higher your vehicle’s speed, the greater the distance to the vehicle ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a given time interval. • The set time interval is also used by Adaptive Cruise Control, see page 139.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149 04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description - Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

Radar blocked See manual Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. See page 143 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

04 Collision warn. Service Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning required properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

City Safety™

Introduction means that the system cannot help the driver WARNING City Safety™1 is a support system designed to in all situations. • City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles help the driver avoid low speed collisions when City Safety™ should not be used to alter the traveling in the same direction as your driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic. way in which the driver operates the vehicle. vehicle and does not react to small vehi- City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s The driver should never rely solely on this sys- cles, bicycles or motorcycles or to peo- speed is below approximately 2 mph (4 km/h). tem to safely stop the vehicle. ple or animals. This means that City Safety™ will not react if Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not • City Safety™ is not activated when your your vehicle approaches another vehicle at be aware of City Safety™ except when the vehicle is backing up. very low speed, for example, when parking. system intervenes when a low-speed collision • City Safety™ functions at speeds up to The function is active at speeds up to approx- is imminent. 30 mph (50 km/h). This system can help 04 imately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists the driver If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional prevent a collision if the difference in by applying the brakes automatically, thereby Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and speed between your vehicle and the avoiding or helping to reduce the effects of a Pedestrian Detection system, the two systems vehicle ahead is less than 9 mph (15 km/h). If the difference in speed is collision. interact. For more information about the Colli- greater, a collision cannot be avoided sion Warning with Auto-brake system, see City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late but the speed at which the collision page 157. as possible to help avoid unnecessary activa- occurs can be reduced. The driver must tion. apply the vehicle’s brakes for full brak- WARNING City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if a ing effect. low-speed collision is imminent. However, the • City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to • City Safety™ will not intervene in a system will not intervene in situations where the driver. It can never replace the potential collision situation if the vehicle the driver actively steers the vehicle or applies driver’s attention to traffic conditions or is being driven actively. The driver is the brakes, even if a collision cannot be avoi- his/her responsibility for operating the always responsible for maintaining a ded. This is done in order to always give the vehicle in a safe manner. safe distance to a vehicle or object driver’s actions highest priority. • City Safety™ does not function in all ahead. driving situations or in all traffic, weather City Safety™ activates in situations where the or road conditions. driver has not applied the brakes in time, which

1 City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

151 04 Driver support

City Safety™

Function tion display to indicate that the system is/has Press My Car in the center console control been active. panel and go to Settings Car settings Driver support systems City Safety. NOTE Select Off. • When City Safety™ applies the brakes, If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will the brake lights will illuminate. reactivate when the engine is restarted. • In cases where City Safety™ has stopped the vehicle, the system will then WARNING release the brakes. The driver must apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at The laser sensor emits light when the igni- 04 a standstill. tion is in mode II or higher, even if City Safety™ has been switched off.

Location of the laser sensor in the windshield2 Using City Safety™ To switch City Safety™ on again: City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you • Follow the same procedure as for switch- using a laser sensor mounted in the upper sec- NOTE ing City Safety™ off but select On. tion of the windshield. If a collision is imminent, The City Safety™ function is activated auto- City Safety™ will automatically apply the matically each time the engine has been Limitations brakes, which may feel like hard braking. switched off and restarted. The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed If the difference in speed between your vehicle to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles and the vehicle ahead is more than approxi- On and Off ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and dark- mately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™ alone In certain situations, it may be desirable to ness. cannot prevent a collision from taking place. switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving The driver must apply the brakes to help avoid in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc. a collision or reduce its effect. may obscure the hood and windshield. When the function activates and applies the When the engine is running, City Safety™ can brakes, a message will appear in the informa- be switched off as follows:

2 The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model

152 04 Driver support

City Safety™

WARNING NOTE Cause Action The laser sensor has certain limitations and • Keep the windshield in front of the laser The area of the Clean the wind- its function may be reduced (or it may not sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. See windshield in front of shield or remove the function at all) in conditions such as heavy page 152. rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or thick, the sensor is dirty or ice/snow. blowing dust or snow. Condensation, dirt, • Snow or ice on the hood deeper than covered by ice or ice or snow on the windshield may also 2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen- snow. interfere with the sensor’s function. sor. Keep the hood free of ice and snow. • Do not mount or in any way attach any- The laser sensor's Remove the field of view is obstruction. Objects such as warning flags hanging from thing on the windshield that could obstruct the laser sensor. obstructed. long objects on the roof or accessories such as 04 auxiliary lights or protective arches on the front of the vehicle that are higher than the hood may also impede the sensor’s function. Troubleshooting If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increa- the information display, this indicates that the ses on slippery road surfaces, which may City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a colli- some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead of sion. In situations like this, the DSTC system you, which means that the system is not func- (see page 130) will help provide the best pos- tioning. sible braking capacity and stability. However, this message will not be displayed in City Safety™ emits a laser beam and measures all situations in which the sensor is obstructed. the way in which the light is reflected. There- For this reason, the driver must ensure that the fore, vehicles or objects with low-reflective sur- area of the windshield in front of the sensor is faces may not be detected. Normally, the always kept clean. license plate and taillight reflectors give the rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient reflec- The following table shows some of the situa- tive surfaces to be detected. tions that can cause the message to be displayed and suggested actions.

153 04 Driver support

City Safety™

CAUTION The laser sensor Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ

If a crack, scratch or stone chip should Maximum average output 45 mW occur in the section of the windshield in front the laser sensor, contact a trained and Pulse length 33 ns qualified Volvo service technician to repair or replace the windshield (see the illustra- Divergence (horizontal × verti- 28° × 12° tion showing the location of the sensor on cal) page 152). Failing to do so may result in reduced City Safety™ functionality. To help prevent reduced functionality, NOTE please also observe the following: 04 The function of aftermarket laser detectors • Before the windshield is replaced, con- may be affected by City Safety's laser sen- tact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the sor. correct windshield is ordered and The upper decal describes the laser beam's installed. If the wrong type of windshield classification and contains the following text: WARNING is used, this may cause City Safety™ to function improperly or not at all. Volvo Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly The laser sensor emits light when the igni- recommends the use of only Genuine with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class tion is in mode II or higher, even if City Volvo Replacement Windshields. 1M laser product. Safety™ has been switched off. • When replacing windshield wipers, use The lower decal describes the laser beam's the same type or ones approved by physical data and contains the text: Volvo. IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001 The laser beam's physical data is listed in the following table:

154 04 Driver support

City Safety™

WARNING Symbols and messages in the display When City Safety™ automatically applies the Eye injury may occur if any of the following points are not followed: brakes, one or more of the symbols in the main instrument panel may illuminate and its asso- • It is essential that all pertinent instruc- ciated message will be displayed. tions be followed when handling laser instruments. Testing, repairing, remov- A text message can be erased by pressing ing, adjusting and/or replacing any briefly on the OK button on the turn signal components in the laser sensor may lever. only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Do not remove the laser sensor (includ- 04 ing removal of the lenses). A laser sensor that has been removed belongs to laser class 3B according to standard IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser class 3B present a risk of injury to the eyes. • The laser sensor’s connector must be disconnected before the sensor is removed from the windshield. • The laser sensor must be mounted in place on the windshield before connecting the sensor’s connector. • Do not view the laser sensor (which emits spreading, invisible laser beams) with optical instruments from a distance of less than 4 inches (100 mm).

155 04 Driver support

City Safety™

Symbol Message Meaning/action required Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.

Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction. blocked • Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s). 04 For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see page 152.

City Safety Service required City Safety™ is not functioning. • If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

156 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Introduction The system should not be used in such a way WARNING Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and that the driver changes his/her way of operat- Collision Warning does not work in all Pedestrian Detection is designed to assist the ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on the • driving, traffic, weather and road condi- driver if there is a risk of a collision with a system, the chances of an accident eventually occurring increase considerably. tions. It does not react to vehicles not pedestrian, a vehicle ahead that is at a stand- traveling in the same direction as your still or one that is moving in the same direction The Collision Warning and City Safety™ sys- vehicle. as your vehicle. tems supplement each other. See page 151 for • Collision Warning does not react to ani- Collision Warning consists of the following detailed information about City Safety™. mals. three functions: Warnings are only provided when the WARNING • Collision Warning warns the driver of a risk of collision is high. The "Function" • 04 potential collision situation. No automatic system can be guaranteed to section provides information about lim- function 100% correctly in all situations. For • Brake Support helps the driver brake effi- itations that the driver must be aware of that reason, never test the Auto-brake sys- before using Collision Warning. ciently in a critical situation. tem by driving toward a person or object. Collision Warning will not provide a • Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati- This could result in serious injury or death. • cally if a collision with a pedestrian or warning or brake the vehicle for pedes- another vehicle cannot be avoided and the trians at speeds above 50 mph driver does not apply the brakes in time or (80 km/h). steer around the person/vehicle. Auto- brake can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at which a collision occurs. Since Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is activated in circumstances where the driver should have begun braking much sooner, the system will not be able to assist the driver in all situations. This system is designed to activate as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary interven- tion.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

WARNING Function Brake Support If the risk of collision continues to increase after • Collision Warning will not provide a the collision warning has been given, Brake warning or brake the vehicle for pedes- Support is activated. Brake Support prepares trians in darkness or in tunnels, even if the brake system to react quickly, and the there is street lighting in the area. brakes are applied slightly. This may be expe- • The auto-brake function can help pre- rienced as a light tug. vent a collision or reduce the speed at impact but the driver should always If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking apply the brakes for the best possible effect will be provided. Brake Support also braking effect, even if auto-brake is increases brake force if the system determines 04 actively applying the brakes. that the driver has not applied adequate pressure on the brake pedal. • Never wait for a collision warning. This system is designed to be a supplemen- Function overview Auto-brake tary driving aid. It is not, however, If a collision is imminent and the driver has not intended to replace the driver's atten- Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk applied the brakes or begun to steer around the tion and judgement. The driver is Radar sensor vehicle or pedestrian, the auto-brake function responsible for maintaining a safe dis- is activated without the driver pressing the tance and speed, even when the colli- Camera sion warning system is in use. brake pedal. Full brake force is applied to help reduce the vehicle’s speed when the collision • Maintenance of the Collision Warning Collision Warning occurs or limited brake force is applied if this system's components must only be The radar sensor and the camera work is sufficient to avoid the collision. performed by a trained and qualified together to detect a pedestrian, stationary Volvo technician. vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the same direction as your vehicle. If there is a risk NOTE of collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian, the The auto-brake and brake support functions driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light are always on and cannot be turned off. and an audible warning signal. Collision warning is active at speeds above 3 mph (4 km/h).

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Operation console control panel and going to Settings NOTE Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on the Car settings Driver support systems When Adaptive Cruise Control is used, center console control panel and using the • Warning sound if risk of collision. the warning light and signal will be used menus displayed. by that function, even if the warnings Setting a warning distance Activating/deactivating both warning provided by Collision Warning have This setting determines the distance at which been deactivated by the driver. signals the visual and audible warnings are triggered. To switch Collision Warning's audible and vis- Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing MY • In situations where traffic is moving at ual signals on or off at the same time, press CAR on the center console control panel and considerably different speeds, or if the MY CAR on the center console control panel vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn- going to Settings Car settings Driver ings may be considered to be late, even and go to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Collision Warning if the setting Long has been selected. 04 support systems Collision Warning. If Warning distance. Collision Warning is on, the system will perform The warning distance determines the level of a self-test each time the engine is started by Checking settings sensitivity used by the system. The warning briefly illuminating the warning light. See page The current Collision Warning settings can be distance Long provides an earlier warning. 189 for a description of the menu system. checked by pressing MY CAR on the center Begin by using Long and if the system gives console control panel and going to Settings When the engine is switched on, the Collision too many warnings, try changing to Normal. Car settings Driver support systems Warning setting that was being used when it Collision Warning. was switched off will be the default setting. WARNING NOTE • The setting Short should only be used Limitations in situations where traffic is light and Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con- The auto-brake and pedestrian detection moving at low speeds. features are always on, even if the audible trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is and visual warning signals have been deac- • Collision Warning alerts the driver to the not looking straight ahead may make the visual tivated. risk of a collision but this function can- warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. not reduce the driver’s reaction time. For this reason, always activate the audible For Collision Warning to be as effective Activating/deactivating the audible • warning signal. as possible, it is recommended that Dis- Slippery driving conditions increase braking warning signal only tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see distance, which can reduce the system's The audible warning signal can be activated/ page 148. deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the center

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

capacity to avoid a collision. In these condi- WARNING NOTE tions, the ABS and DSTC systems provide the best possible braking effect while helping to • In certain situations, the system cannot If warnings are given too frequently, the maintain stability. provide warnings or warnings may be warning distance can be reduced (see delayed if traffic conditions or other page 159). This causes the system to pro- external factors make it impossible for vide later warnings, which decreases the NOTE the radar sensor or camera to detect a total number of warnings provided. The visual warning signal may be temporar- pedestrian or a vehicle ahead. ily disengaged in the event of high passen- • Warnings may not be provided if the WARNING ger compartment temperature due to strong distance to the vehicle ahead is short, sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible or if movements of the steering wheel/ • The system is not activated at speeds warning signal will be used, even if it has under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). There- 04 been deactivated in the menu system. brake pedal are great, such as during active driving. fore, it will not brake your vehicle if you approach a vehicle ahead at very low • The sensor system has a limited range speed, such as when parking. for pedestrians and provides warnings and braking effect most effectively at • The driver's actions always have high- speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For sta- est priority and override the Collision tionary or slow-moving vehicles, the Warning system. This means that the system functions best if your vehicle’s system will not intervene in situations speed is below approximately 45 mph where the driver is actively steering, (70 km/h). braking or pressing the accelerator pedal, even if a collision is imminent. • Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles may not be provided in dark • When Auto-brake has prevented a col- conditions or in poor visibility. lision with a stationary object, your vehicle will remain at a standstill for approx. 1.5 seconds. If your vehicle has been The Collision Warning system uses the same braked for a moving vehicle ahead, your radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For vehicle's speed will be reduced to the more information on the radar sensor and its same speed as that vehicle's. limitations, see page 143.

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

The camera’s limitations WARNING Pedestrians The camera is used by Collision Warning with Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see • The camera has the same limitations as page 165), and Lane Departure Warning (see the human eye. In other words, its “vision is impaired” by adverse weather page 168). conditions such as heavy snowfall, dense fog, etc. These conditions may NOTE reduce the function of systems that • To help protect the camera in very hot depend on the camera or cause these conditions, it may be temporarily systems to temporarily stop function- switched off for approximately 15 ing. minutes after the engine has been • Never place any objects, decals, etc., 04 started. on the windshield in front of the camera. This could reduce or block the camera’s • Keep the section of the windshield in The system cannot identify all pedestrians front of the camera clean and free of ice, function, and could cause one or more snow, or condensation. of the systems that utilize the camera to The Collision Warning system can only identify stop functioning. and detect a pedestrian who is standing • Strong sunlight, reflections from the upright. This person can be standing still, walk- road surface, ice or snow covering the ing or running. road, a dirty road surface, or unclear This means that the system has to be able to lane marker lines may drastically reduce identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the camera’s capacity to detect the side the upper and lower parts of the body and a of a lane, a pedestrian or another vehi- person's pattern of movement when walking or cle. running. If parts of the body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the pedestrian. The following conditions apply: • In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full view of the person's entire

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

body and the person must be at least Fault tracing and actions 32 in. (80 cm) tall. If the message Windscreen Sensors • The system cannot detect a pedestrian blocked is displayed, this means that the cam- carrying a large object. era is obscured and cannot detect pedestrians, • The camera's capacity to see a pedestrian vehicles or road marker lines in front of the at dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for vehicle. the human eye. This, in turn, means that Collision Warning with • The camera's function is deactivated and Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection, will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or Lane Departure Warning, and Driver Alert Con- in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in trol will not have full functionality. 04 the area. The table lists possible causes for this mes- WARNING sage being displayed, and suitable actions. • Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. • The system cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations, such as in darkness/at night and cannot detect partially hidden pedestrians, people who are less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm) tall, or people wearing clothing that obscures the contours of their bodies.

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Cause Action The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera. with ice or snow.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the camera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register display. visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this 04 surface cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description Collision Warning Off Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK button.

Collision Warning Unavail- Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate able the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Auto braking was acti- Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button. vated

Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by blocked snow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see page 161 for more information on the camera’s limitations.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Symbol Message Description Radar blocked See man- Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for ual example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other vehicles, see page 143 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning. required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Introduction Driver Alert Control (DAC)– DAC is designed to help detect a slowly chang- The Driver Alert System is designed to help a introduction ing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be driver who may be becoming fatigued or who used on main roads and is not meant for use in is inadvertently leaving the lane. city traffic.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ- WARNING ent functions that can be switched on together or separately. • DAC is not intended to extend the duration of driving. Always plan breaks at Driver Alert Control (DAC) • regular intervals to help remain alert. Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see • In certain cases, fatigue may not affect page 168 • the driver’s behavior. In situations of 04 When one or both of the functions has been this type, no warning will be provided. switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti- Therefore, it is important to take breaks vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of at regular intervals, regardless of 40 mph (65 km/h). This function is intended to alert the driver if whether or not DAC has given a warning. The function deactivates if the vehicle's speed his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the goes under 37 mph (60 km/h). driver is distracted or fatigued. Limitations Both functions use a camera that is dependent In certain situations, DAC may provide warn- on the road/lane being clearly marked by pain- NOTE ings even if the driver’s driving pattern has not ted lines on each side. The camera has certain limitations, see page 143. become erratic. WARNING • if the driver is testing the LDW function The Driver Alert System does not function in A camera monitors the painted lines marking • in strong crosswinds all situations and is designed to be a sup- the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and • on grooved road surfaces. plementary aid. It is not, however, intended compares the direction of the road with the to replace the driver’s attention and judge- driver’s movements of the steering wheel. The ment. driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the lane smoothly.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Operating DAC Thumb wheel. Turn this wheel until Driver If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the Certain settings can be made from the menu Alert is displayed. The second line shows driver will be alerted by an audible signal and system controlled from the center instrument the alternatives Off Driver Alert Standby the message Driver Alert, Time for a break is panel. <40 mph (Driver Alert Standby <65 km/ displayed. The warning will be repeated after a h), Unavailable or the level ( number of short time if the driving pattern remains the The current system status can be checked on bars) will be displayed. same. the trip computer’s display by using the buttons on the left steering wheel lever. OK button. Confirms and erases a message in the display. WARNING • An alert should be taken seriously since Activating DAC it is sometimes difficult for a driver to 04 Press MY CAR in the center instrument panel realize that he/she is fatigued. and go to Car settings Driver Alert and • In the event of a warning or if the driver select On. See page 189 for more information feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible on the menu system. in a safe place and rest. The function is activated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h). The display will show level markings of 1–5 bars, where a low number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description - Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.

- Driver Alert Standby <40 The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h). mph (Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h)

- Driver Alert Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines.

Driver Alert The function is analyzing the driver’s driving pattern. The number of bars varies from 1–5, where a low 04 number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message. break

Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area blocked of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 161 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message required remains in the display.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)– Operation and function and Driver Alert Standby <40 mph will be introduction displayed. If the camera can no longer monitor the road’s side marker lines, Lane Depart Warn Unavailable will be displayed. If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane’s left or right side marker lines, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal. No warning signal will be given in the follow- 04 ing situations: • The turn signal is being used • The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1 LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the The throttle pedal is pressed quickly1 This function is designed to help reduce the button on the center console. A light in the but- • risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle ton illuminates when the function is on. • If the steering wheel is moved quickly1 leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off The trip computer display shows Lane Depart • In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s the road or into the opposite lane. LDW con- Warn Standby <40 mph (Lane Depart Warn body to sway sists of a camera that monitors the lane’s side Standby <65 km/h) when the function is in See page 161 for information on the camera’s marker lines. The driver is alerted by an audible standby mode. limitations. signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line or the road’s center dividing line. When LDW is in standby mode, the function is activated automatically after the camera has WARNING monitored the road’s side marker lines and the The driver will only be warned once for each vehicle’s speed exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h). time the wheels cross a marker line. No Lane Depart Warn Unavailable will be dis- alarm will be given if a marker line is played. between the wheels. If the vehicle’s speed falls below 37 mph (60 km/h), LDW will return to standby mode

1 When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Settings the system will be in the mode that it was in Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be when the engine was switched off. made in the menu system by pressing My Increased sensitivity: This selection increa- Car. Go to Settings Car settings Driver ses the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be support systems Lane Departure given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations Warning. apply. When this setting is being used, the system only needs to monitor lane marker lines on There are two alternatives: one side of the vehicle to change status to On at start-up: This selection switches LDW Lane Depart Warn Available. on each time the engine is started. Otherwise, 04

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description Lane departure warning ON/Lane The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds. departure warning OFF

- Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

- Lane Depart Warn Standby <40 The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph mph (Lane Depart Warn Standby (65 km/h). <65 km/h)

- Lane Depart Warn Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Symbol Message Description Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 161 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service required The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Park assist*

Introduction Function Activating/deactivating The park assist system is designed to assist The system is activated automatically when the you when driving into parking spaces, garages, vehicle is started. etc. It utilizes ultrasound sensors in the front – Press the Park assist button on the center bumper and rear bumper(s) to measure the dis- console to temporarily deactivate the sys- tance to a vehicle or an object that may be tem(s). close to the front or rear of your vehicle. An > The indicator light in the button will go audible signal and symbols in the audio sys- out when the system has been deacti- tem’s display indicate the distance to the vated. object. Park assist will be automatically reactivated the 04 NOTE next time the engine is started, or if the button is pressed (the indicator light in the button will A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated illuminate). with the vehicle's electrical system will be Park assist button included in the measurement of the availa- The system is activated automatically when the ble space behind the vehicle. vehicle is started. The indicator light in the but- NOTE ton in the center console illuminates when the Park assist is disengaged automatically WARNING system is on. when the parking brake is applied. Park Assist is an information system, NOT a • The front park assist system is active from safety system. This system is designed to the time the engine is started until the vehi- be a supplementary aid when parking the cle exceeds a speed of approximately vehicle. It is not, however, intended to 10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the replace the driver's attention and judge- vehicle is backing up. ment. • Rear park assist is active when the engine is running and reverse gear has been selected.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171 04 Driver support

Park assist*

Signals from the park assist system Audible signal Rear park assist The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come close to an object, and becomes constant when you are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object in front of or behind the vehicle. If there are objects within this distance both behind and in front of the vehicle, the tone alternates between front and rear speakers.

04 NOTE The level of the audible signal can be lowered/raised with the infotainment volume View in the display (warning for objects front left/ control. The level can also be set in the MY The distance monitored behind the vehicle is right rear) CAR menu system. See page 189 for a approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal description of the menu system. Visual indicator comes from the rear speakers. The audio system’s display gives an overview If the volume of another source from the audio The system must be deactivated when towing of the vehicle’s position in relation to a a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted detected object. system is high, this will be automatically lowered. carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park The marked sectors in the display indicate that assist system's sensors. one or more of the sensors has detected an object. The closer the car symbol comes to a NOTE sector, the closer the vehicle is to the object. Rear park assist is deactivated automati- If the infotainment system is switched off, the cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine park assist system will not be able to provide a trailer wiring is used. visual indicator. An audible signal will still be provided.

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Park assist*

Front park assist Faults in the system Cleaning the sensors If the information symbol illuminates and Park assist syst Service required is shown on the information display, this indicates that the system is not functioning properly and has been disengaged. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

CAUTION In certain circumstances, the park assist system may give unexpected warning sig- 04 nals that can be caused by external sound sources that use the same ultrasound fre- The distance monitored in front of the vehicle quencies as the system. This may include Location of the front sensors is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig- such things as the horns of other vehicles, wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, nal comes from the audio system's front motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does speakers. not indicate a fault in the system. It may not be possible to combine auxiliary headlights and front park assist since these lights could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE Front park assist is deactivated when the parking brake is applied and or when the gear selector is in the P position. Location of the rear sensors The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173 04 Driver support

Park assist*

with water and a suitable car washing detergent. Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

NOTE If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system.

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

Introduction Function Ambient lighting conditions The Park Assist Camera uses the display in the The camera automatically monitors the ambi- center console to show the area behind the car ent lighting conditions behind the vehicle and while you are backing up. constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may cause the brightness and quality of the image PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-screen on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitivity to light image to indicate the direction that the vehicle is increased in dark conditions or in bad will take as it moves rearward, which helps weather, which may affect image quality. simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle. If the image on the screen seems too dark, brightness can be increased with the thumb NOTE wheel on the lighting panel. 04 A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated NOTE with the vehicle's electrical system will be included in the measurement of the availa- The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and In order to function properly, the camera ble space behind the vehicle. if a person or animal should suddenly appear lens should always be kept clean. This is from the side. particularly important in bad weather. Keep the lens free of dirt, ice or snow. WARNING PAC is mounted on the rear of the trunk lid, near the opening handle. • PAC is designed to be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, The camera has built-in electronics that help however, intended to replace the reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image driver’s attention and judgment. shown on the screen is as natural as possible. • The camera has blind spots where it This may cause some objects on the screen to cannot detect objects or people behind “lean,” which is normal. the vehicle. WARNING • Pay particular attention to people or animals that are close to the vehicle. Objects seen on the screen may be closer than they appear to be.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

Using PAC With the camera zoomed in on the trailer hitch, Guiding lines a guiding line showing the hitch's path toward Activation the trailer will be projected. This feature can be activated in the MY CAR menu. See page 189 for a description of the menu system. The guiding lines for the wheels (see the following section "Guiding lines") and for the trailer hitch cannot be displayed at the same time. If the camera shows an enlarged (zoomed) image, turn TUNE counterclockwise, or press 04 EXIT, CAM or OK to return to a normal view. Deactivation Move the gear selector from R to another posi- The lines on the screen are projected as if they tion. There is a slight delay in the PAC system, were a path on the ground behind the vehicle which means that the view from behind the PAC is activated when the gear selector is and are affected by the way in which the steer- vehicle will remain on the screen for approxi- moved to R if the system is selected in the MY ing wheel is turned. This enables the driver to mately 15 seconds after the gear selector has CAR menu system or by pressing the CAM see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she been moved from the R position or until the button in the center console. See page 189 for turns the steering wheel while backing up. a description of the menu system. vehicle reaches a forward speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). The screen will then revert to the If the Volvo Navigation System (VNS) is in use, mode that it was in before R was selected and NOTE PAC will automatically override the navigation will, for example, display navigation system When backing up with a trailer, the guiding system to show the camera's image on the information. lines show the path that the vehicle will screen instead of navigation information, for as take, not the trailer. long as reverse gear is selected. NOTE Zoom If any button on the center console control The camera can be useful when attaching a panel is pressed, the camera image will dis- trailer. Press CAM to zoom in on the trailer appear from the display. Pressing CAM will hitch (and press this button again to return to return the camera image to the display. the normal camera view).

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

WARNING The dashed line (2) indicates the clear zone of The markers change color (from yellow to approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the orange to red) as the vehicle comes closer to Keep in mind that the image on the screen bumper. These lines also indicate the outmost the object. only shows the area behind the vehicle. The limits that any object (door mirrors, corners of driver must always watch for people, animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides of the body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle , Marker (color) Distance to the vehicle when turning while backing up. even when the it turns. object The "wheel tracks" (3) between the side marker Yellow more than 5 ft (1.5 m) Marker lines lines show where the wheels will roll and can extend up to approximately 10.5 ft (3.2 m) Orange 5–1 ft (0.3–1.5 m) behind the bumper if there are no objects in the way. Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m) 04

Vehicles equipped with Park Assist Settings Press OK/MENU when a normal camera view is displayed and make the desired settings. Parking camera settings • Mark Guide lines to display the sidelines while backing up. • Mark Distance bars to display the inter- secting lines while backing up. The PAC system's lines Activating the system Marker line for a 1-foot (30-centimeter) Mark Automatic activation of rear zone behind the vehicle • camera to activate PAC each time reverse Marker line for the clear back-up zone gear is selected. Colored fields (4-one per sensor) indicate distance "Wheel tracks" • Mark Off to turn off PAC completely. If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park The solid line (1) indicates a zone within 1 ft Assist system, the distance to an object will be Summary (30 centimeters) of the rear bumper. indicated more exactly and colored markers in • The camera is activated when the gear the display indicate which of the sensor(s) has selector is moved to R (this can be detected the object. changed in the MY CAR menu) and the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

image is shown on the center console dis- R. This setting can be changed in the in MY play. CAR menu. • When backing up, two solid lines are pro- • If there are two cameras installed on the jected on the screen to show the path that vehicle*, to switch between cameras, turn the vehicle's rear wheels will take. These TUNE (at least one of the cameras has to lines are affected by movements of the be active), press CAM repeatedly or use steering wheel. The vehicle's approximate the center console controls. If the front outer dimension are shown by two dashed camera is on, it overrides the optional park lines. assist system's visual indicator but there • The graphic lines will not be displayed will still be an audible signal. when backing up with a trailer that is con- 04 nected to the vehicle's electrical system. Limitations • Objects on the ground that are closer than Even if a fairly small section of the screen image 1 ft (30 centimeters) cannot be detected by appears to be obstructed, this may mean that the camera. a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hid- • The camera is active for approx. den and objects there may not be detected 5 seconds after the gear selector is moved until they are very near the vehicle. to R or until the vehicle's speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). NOTE • The optional Park Assist sensors and the Bicycle carriers or other accessories moun- parking camera work together and infor- ted on the trunk may obstruct the camera's mation from the sensors is shown graphi- field of view. cally on the display. • The graphic lines shown on the screen Keep in mind when the vehicle backs up can be disabled Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and in the settings menu. • snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to • Manual zoom can be selected in the MY avoid scratching the lens. CAR menu. • Clean the lens regularly with warm water • The system can be switched off by press- and a suitable car washing detergent. ing CAM. By default, the system is activated when the gear selector is moved to

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

Introduction WARNING NOTE • BLIS is an information system, NOT a The door panel indicator light illuminates on warning or safety system. the side of the vehicle where the system has detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is • BLIS does not eliminate the need for passed on both sides at the same time, both you to visually confirm the conditions lights will illuminate. around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes. BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the driver if a fault should occur with the system. As the driver, you have full responsibility • For example, if one or both of the system's for changing lanes in a safe manner. cameras are obscured, a message (see the 04

G021426 table on page 181) will appear in the informa- The system is based on digital camera tech- tion display in the instrument panel. If this BLIS camera nology. The cameras are located beneath the occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary, side-view mirrors. the system can be temporarily switched off (for Indicator light When one (or both) of the cameras have instructions, see page 181). BLIS symbol detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft. information system that indicates the presence (9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see of another vehicle moving in the same direction the illustration, the indicator light in the door as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind panel illuminates. The light will glow continu- area." ously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the blind area. CAUTION The BLIS system should only be repaired by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

When does BLIS function Darkness NOTE The system functions when your vehicle is BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa- moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). sionally even when there are no other vehi- vehicle in the blind area must have its head- cles in the blind area, this does not indicate When you pass another vehicle: lights on. This means, for example, that the a fault in the system. The system reacts when you pass another system will not detect a trailer without head- vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h) lights that is being towed behind a car or truck. In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst. faster than that vehicle. Service required will be displayed. When you are passed by another vehicle: WARNING The following are several examples of situa- The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by • BLIS does not react to cyclists or tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph 04 mopeds. illuminate even when there are no other vehi- (70 km/h) faster than your vehicle. • BLIS does not react to vehicles that are cles in the area monitored by the system. standing still. WARNING • The BLIS cameras have the same limi- • BLIS does not function in sharp curves. tation as the human eye. In other words, • BLIS does not function when your vehi- their "vision is impaired" by adverse cle is backing up. weather conditions such as heavy snowfall, intense light directly into the If you are towing a wide trailer, this may • camera, dense fog, etc. prevent the BLIS cameras from detect- ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes. Limitations In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s) How BLIS functions in daylight and Light reflected from a wet road surface may illuminate even when there are no other darkness vehicles in the area monitored by the system. Daylight BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to help detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses, motorcycles, etc.

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

CAUTION switched off, and a text message is displayed. Clean the lenses carefully to avoid • BLIS can be switched on again by pressing scratching. • the button. The indicator light in the button • The lenses are electrically heated to will illuminate and a new text message will help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen- be displayed. Press the OK button (see tly brush away snow from the lenses. page 187) to erase the message. Depending on the vehicle's optional equip- Switching BLIS on and off ment, there may not be space for the BLIS but- The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light, ton in the center console. In this case, BLIS can smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on be switched on and off in the menu system by a highway 04 pressing MY CAR and going to Settings Car settings BLIS. See page 189 for a description of the menu system.

BLIS system messages Text in the dis- System status play Blind spot syst. BLIS not functioning Service required properly. Contact an Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low authorized Volvo on the horizon BLIS is automatically activated when the igni- service technician. Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses tion is switched on. The indicator lights will Blind spot syst. BLIS camera In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera provide confirmation by flashing 3 times. Camera blocked obscured. Clean the lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped • The system can be switched off by press- lenses. clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge. ing the BLIS button in the center console (see the illustration). The indicator light in Blind-spot info BLIS system on the button goes out when the system is system ON

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System*

Text in the dis- System status play Blind-spot info BLIS system off system OFF

Blind spot syst. The BLIS cameras' Reduced function function has been reduced due to weak or impaired data transfer 04 between the BLIS system's cameras and the vehicle's electrical system. The cameras will reset themselves when this data transfer has returned to normal.

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

183 Volvo Sensus...... 186 Menus and messages...... 187 The MY CAR menus...... 189 Climate system...... 195 Trip computer...... 203 Active chassis system–Four C*...... 205 Passenger compartment convenience...... 206

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Volvo Sensus

Introduction as well as other options such as the park assist camera(s), etc. Volvo Sensus uses the screen in the center instrument panel to display information and selections are made using this panel’s controls and buttons. Certain features can also be controlled using the steering wheel keypad. Press MY CAR to present all of the available settings related to driving and/or controlling the vehicle, such as City Safety, setting the clock, lock settings, etc. Press RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, NAV* and CAM* Center console control panel to change a source and to activated systems Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV: or functions such as AM, FM1, CD, DVD, Blue- 05 see the separate VNS manual for operating tooth, navigation* and the park assist camera instructions. *. Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL): see See the respective sections in this manual for page 212 . more detailed information about your vehicle's various features and functions. Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR: see page 189. Park assist camera - CAM*: see page 175. Climate system: see page 195.

Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your vehicle providing a coordinated interface for a number of functions such as the individualized settings that can be made in the MY CAR menus, the climate and infotainment systems

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Main instrument panel Average Press OK to acknowledge and scroll among the messages. Instantaneous Average speed NOTE Current speed in mph (Canadian models If a warning message appears while you are only) using the trip computer, the message must Engine oil level* be read and confirmed by pressing OK before the previous activity can be Calibrate tire pressure* resumed.

Messages Message Description Stop engineA Stop and switch off Information display and menu controls the engine as soon OK – access to the list of messages and as possible. Serious 05 message confirmation. risk of damage. Thumb wheel – browse among menus and Contact an author- options in the list of functions. ized Volvo workshop. RESET – reset the active function. Used in certain cases to select/activate a function, Stop safelyA Stop and switch off see the explanation under each respective the engine. Serious function. risk of damage. The menus shown on the information displays Contact an author- in the instrument panel are controlled with the ized Volvo work- When a warning, information or indicator sym- left lever. The menus shown depend on ignition shop. bol comes on, a corresponding message mode. Press OK to erase a message and return appears on the information display. An error to the menus. message is stored in a memory list until the Menu overview fault is rectified. Driving distance on current fuel reserve

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Message Description Message Description

Service urgentA Have the vehicle Maintenance over- If the service inter- checked by an due vals are not fol- authorized Volvo lowed, the warranty workshop immedi- does not cover any ately. damaged parts. Contact an author- A Service required Have the vehicle ized Volvo workshop checked by an for service. authorized Volvo workshop as soon Temporarily OFFA A function has been as possible. temporarily switched off and is A See manual Read the owner's reset automatically manual. 05 while driving or after Book time for Time to book service starting again. maintenance at an authorized Low battery Power The audio system is Volvo retailer. save mode switched off to save Time for regular Time for regular current. Charge the battery. maintenance service at an authorized Volvo work- A There will also be a system-specific part of this message shop. The timing is determined by the number of miles driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time.

188 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Introduction Operation • Reject and incoming phone call The menu system provides access to • The current function will be cancelled Center console controls menus for operating many of the vehi- • Characters that have been entered will be cle's functions, such as setting the erased clock, door mirrors, locks, etc. • The most recent selection will be cancelled Navigating in the menus is done using the but- • Go back (upward) in the menu system tons on the center console control panel or with the right-side steering wheel keypad. A long press will take you to the highest menu level (the main view), giving you access to all of Some of the features mentioned in this section the vehicles/menus. See page 213 for addi- are optional. tional information.

Steering wheel keypad

Center console controls for menu navigation 05 Press MY CAR to access the My Car menus. Press OK/MENU to select a highlighted selection or to store a certain function in the system's memory. Turn to navigate up/down among menu selections. EXIT EXIT functions The keypad varies according to the vehicle's The results of a short press on EXIT vary, equipment depending on where the cursor is and where Turn the thumb wheel to go up/down you are in the menu structure. among menu selections. Press the thumb

189 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

wheel to make a selection or store a func- 6. Use the thumb wheel to move to the My S60 tion in the system's memory. desired choice and press the thumb wheel EXIT. to put an X in the box. 7. Finish by exiting the menu system either Paths one step at a time with short presses on The current menu level is displayed at the EXIT (2) or press and hold this button to upper right of the center console display. Menu return to the main menu. paths are displayed as follows, for example: The OK/MENU (2), EXIT (4) and control (3) in Settings Car settings Lock settings the center console can be used in the same way. Doors unlock Driver door, then all

The following is an example of how to set a MY CAR function in the menu system: When the MY CAR symbol has been selected, MY CAR My S60 the following menu alternatives are displayed. 05 1. Press the MY CAR button on the center The display shows all of the vehicle's driver console control panel. support systems, which can be activated/ deactivated here. 2. Navigate to a menu, for example Settings using the thumb wheel (1) and press it to open a submenu. 3. Navigate to the desired submenu such as Car settings. 4. Navigate to Lock settings and press the thumb wheel to open a new submenu. 5. Navigate to Doors unlock and press the thumb wheel to open a submenu with alternatives that can be selected. • My S60 • Support systems • Settings

190 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Driver support systems Doors unlock See page 53 for more information. All doors Approach light duration Driver door, then all Off Keyless entry 30 sec All doors 60 sec Any door 90 sec Doors on same side See page 55 for more information. Both front doors Home safe light duration Audible confirmation 30 sec See page 53 and 61 for more information. MY CAR Support systems 60 sec Reduced Guard (MY CAR > Support systems) 90 sec 05 Activate once The screen shows the current status (settings) See page 100 for more information. Ask when exiting for the vehicle's driver support systems. See page 71 for more information. Triple indicator Menu settings Side mirror settings See page 98 for more information. The following pages list the main menus/sub- Fold mirrors Daytime running lights menus and possible selections. Tilt left mirror See page 93 for more information. Car key memory Tilt right mirror See pages 88 and 53 for more information. Active bending lights See page 105 for more information. Lock settings See page 96 for more information. Light settings Automatic door locking Tire pressure system Door lock confirmation light Warns if tyre pressure is too low Unlock confirmation light

191 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Calibrate tire pressure Lane Departure Warning MY CAR Settings System options See page 298 for more information. This sys- Lane Departure Warning tem is optional in Canada. On at start-up Set/change time Steering wheel force Increased sensitivity See page 82 for more information. High See page 168 for more information. Time format Medium Road Sign Information 12 h Low On 24 h See page 205 for more information. Off Screen saver Reset car settings Speed alert The contents of the screen are replaced by This feature returns the "Car settings" menu to another image if this selection is marked. The On the original factory settings. contents of the screen will be displayed again Off if one of the buttons (1-4) is pressed, see 05 page 189. MY CAR Settings Driver support DSTC Uncheck the selection to turn the screen saver systems See page 130 for more information. off. City Safety Collision Warning Language See page 151 for more information. Collision Warning Select the language for menu texts. BLIS Warning distance Show help text See page 179 for more information. Long This displays help texts for the current menu. Distance Alert Normal Distance and fuel units See page 148 for more information. Short MPG (UK) Driver Alert Warning sound MPG (US) See page 165 for more information. See page 159 for more information. km/l l/100km

192 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

See page 203 for more information about the Voice command list Voice user setting trip computer. Phone commands Default setting Temperature unit Phone User 1 Celsius Phone call contact User 2 Fahrenheit Phone dial number Two user profiles can be set, which is useful if Select the temperature scale to be displayed more than one person uses voice commands Navigation commands by the climate control unit. regularly. Default setting resets the factory Navigation settings. Volume levels Navigation repeat instruction Voice output volume Voice training Navigation go to address User 1 Front park assist volume General commands User 2 Rear park assist volume Help Voice training enables the system to become Phone ringing volume 05 Cancel familiar with the driver's voice and pronuncia- Reset system options tion. A list of phrases is presented on the Voice tutorial This feature returns the "System options" screen for the driver to read aloud. When the menu to the original factory settings. The menu alternatives under Phone system has registered the driver's pronuncia- commands show examples of the voice com- tion, no additional phrases will be displayed. After completed voice training, select User 1 MY CAR Settings Voice settingsA. mands available when a cell phone is connected to the Bluetooth hands-free system. or User 2 in Voice user setting to set the sys- A Only on vehicles with the optional Volvo Navigation System See page 248 for more detailed information. tem to the current user. and/or a Bluetooth-connected cell phone The menu alternatives under Navigation Voice output volume Voice tutorial commands show examples of the voice com- • A volume control will be displayed. To set Select this menu alternative and press OK for mands available for the optional Volvo the volume level: spoken information about how the system Navigation System. Refer to the navigation 1. Adjust the volume using the thumb wheel system's manual for detailed information. works. 2. Test the setting by pressing OK 3. Store the setting and leave the menu by pressing EXIT.

193 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Voice POI list This feature returns the "Climate settings" menu to the original factory settings. Edit list For more information about the climate sys- The navigation system has a large number of tem, see page 195. points of interest (POIs). A maximum of 30 POIs can be stored in this list. MY CAR Settings Favourites (FAV) The menu alternative Voice POI list is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System. Refer to the See page 217 for more information about this navigation system's manual for detailed infor- feature. mation. MY CAR Settings Information MY CAR Settings Audio settings Number of keys 05 See page 212 for more information about the See page 52 for more information. infotainment system. VIN number

MY CAR Settings Climate settings See page 341 for more information. DivX® VOD code Automatic blower adjustment See page 233 for more information. Normal Bluetooth software version in car High See page 221 for more information. Low Map and software version Recirculation timer Refer to the optional Volvo Navigation System Automatic rear defroster manual for more information. Interior air quality system Reset climate settings

194 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Introduction NOTE mercially available window washing spray will also help prevent fogging or misting. Air conditioning The sunlight sensor monitors which side of The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate the car that is most exposed to sunlight. Vents in the parcel shelf Control (ECC). The climate control system This can mean that the temperature may differ between the right and left-side air cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the pas- vents, even if the temperatures set for both NOTE senger compartment. sides of the passenger compartment are the The air vents at the rear of the parcel shelf same. should never be obstructed. NOTE • The air conditioning can be switched • The temperature sensor for the passenger Temporary shut-off of the air compartment is located below the climate off, but to ensure the best possible cli- conditioning control panel. mate comfort in the passenger com- The air conditioning is momentarily disen- partment and to prevent the windows • The outside (ambient) temperature sensor gaged during full-throttle acceleration or when from misting, it should always be on. is located on the door mirror. driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a In warm weather, a small amount of • • The humidity sensor* is located in the inte- temporary increase in cabin temperature. 05 water may accumulate under the car rior rearview mirror. when it has been parked. This water is Ice and snow condensation from the A/C system and NOTE Always keep the air intake grille at the base of is normal. the windshield free of snow. Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects. Climate system maintenance Sensor location Special tools and equipment are required to The sunlight sensor is located on the top • maintain and carry out repairs on the climate side of the dashboard. Side windows and moonroof To ensure that the air conditioning works opti- system. Work of this type should only be done mally, the side windows, and the optional by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- moonroof should be closed. nician.

Fog on the inside of the windows Refrigerant The defroster function should be used to Volvo cares about the environment. The air remove fog or mist from the inside of the win- conditioning system in your car contains a dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com- CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance will not deplete the ozone layer. The air condi-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

tioning system contains 1.8 lbs (820 g) of NOTE Air distribution R134a. The systems uses PAG oil. Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter Passenger compartment filter replacement intervals. Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at the recommended intervals. Please refer to Materials used in the cabin your Warranty and Service Records Informa- The materials used in the cabin have been tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified developed to help minimize the amount of dust Volvo service technician for these intervals. and make the cabin easier to keep clean. All The filter should be replaced more often when floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning. driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The Use car cleaning products recommended by filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should Volvo. See also the information beginning on always be replaced with a new one. page 333.

NOTE Menu settings The incoming air is distributed from a number The default settings for four of the climate sys- of different vents in the passenger compart- 05 There are different types of cabin air filters. tem's functions can be changed in the menu Ensure that the correct type is installed. ment. system. Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) • Blower speed in automatic mode. mode. A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles • Recirculation timer for passenger com- If desired, air distribution can be controlled in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels partment air. manually, see page 202. of odors and contaminants entering the vehi- • Automatic rear window defrosting. cle. The air quality sensor detects increased • The optional Interior Air Quality System levels of contaminants in the outside air. When (IAQS). the air quality sensor detects contaminated The functions can also be returned to factory outside air, the air intake closes and the air settings in the menu system. inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. The See page 189 for a description of the menu filter also cleans recirculated passenger com- system. partment air.

196 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars

Open Closed Closed Open 05 Horizontal airflow Horizontal airflow Vertical airflow Vertical airflow Direct the outer air vents toward the side win- Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost. dows to defrost. Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature in the rear seat.

197 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Electronic climate control, ECC

05 Temperature control, driver's side Heated front passenger's seat* Heated driver's seat* Temperature control, passenger's side Defroster (maximum effect) Recirculation Blower AUTO Manual air distribution—floor A/C on/off Manual air distribution—dashboard air vents Manual air distribution—defroster Heated rear window and door mirrors, see page 106

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Climate system controls Heated rear seats* Air distribution Heated front seats*

Heat control for the outboard seating positions Manual air distribution—defroster The current seat temperature is shown in the cen- is done in the same way as for the front seats. Manual air distribution—dashboard air 05 ter console display Blower control vents Press the button once for the Turn the control clockwise to Manual air distribution—floor highest heat level – three indi- increase or counterclockwise The figure consists of three buttons. When a cator lights come on. to decrease the blower button is pressed, the corresponding figure will speed. If AUTO is selected, Press the button twice for a appear in the display with an arrow indicating blower speed will be regula- lower heat level – two indica- which manual air flow has been selected (see ted automatically and this will tor lights come on. the following illustration). See also the air dis- override manual adjustment. Press the button three times for the lowest heat tribution chart on page 202. level – one indicator light comes on. NOTE Press the button four times to switch off the heat – no indicator lights come on. If the blower is turned off completely, the air conditioning is disengaged, which may Seat heating will automatically switch off when result in fogging on the windows. the engine is switched off.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

NOTE A/C – ON/OFF When the indicator light in the Selecting the lowest blower speed may button is on, the air condition- increases the risk of fog forming on the windows. ing is controlled automatically. This cools/heats and dehumidifies the incoming air. Temperature control When the indicator light in the The temperatures on the button is off, the air condition- driver and passenger sides ing is disengaged. Other functions are still con- can be set separately. When trolled automatically. When maximum the vehicle is started, the defroster is selected, the air conditioning sys- most recent setting is tem is set for maximum blower speed and Air distribution is shown in the center console dis- resumed. dehumidification. play Defroster Auto NOTE 05 This function defrosts/de-ices The function automatically Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by the windshield and front side regulates cooling, heating, selecting a higher/lower temperature than windows. The indicator light the actual temperature required. blower speed, recirculation, in the defroster button lights and air distribution to main- when the function is active. tain the chosen temperature. If you select one or more manual functions, the other func- • Blower speed increases automatically and tions continue to be controlled automatically. the air conditioning will switch on (if not The air quality sensor is engaged and all man- already on and if the passenger compart- ual settings are switched off when AUTO is ment blower is not turned off) to dehumid- pressed. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE. ify the air in the passenger compartment. Air conditioning can be switched off by Blower speed in automatic mode can be set pressing the AC button. under Climate settings Automatic blower • Recirculation will not function while defrost adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal is engaged. or High.

200 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

The climate system will return to its previous is selected by automatically switching off the enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recir- settings when the defroster function is function after a certain length of time, depend- culated passenger compartment air. When the switched off. ing on the ambient temperature. Activate/ AUTO button is depressed the air quality sen- deactivate the function under Climate sor is always engaged. Recirculation/air quality system settings Recirculation timer. See page Activate or deactivate this function in Climate Recirculation 189 for a description of the menu system. settings Interior air quality system. This function can be used to shut out exhaust fumes, NOTE smoke, etc., from the passen- NOTE ger compartment. The air in When Defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated. • The air quality sensor should always be the passenger compartment engaged in order to obtain the best air is then recirculated, i.e., no air in the passenger compartment. from outside the car is taken Interior Air Quality System–IAQS* • Recirculation is limited in cold weather into the car when this function is activated. The This system consists of a multifilter and an air to avoid fogging. indicator light in the button will illuminate when quality sensor. The filter helps remove gases If the insides of the windows start fog- recirculation is selected. and particles from the incoming air, thereby • 05 ging, disengage the air quality sensor. reducing the amounts of odors and contami- If the air in the car recirculates for too long, Use the defroster function to increase nants entering the vehicle. The air quality sen- there is a risk of condensation forming on the airflow to the front, side, and rear win- sor detects increased levels of contaminants in insides of the windows, especially in winter. dows. the outside air. When the air quality sensor Timer detects contaminated outside air, the air intake The timer function minimizes the risk of fog- closes and the air inside the passenger com- ging, or stale air when the recirculation function partment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air distribution table Air distribution Use Air distribution Use Air to windows. Some air To remove de-fog/de- Air to the floor and windows. To ensure comfortable flows from the dashboard ice the front side win- Some air flows from the conditions and good de- air vents. The air is not dows and windshield dashboard air vents. fogging in cold or humid recirculated. Air condition- quickly. weather. ing is always engaged.

Air to windshield and side In cold or humid Air to floor and from dash- In sunny weather with windows. Some air flows weather (blower board air vents. cool outside tempera- from the air dashboard speed should be tures. vents. moderate to high).

05 Airflow to windows and To ensure good com- Air to floor. Some air flows to To warm or cool the feet. from dashboard air vents. fort in warm, dry the dashboard air vents and weather. windows.

Airflow to the head and To ensure efficient Airflow to windows, from To cool the feet or pro- chest from the dashboard cooling in warm dashboard air vents and to vide warmer air to the air vents. weather. the floor. upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

202 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

Introduction Functions updated every few seconds. When the vehicle is stationary, "----" appears on the display. NOTE Average fuel consumption If a warning message appears while you are The average fuel consumption since the last using the trip computer, this message must reset. Reset using RESET. be acknowledged in order to return to the trip computer function. Acknowledge a Driving distance on current fuel reserve message by pressing OK. This function shows the approximate distance that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the To change the unit of measure specified for tank. The calculation is based on average fuel distance and speed, contact an authorized consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) Volvo workshop. of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank when the reading was taken. When the Information display and controls Average speed message ---- miles to empty tank appears in OK–press to acknowledge/confirm/erase The system calculates the average speed from the display, refuel as soon as possible. 05 a message) the last resetting. Reset using RESET. Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip Current speed in mph (Canadian models NOTE computer menus) only) The actual distance that can be driven on RESET–resets certain functions This function provides the driver with an instan- the usable fuel remaining in the tank may be taneous conversion of the car's current speed influenced by a change in driving style. To scroll through trip computer information, from km/h to mph. move the thumb wheel up or down. Continue See also page 254 for information on driving turning to return to the starting point. Current speed in km/h (U.S. models only) economically. This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed Resetting from mph to km/h. 1. Select --- mph average speed or --.- mpg average. Current fuel consumption 2. (Instantaneous) Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 second to reset the selected function. If Current fuel consumption is calculated every RESET is kept depressed for at 3 three second. The information on the display is

203 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

seconds, Average speed and Average fuel consumption are reset simultaneously.

204 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Active chassis system–Four C*

Active chassis (Four C) Operation NOTE Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con- This steering force level menu function can- trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the cha- not be accessed when the vehicle is in racteristics of the shock absorbers so that the motion. car's driving characteristics can be adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced.

Comfort Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm. This mode is particularly suitable for long-distance highway driving. The indicator light in the button will be on when this mode is selected. Chassis settings Use the buttons in the center console to Sport 05 In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is change setting. The setting in use when the reduced during cornering and steering engine is switched off is activated the next time response is more immediate. The transmission the engine is started. shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The indicator light in the button will be on to indi- Speed-dependent steering force* cate that Sport mode has been selected. Steering force increases with the speed of the Advanced vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in and steering response is very direct. Gear shift- order to facilitate parking, etc. ing is done at high rpm in each gear for Steering force can be changed under MY CAR dynamic and active driving. Car settings Steering wheel force. Select Low, Medium or High. For a description of the menu system, see page 189.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Storage spaces

206 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Compartment in door panel Tunnel console Glove compartment Storage pocket on the front edge of the front seat cushions Glove compartment Storage compartment Jacket holder Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and AUX input/USB connector Rear seat cup holders Storage pocket Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) under The owner's manual and maps can be kept Jacket holder armrest, AUX input/USB connector. here. There are also holders for pens and fuel 05 The jacket hanger is located on the inboard Includes cup holder for driver and passen- cards. The glove compartment can be locked side of the front passenger's seat head ger, 12-volt socket and small storage com- manually with the key blade, see page 67. restraint. It is only intended for hanging light partment. garments.

207 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Vanity mirror 12-volt sockets ignition must be in at least mode I, see page 84. The maximum current consumption is 10A (120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment is in use. If both the front and rear sockets are used at the same time, the maximum current consumption per socket is 7.5A (90W). The auxiliary sockets can also be used to power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from

G021438 your Volvo retailer. Vanity mirror with lighting 12-volt socket in the front tunnel console WARNING 05 The light comes on automatically when the cover is lifted. Always keep the sockets covered when not in use.

12-volt socket in the trunk*

12-volt socket in the rear center console The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt accessories such as cell phone chargers and coolers. For the socket to supply current, the

208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Fold down the cover to access the electrical socket.

NOTE The 12-volt socket in the trunk provides electrical current even when the ignition is switched off. Using the socket while the engine is not running will drain the battery.

209 Introduction...... 212 Radio...... 222 Media player...... 231 AUX/USB sockets...... 235 Bluetooth media ...... 238 Bluetooth® hands-free connection ...... 240 Cell phone voice control...... 248

210 INFOTAINMENT 06 Infotainment

Introduction

General information NOTE Audyssey MultEQ1 The infotainment system consists of radio and To help avoid excessive battery drain, media player features and also makes it pos- remove the remote key from the ignition slot sible to communicate via a cell phone. The if the infotainment system is used while the information is displayed on a 7" screen in the engine is switched off. center console. Infotainment functions can be controlled from the center console or via the Dolby Pro Logic buttons on the steering wheel keypad. On models equipped with the optional navigation system, voice commands can also be used to e.g., set destinations, make calls from a The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used Bluetooth-connected cell phone, etc. to optimize sound quality to help ensure a If the infotainment system was on when the world-class listening experience. ignition was switched off, the most recently used source (FM1, etc.) will restart the next time the ignition is put in mode I or higher. The driver's door must also be closed on vehicles with keyless drive*. The system is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing 06 The infotainment system can be operated for Corporation. 15 minutes at a time while the engine is switched off by pressing the On/Off button. Dolby Pro Logic II and the symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing While the engine is being started, the infotain- Corporation. ment system will be temporarily interrupted and will resume when the engine has started.

1 Applies only to models with Premium Sound Multimedia.

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Infotainment system overview Basic infotainment functions

Corresponding controls - keypad and center console Sockets for external audio sources (AUX Infotainment controls in the center console SOUND: press to access the menu for and USB) adjusting bass, treble, etc., see page 217 Steering wheel keypad for additional information. 7" display VOL: turn to raise or lower the volume level.

Center console control panel ON/OFF/MUTE: short press - switch 06 the system ON. Press and hold (until the screen turns black) - switch the system OFF. A short press when the infotainment system is on will mute/unmute the sound. The entire infotainment system, including the navigation* and telephone functions, is switched on/off at the same time by using this button. Mode buttons: select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.) by pressing its button on the center console. The most

213 06 Infotainment

Introduction

recent source in the selected mode (e.g., "* FAV—storing a shortcut" on page 217 EXIT: a short press takes you upward in FM1) will be displayed. The location of for information on using this button. the menu system, cancels a current func- these buttons on the center console may tion, rejects an incoming phone call or era- vary slightly from model to model. Steering wheel keypad ses characters that have been entered on the screen. Press and hold from a mode’s OK/MENU: confirm a menu selection. This The buttons on the right-hand steering wheel leads to the selected mode’s (RADIO, main view to come to the infotainment sys- keypad can be used in the same way as some tem's main view. MEDIA) menu view. Arrows at the right of of the controls on the center console. There are the screen indicate submenus. two versions of the keypad, depending on your Thumb wheel: pressing functions in the TUNE: turn to scroll among tracks/folders, vehicle's specifications. same way OK/MENU on the center con- radio stations, phone contacts or to navi- sole. Turning the thumb wheel functions in gate among the alternatives shown on the the same way as TUNE on the center con- screen. sole. 2 EXIT: short press - go upward in the menu Voice button: press to voice-activate cer- system, cancel a current function, reject an tain functions on a Bluetooth-connected incoming phone call or erase characters cell phone and the navigation system. that have been entered on the screen. Press and hold - from a mode’s main view Main view to come to the infotainment system's main From a mode’s normal view, pressing and view, see page 216. 06 holding EXIT will display the infotainment sys- # INFO: if more information is available tem's main view, which enables you to select than is currently displayed on the screen, a mode. press # INFO to display the remaining Left/right arrow keys: a short press moves information. between preset radio stations or tracks on NAV: Navigation system* Keypad (for preset stations, entering let- a disc. Press and hold to search within ters or numbers, etc). tracks or to tune to the next/previous strong radio station. * FAV: this button can be used to store a RADIO shortcut to a commonly used function in Volume AM/FM/SIRIUS/DISC, etc. See the section

2 Models with the optional navigation system only. On models without navigation, this button mutes/unmutes the infotainment system.

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Introduction

MEDIA: (DISC, USB, etc.)

TEL: Bluetooth hands-free

MY CAR: Driving-related settings

CAM: Park assist camera*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Menu navigation

An example of menu navigation in MEDIA mode when a CD is playing

216 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Mode button (in this example, the MEDIA The * FAV button can be used to store fre- 3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of button). The number of buttons varies, quently used functions, making it possible to alternatives displayed and press OK/ depending on your vehicle’s specifica- start the stored function by simply press- MENU to confirm (store) your choice. tions). Each mode has four basic views: ing * FAV. One favorite (for example, > The next time the infotainment system Normal view Equalizer) can be programmed for each of the mode (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.) is selected, following infotainment system functions: a short press on * FAV will start the Shortcut view In RADIO mode stored function. Quick scroll view • AM Basic sound settings Menu view • FM1/FM2 Press SOUND to display the basic sound set- SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2* Select a mode by pressing its button (1) • ting menu (Bass, Treble, etc). Continue press- (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.). Navigate using In MEDIA mode ing SOUND or OK/MENU to display the other TUNE, OK/MENU or EXIT. • DISC setting alternatives. • USB Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save * FAV—storing a shortcut • iPod the new setting by pressing OK/MENU. • Bluetooth Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to display: • AUX 3 Favorites can also be stored for MY CAR, • Surround: Can be set to On or Off. When 06 CAM* and NAV*. See page 189 for a descrip- switched on, the system will automatically tion of the menu system. select settings for the best sound quality, which is normally DPLII and will To program a function on the * FAV button: appear in the display. If the recording was 1. Select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA, etc.). made using Dolby Digital technology, playback will be provided with this setting and 2. Press and hold * FAV until the "favorite" will appear in the display. If Sur- menu is displayed.

3 Premium Sound Multimedia only

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217 06 Infotainment

Introduction

round is switched off, audio will be provi- MENU. Do the same for the other frequen- External audio source volume ded using 3 channel stereo. cies. If an external device such as an MP3 player or • Bass: Bass level. 4. When you have finished making your set- an iPod is connected to the AUX socket, the • Treble: Treble level. tings, press EXIT to save and return to nor- device's volume may be different than the vol- mal view. ume of the internal sound sources such as the • Fader: Balance between the front and rear disc player or the radio. If the external sound speakers. For general information regarding menu navi- source's volume is too high, the quality of the • Balance: Balance between the right and gation, see page 216 and menu overview see sound may be impaired. To help prevent this, left speakers. page 219. adjust the input volume of the external audio • DPL II centre level/3 channel centre 5 source: 3 Sound stage level : Volume for the center speaker. The sound experience can be optimized for the • DPL II surround level3/4: Surround level. driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat. NOTE If the front and rear seats are occupied, the Sound quality may be affected if the MP3 Advanced sound settings sound stage setting Front seats is recom- player is being charged while the system is mended. Select one of the options under in AUX mode. To help prevent this, avoid charging the MP3 player in a 12-volt socket Equalizer Audio settings Sound stage. while it is being played. Sound levels for different frequencies can be adjusted separately using this feature. Audio volume and automatic volume control 1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to AUX. To do so: 06 The infotainment system compensates for dis- Press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on 1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio rupting noises in the passenger compartment the steering wheel keypad. settings and select Equalizer by increasing the volume according to the 2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to AUX 2. Turn TUNE to select one of the frequencies speed of the vehicle. The level of sound com- input volume. Confirm by pressing OK/ and press OK/MENU. pensation can be set at low, medium, high or MENU. off. Select the level under Audio settings 3. Turn TUNE to adjust the sound setting and 3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume. Volume compensation. confirm the change by pressing OK/

3 Premium Sound Multimedia only 4 Only when Surround is on. 5 Premium Sound Multimedia only

218 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Optimal sound reproduction RADIO menus Main SAT1*/SAT2* menu (SiriusXM൅ The infotainment system is pre-calibrated for satellite radio) optimal sound reproduction using digital signal Main AM menu SAT1 processing. AM menu SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button 6 This calibration takes into account factors such Show presets to activate SIRIUS. as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the Scan SAT2 listeners' seating positions, etc., for each com- 7 bination of vehicle/infotainment system. Audio settings SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button 8 to activate SIRIUS. There is also a dynamic calibration that takes Sound stage into consideration the volume level, radio Equalizer9 Song memory reception, and the speed of the vehicle. Volume compensation Add song The settings that are described in this manual, Song Seek (Bass, Treble, Equalizer etc.) are only Reset all audio settings intended to enable the user to adapt sound Delete song reproduction to his/her personal tastes. Main FM1/FM2 menu View song memory FM menu Channel list information Infotainment system menus Show radio text Station name Show presets 06 Artist Scan Title Advanced settings Information Reset all FM settings Show presets Audio settings7 Category list

6 High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia only. 7 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes 8 Premium Sound Multimedia only. 9 To reach sub menus, see "Main menu AM.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Advanced SIRIUS settings Stop Main iPod menu Skip options Random iPod menu Channel skip list Repeat folder Random Lock options Change subtitles Scan 7 Channel lock list Change audio track Audio settings Unlock all channels Scan Main USB menu Temporarily unlock all chan- Audio settings7 USB menu nels Play/Pause Change code Main DVD10 Video menu DVD Video Menu Stop Audio settings7 DVD disc menu Random Play/Pause/Continue Repeat folder MEDIA menus Stop Select USB device Main CD Audio menu Subtitles Change subtitles Disc menu Audio tracks Change audio track 06 Random Advanced settings Scan Scan 7 Angle Audio settings Audio settings7 DivX® VOD code Main AUX menu Main CD/DVD10 Data menu Audio settings7 AUX menu Disc menu AUX input volume Play/Pause Audio settings7

7 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes 10The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system.

220 06 Infotainment

Introduction

TEL menus Receive vCard Main Bluetooth media menu Memory status Bluetooth menu Clear phone book Random Change phone Change device Remove Bluetooth device Remove Bluetooth device Phone settings Scan Discoverable Bluetooth software version in car Sounds and volume Audio settings7 Download phone book Bluetooth software version in Main Bluetooth hands-free menu car Phone menu Call options Call lists Auto answer All calls Voicemail number Missed calls Disconnect phone 06 Answered calls Dialled calls Call duration Phone book Search New contact Speed dials

7 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

221 06 Infotainment

Radio

General functions Menu navigation currently tuned station will be indicated in RADIO menu selections can be made from the the list by magnified text. center console or the steering wheel keypad, 3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to see page 214 for more information. select a station on the list. Selecting a station (in wavebands AM/ 4. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU or the FM1/FM2) thumb wheel on the steering wheel key- Automatic tuning pad. 1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE to toggle to the desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and NOTE press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on • This list will only display the frequencies the steering wheel keypad. of the stations currently being received, not a complete list of all radio frequen- 2. Press / keys on the center console RADIO button for selecting the AM, FM1, cies on the currently selected wave- control panel or steering wheel keypad to band. FM2, SAT1* or SAT2* wavebands. search for the next available station. Keypad (buttons 0-9) • If the signal from the currently tuned List of stations (in wavebands FM1/FM2 station is weak, this may prevent the Navigate among the menu alternatives in only) radio from updating the list of stations. the display by turning TUNE or the thumb The radio automatically compiles a list of the If this occurs, press while the list 06 wheel on the steering wheel keypad. strongest FM stations whose signals are cur- of stations is displayed to switch to Confirm your selection or access the radio rently being received. This enables you to find manual tuning mode and select a sta- menus by pressing OK/MENU or the stations when driving in areas where radio station. If the list of stations is no longer thumb wheel on the steering wheel key- tions and their frequencies are unfamiliar. displayed, turn TUNE in either direction to display the list again and press pad. To access this list: . Left/right arrow keys: Press and hold to go 1. Select the desired waveband (FM1 or to the next/previous strong station, press FM2). briefly to tune to a preset station. The list will disappear from the display after 2. Turn TUNE slightly in either direction. This several seconds. displays the list of stations in the area. The If the station list is no longer displayed, turn TUNE in either direction and press on the

222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Radio keypad on the center console to switch to NOTE been stored on the number key button manual tuning (or to switch back from manual used. tuning to the "list of stations" function). The radio is initially set to automatically search for stations in the area in which you A list of preset stations can be displayed. This Manual tuning are driving (see the preceding section, "List function can be activated/deactivated in AM/ By default, the list of stations of the strongest of stations"). FM mode in FM menu Show presets or in stations in the area will be displayed when you However, if you have switched to manual AM menu Show presets turn TUNE (see the preceding section, "List of tuning (by pressing on the keypad on stations"). While the list of stations is displayed, the center console while the list of stations Scan press on the center console keypad to is displayed), the radio will remain in manual The function automatically searches the cur- switch to manual tuning, which enables you to tuning mode the next time it is switched on. rent waveband for radio stations. When a sta- select a frequency from the complete list of all To switch back to "list of stations" mode, tion is found, it is played for several seconds radio frequencies available on the currently turn TUNE one step (to display the full list of before scanning is resumed. While the station selected waveband. In other words, in manual stations) and press . is playing it can be stored as a preset in the tuning mode, turning TUNE one step will Please note that if you press when the usual way (see "Manually storing preset sta- change from e.g., 93.3 to 93.5, etc.). list of stations is not displayed, this will acti- tions"). To manually tune a station: vate the INFO function. – To start scanning in AM/FM mode, go to 1. Press RADIO. Turn TUNE to scroll to the FM menu Scan or in AM menu Storing preset stations desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and Scan. Ten preset stations can be stored for each press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on 06 waveband (AM, FM1, etc.). Stop station scanning by pressing EXIT. the steering wheel keypad to confirm. Stored preset stations are selected using the 2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel to select a NOTE buttons on the keypad on the center console. frequency. Storing a station interrupts the SCAN func- Manually storing preset stations tion. 1. Tune to a station (see "Selecting a station" on page 222). Radio text 2. Press and hold one of the number key but- Some stations transmit information on pro- tons. gram content, artists, etc. This information can > The sound will be muted for several sec- be shown on the display. onds and when it returns, the station has

223 06 Infotainment

Radio

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Show developer of a broadcasting technology called ing” (consisting of a frequency's main radio text. IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to channel and any sub-channels that may the method of transmitting a digital radio also be available on that particular fre- broadcast signal centered on the same frequency. See also the section "Sub-chan- HD Radio reception (U.S. models ൅ quency as the AM or FM station's present fre- nels" below). only) quency. • When receiving a digital signal there is no Introduction The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/ crackling due to outside influences. since it is both analogue and digital. During hybrid operation, receivers still continue to How HD broadcasting works receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio radio receivers incorporate both modes of and broadcasts of this type are available in reception, where the receiver will automatically many areas of the United States. However, switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal there are a few key differences: cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver. When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, • Instead of transmitting one analogue sig- the symbol will appear in the infotain- nal, stations send out a bundled signal – both analogue and digital. ment system display. The symbol is "grayed- out" when HD Radio is in standby mode and • An HD radio receiver can receive both dig- white when the radio is actively receiving an HD ital and analogue broadcasts. Depending 06 Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio broadcast. on the terrain and location of the vehicle broadcast (which will influence the signal strength), More information about HD radio and IBOC the receiver will determine which signal to NOTE can be found on Ibiquity's website, receive. www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com. HD radio volume may fade in and out at Limitations times due to coverage limitations. Benefits of digital broadcasting • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM • Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality only): The main channel is the only channel HD radio is a brand name registered by the and AM as analogue FM). that can receive in hybrid mode (both dig- Ibiquity digital corporation1. They are the • Some FM frequencies offer a greater num- ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub- ber of listening choices through “multicast- channels, they are broadcast in digital

1 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

224 06 Infotainment

Radio

mode only. The main FM channel will be NOTE 3. Turn TUNE and move the marker to HD displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC Radio. There may be a noticeable difference in (Volvo uses the symbol ">" to indicate 4. Press OK/MENU to turn HD off (the X will there are sub-channels available) The sub- sound quality when a change from analogue to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such disappear from the box on the display FM channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2 screen). WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc. as: This will disable the radio's capability to receive : Due to current • Volume increase or decrease • Reception coverage area digital broadcasts but it will continue to func- IBOC transmitter power limitations, the Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/ • tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM reception coverage area in digital mode is Treble cut or boost receiver. Please note that when HD is switched somewhat more limited than the station's • Time alignment (Digital program mate- off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan- analogue coverage area. Please be aware rial in extreme cases can be as much as that as with any radio broadcast technol- nels (see the following section for a more 8 seconds behind the analogue). This detailed explanation of sub-channels). ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level and will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect. building location can have positive or neg- Repeat steps 2-4 above to reactivate HD (an X ative effects on radio reception. The above items are dependant on the broadcaster's equipment settings and do will appear in the box on the display screen). • Analogue to digital/digital to analogue not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio Please note that this will only switch HD on or blending: Analogue to digital blending will receiver or antenna systems. off for the selected waveband (AM, FM1, etc.). occur as the signal strength reaches a preset threshold in the receiver. This will be Sub-channels noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak Switching HD on or off reception) and is normal. The factory setting for HD radio is off. If acti- 06 vated when driving through areas with weak HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience that the radio repeatedly switches between analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off. To do so: 1. Be sure the infotainment system is switched on and in one of the AM or FM modes. 2. Press OK/MENU in the center console control panel. Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

225 06 Infotainment

Radio

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM NOTE SiriusXM൅ satellite radio* wavebands only) will also have sub-channels offering additional types of programming or • When the radio has gone into HD mode, Listening to satellite radio music. it may take several seconds before the The SiriusXM൅ satellite system consists of a ">" symbol (if the current frequency has number of high elevation satellites in geosyn- In such cases, the “-” symbol will be displayed any sub-channels) is displayed to the chronous orbit. to the left of the frequency number and a num- left of the frequency. Pressing and hold- ber will be displayed to the right of the fre- ing the arrow keys for approximately NOTE quency number indicating that the currently 1 second before the main-/sub-channel tuned frequency has at least one sub-channel. icon is displayed will cause the radio to • The digital signals from the satellites are tune to the next available radio station, line-of-sight, which means that physical Selecting sub-channels not to the current station's sub-chan- obstructions such as bridges, tunnels, To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press nels. etc, may temporarily interfere with sig- and hold the right arrow key on the center con- nal reception. sole or on the steering wheel keypad for • When you are no longer in broadcasting approximately 1 second. To go back to the range of the currently tuned sub-chan- • Avoid any obstructions, such as metal- , will be displayed. lic objects transported on roof racks or main channel, press and hold the left arrow key nel No reception The radio will then be muted and it will in a ski box, or other antennas that may on the center console or on the steering wheel be necessary to tune to or search for a impede signals from the SiriusXM keypad for approximately 1 second. To go to ൅ new radio station. satellites. subchannel 2 (if available), press and hold the right arrow key on the center console or on the 06 steering wheel keypad for approximately Sub-channels can also be stored as presets, Selecting SiriusXM൅ radio mode 1 second. see page 223 for information on storing sta- 1. With the infotainment system switched on, tions. press RADIO. If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main channel, pressing and holding the left arrow If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it 2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel on the key for approximately 1 second will tune to the may take up to 6 seconds before the channel steering wheel keypad to scroll to the next lower radio frequency. becomes audible. If you press this button while desired waveband (SAT1 or SAT2) and you are out of digital range of the transmitter, press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on No reception will be displayed. the steering wheel keypad. Activating SiriusXM൅ radio 1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no audio, which means that the channel is

226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Radio

unsubscribed and the text Subscription 3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of cat- NOTE update needed is displayed (see also egories and press OK/MENU to make a "Selecting a channel"). selection. • The numbers of skipped or locked channels will not be displayed. 2. Call SiriusXM൅ at 1-888-539-SIRIUS > The channels in the selected category are displayed. • If a channel is locked, the access code (7474). must be entered before the channel can be selected. See "Unlocking a channel" 3. If you tune to an unsubscribed channel, the NOTE SiriusXM൅ ID will be displayed. The Sir- on page 229. iusXM൅ ID can also be accessed from the • The category All is default, which ena- menu (press OK/MENU, turn TUNE to bles you to scroll through the entire list Direct channel entry of available satellite channels. scroll to the Advanced settings menu, The SiriusXM൅ satellite channels are in numer- press OK/MENU, scroll to SIRIUS ID and • The channel categories are automati- ical order throughout all of the categories. To press OK/MENU to display the number). cally updated several times a year. This access a channel directly: takes approximately two minutes and 4. will be displayed Updating subscription will interrupt normal broadcasting. A 1. Turn TUNE to access the channel list. while the subscription is being updated, message will be displayed while updat- after which the display will return to the 2. Use the keypad buttons to enter the chan- ing is in progress. Information on channel's number. normal view. nel or feature updates is available at www.siriusxm.com. 3. Press OK/MENU. The radio will tune to this SiriusXM൅ ID channel, even if it belongs to a category The SiriusXM൅ ID (sometimes referred to as other than the currently selected one. 06 the Electronic Serial Number or ESN) is Selecting a channel required when contacting the SiriusXM൅ Call There are three ways of tuning in a channel: Scanning Center. It is used to activate your account and • Using the left and right arrow keys to go to Scan automatically searches through the list of when making any account transactions. the next channel. Skipped channels (see satellite channels. The search will only be car- page 229) will be excluded. ried out in the selected category, see Selecting a channel category page 223 for more detailed information on the 1. Turn TUNE to display a list of channels. • By turning the TUNE control and selecting a channel from the list scan function. 2. Press EXIT. • Through direct channel entry. Storing a channel A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored; 10 channels each for SAT1 and SAT2, see

227 06 Infotainment

Radio

page 223 for detailed information on storing 2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song memory and Radio text channels. press OK/MENU. This text provides information about the song that is currently playing. To turn this feature on • A long press on one of the number keys 3. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song Seek and stores the currently tuned channel on that press OK/MENU to activate or deactivate or off, press OK/MENU and scroll to Show key. the function. radio text and press OK/MENU to toggle between on or off. • A short press on a number key while the radio is in SAT1 or SAT2 mode will tune to NOTE the preset satellite channel stored on that Advanced SiriusXM൅ settings button, regardless of the currently selected When the song has ended, the radio will remain tuned to the channel on which the This menu function enables you to make set- channel category. song was played. tings on certain SiriusXM൅ satellite radio func- Searching for and storing songs tions. To access this menu: The Song Seek function provides notification Song memory 1. Press OK/MENU. when SiriusXM is broadcasting the songs Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's ൅ 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu selected in song memory. ena- memory. Song memory and press OK/MENU. bles you to store the name of the song for To add the currently playing song to the list: future advance notification when that song is being played. 1. Press OK/MENU. WARNING 2. Scroll to Song memory and press OK/ Settings should be made when the vehicle Song seek is at a standstill. 06 When a satellite radio channel plays one of the MENU. songs stored in the song memory while the 3. Scroll to Add current song to song The following settings can be made in the sat- Song seek feature is activated, the listener will memory and press OK/MENU. be alerted by a text message and an audible ellite menus: signal. If a new song is selected when the memory is • Channel skip settings can be made full, you will be prompted to delete a song from Press OK/MENU to listen to the song or EXIT the list. To do so: • Channel lock settings can be made to cancel. • The channel access code can be displayed 1. Press OK/MENU. To activate/deactivate the song seek function: or changed (see also "Locking a channel" 2. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of on page 229) 1. Press OK/MENU. songs. Select a song and press OK/ • Your SiriusXM൅ ID can be displayed MENU to delete it from the list. • Reset SiriusXM൅ settings

228 06 Infotainment

Radio

Skip options be skipped the next time the ignition is 7. Press OK/MENU to select Lock all This function is used to remove a channel from switched on. channels in the category or turn TUNE the list of available channels. to scroll to a channel and press OK/ Channel lock MENU to select it. Multiple channels can Skipping a channel Access to specific channels can be restricted be selected. 1. Press OK/MENU. (locked). A locked channel will not provide The selected channel is now locked and a 2. audio, song titles, or artist information. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu. checked box will be displayed to indicate this. 3. Press OK/MENU to enter the Skip NOTE It will be necessary to enter the channel access options menu. code2 in order to listen to a locked channel. All channels are initially unlocked. 4. Press OK/MENU to enter Channel skip Unlocking a channel list. 2 Locking a channel A channel's access code is required to unlock 5. Press OK/MENU to select All categories 1. Press OK/MENU. a channel. or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu. Unlock all channels press OK/MENU to select it. This permanently removes all channels from 6. Press OK/MENU to select Skip all 3. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to scroll the locked list and makes them available for channels in the category or turn TUNE to the Lock options menu and press OK/ selection. MENU. to scroll to a channel and press OK/ Temporarily unlock all channels MENU to select or deselect it. Multiple 4. Use the keypad in the central control panel This function will temporarily unlock all chan- 06 channels can be selected. to enter the channel access code2 and nels and make them available for selection. The Unskip all channels press OK/MENU. channels remain on the locked list and will This removes all channels from the skip list and 5. Press OK/MENU to enter the Channel again be locked the next time the ignition is switched on. makes them available for selection. lock list. CHANGE CODE Temporary unskip all channels 6. Press OK/MENU to select All categories This function makes it possible to change the This function will temporarily unskip all chan- or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and channel access code. The default code is nels and make them available for selection. The press OK/MENU to select it. channels remain on the skip list and will again 0000. To change the code:

2 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

229 06 Infotainment

Radio

1. Select Change code in the Lock options menu and press OK/MENU. 2. Enter the new code and press OK/MENU. 3. Confirm the new code and press OK/ MENU. If an incorrect code is entered, the text Incorrect code is displayed. If you have forgotten the access code: 1. Select SIRIUS ID in the Advanced settings menu and press OK/MENU. 2. Press and hold the OK/MENU button for several seconds. 3. The current code will be displayed. Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with assistance.

06 SiriusXM൅ ID This function displays the 12-digit SiriusXM൅ activation ID.

230 06 Infotainment

Media player

CD/DVD1 functions OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec- Playing a disc tion or access the menus for the currently Press MEDIA ans scroll to Disc. Press OK/ selected source (e.g., Disc) or press the MENU or the thumb wheel on the steering thumb wheel on the steering wheel key- wheel keypad. If there is a disc in the player, it pad. will begin playing automatically. Otherwise, Left/right arrow keys: Fast back/forward Insert disc will be displayed. Insert the disc and change track or chapter2. into the slot with the text side upward and it will begin playing automatically. The media player supports and can play the following main types of discs and files: If a disc with audio/video files is inserted, its folder structure will be read by the system. It • Purchased CDs (CD Audio) may take several seconds until the disc begins • Home-burned CDs with audio and /or playing, depending on its quality and the video files amount of information it contains. Center console control panel • Home-burned DVDs with audio and /or Disc slot video files Disc eject • Purchased DVDs For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected disc MEDIA button, the most recently used must be removed within 12 seconds or it will active source will start when MEDIA is For a list of compatible formats, see be automatically drawn back into the slot. pressed. Pressing this key from Media page 234. mode's main view will display a shortcut Media menu selections can be made from the Pause 06 menu. center console or the steering wheel keypad. When the infotainment system volume is turned off completely or the sound is muted, Eject For more information about the infotainment menu system, see page 214. the player will pause. It will resume playing Keypad when the volume is turned up again or if the For general information regarding menu navi- sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via TUNE:Turn to navigate among menu gation, see page 216 and menu overview see the menu system, select Play/Pause. selections/folders/tracks (or turn the page 219. thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad).

1 The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system. 2 DVDs only

231 06 Infotainment

Media player

Navigating a disc and playing tracks When a file has been played, the player will DVD videos continue to play the rest of the files (of the same CD audio discs For information, see page 231. type) in the current folder. When all of the files Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to in the folder have been played, the player will Fast forward/reverse navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to con- automatically go to the next folder and play the Press and hold the / buttons to fast firm a choice and begin listening. Press EXIT files in it (unless Repeat folder is activated). forward/reverse. This is done at one speed for to cancel. Press and hold EXIT to return to the audio files but several speeds can be chosen playlist's root level. The system automatically detects and changes settings if a disc containing only audio or only for video files. Press the / buttons sev- The / buttons on the center console or video files is inserted in the player and will play eral times to increase the speed. Release the steering wheel keypad can also be used to these files. However, the system will not button to return to normal viewing speed. change tracks. change settings if a disc containing both audio Scan3 Home-burned CD/DVD audio/video files and video files is inserted and the player will This function plays the first ten seconds of Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to continue to play the current type of file. each track/audio file. To start scanning: navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to confirm a choice and begin listening. Use EXIT to NOTE 1. Press OK/MENU. stop or to go back in the disc's folder structure. Video images will only be visible when the 2. Scroll to Scan. Press and hold EXIT to return to the playlist's vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is root level. > The first ten seconds of each track/ traveling faster than approximately 4 mph audio file will be played. The / buttons on the center console or (6 km/h), No visual media available while 06 driving will be displayed. Sound from the 3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The cur- steering wheel keypad* can also be used to film will still be audible and video images will rent track/audio file will continue playing. change audio/video files. be shown again when the vehicle stops. The following symbols are used in the display: Random3 This function plays the tracks in random order NOTE • - audio files (shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can be • - video files Some copy protected audio files or home- scrolled through in the normal way. To listen to burned audio files may not be read by the tracks in random order: • - folders player. 1. Press OK/MENU,

3 Not video DVDs

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Media player

2. Scroll to Random NOTE currently playing). Press OK/MENU to choose a chapter and return to the normal view in the 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate Video images will only be visible when the display (if a film was playing, it will resume). the random play function. vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is Press EXIT to access the list of titles. traveling faster than approximately 4 mph Press the / buttons on the center con- (6 km/h), No visual media available while In the list of titles, turn TUNE to make a selec- sole or steering wheel keypad to change driving will be displayed. Sound from the tion and press OK/MENU to confirm. This also tracks/audio files. film will still be audible and video images will returns you to the list of chapters. Press EXIT be shown again when the vehicle stops. to cancel and return to the normal view (without Repeat folder4 having made a selection). This function makes it possible to play files in Navigating in a DVD's menus a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been It is also possible to change chapters by press- played, the first file will begin again. To acti- ing / on the center console control vate: panel or on the steering wheel keypad. 1. Press OK/MENU. Advanced settings 2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder. Angle 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate If the DVD supports this function, it is possible the function. to select a camera angle for a certain scene. This can be done in DVD mode under DVD disc Playing video DVDs menu Advanced settings Angle. 06 Play DivX Video On Demand When playing a video DVD, a disc menu may The media player can be registered to play appear on the display, giving you access to Buttons in the center console control panel, DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or extra functions and settings such as choice of shown above, are used to navigate in a DVD's USB. The registration code can be found by subtitle and language, scene selection, etc. menus. pressing the MY CAR button, and going to Changing chapters or title Settings Information DivX® VOD TurnTUNE to access the list of chapters and code. See page 189 for more information navigate in this list (the film will pause if it is about the menu system.

4 Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only.

233 06 Infotainment

Media player

See also www.divx.com/vod for more informa- NOTE tion. Dual format (double-sided discs) such as Screen settings DVD Plus or CD-DVD are thicker than nor- Screen settings can be made (when the vehicle mal discs and may not play in your infotain- is not moving) for: ment system. If a disc containing both CDDA and MP3 • Brightness tracks is played, all MP3 tracks will be • Contrast ignored. 1. Press OK/MENU and choose Image settings and confirm by pressing OK/ Audio CD-Audio, mp3, wma, MENU. formats aac, m4a 2. Turn TUNE to the desired setting and Video for- CD-Video, DVD-Video, divx, press OK/MENU. mats avi, asf 3. Change the setting by turning TUNE and confirm the change by pressing OK/ MENU. Press OK/MENU or EXIT to return to the 06 screen settings list. To return to the factory settings, select Reset . Compatible formats The media player can play a number of different types of files and disc formats, and is compatible with the formats listed in the following table.

234 06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

Connecting external devices 1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to select the NOTE desired source (iPod, USB or AUX). Press OK/MENU. • The system supports a number of iPod models produced in 2005 or later. > For example, if a USB device has been selected, the text Connect USB will be • In order to help avoid damage to the displayed. USB socket, it will be switched off if there is a short circuit or if the con- 2. Connect the device to one of the sockets nected device uses too much current in the center console storage compartment (which can happen if the device does (see the illustration). not comply with the USB standard). The The text Reading USB will be displayed while USB socket will reactivate the next time the ignition is switched on if the problem the system reads the device's folders. This may no longer exists. If the problem persists, take a short time, depending on the folder contact a trained and authorized Volvo structure and the number of files. Sockets for auxiliary devices in the storage com- service technician. partment between the front seats When this information has been loaded, track An auxiliary device, such as an iPod or MP3 information will be displayed and a track can Media menu selections can be made from the player can be connected to the infotainment be selected. center console or the steering wheel keypad, system via one of the sockets in the center see page 214 for more information. console storage compartment. A device connected to the USB socket can be operated Navigating and playing tracks1 06 using the vehicle's infotainment system con- Turn TUNE to access the device's playlist and trols. to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to An iPod or an MP3 player with rechargeable either select a sub-folder or confirm a choice batteries will also be charged if the device is and begin playback. Press EXIT to cancel and connected to the USB socket (if the vehicle's exit the playlist or to go back in the folder struc- ignition is on or if the engine is running). ture. Press and hold EXIT to go to the highest level in the playlist. To connect a device:

1 USB and iPod only

235 06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

The / buttons on the center console or Random1 External sound sources steering wheel keypad can also be used to For information, see page 232. USB flash drive change tracks/files. To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is Search1 advisable to only store music files on the drive. The following symbols are used in the display: The keypad in the center console can be used It will take considerably longer for the system to search for a file in the currently selected • - audio files to index the files on the drive if it contains any- folder. • - video files thing other than compatible music files. Start the search by either turning TUNE (to • - folders access the folders) or by pressing one of the NOTE When a file has been played, the player will character keys to enter a letter/number. Pos- continue to play the rest of the files (of the same sible search results will be displayed as char- • The system supports removable media type) in the current folder. When all of the files acters are entered. that uses the USB 2.0 standard and the FAT32 file system. It can index up to in the folder have been played, the player will Play the file by pressing OK/MENU. 1 1,000 folders and a maximum of 254 automatically go to the next folder (unless sub-folders/files for each folder. How- 2 Repeat folder is activated) and play the files Repeat ever, the highest folder level can sup- in it. This function makes it possible to play files in port up to 1,000 sub-folders/files. The system automatically detects and changes a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been • When using a longer type of USB settings if a device containing only audio or played, the first file will begin again. For infor- device, connecting it with a USB only video files is connected to the USB socket mation, see page 233. adapter cable will help reduce mechan- 06 and will play these files. However, the system ical wear on the USB socket and on the Pause will not change settings if the device contains device. When the infotainment system volume is both audio and video files and will continue to turned off completely or the sound is muted, play the current type of file. the player will pause. It will resume playing USB hub Fast forward/reverse1 when the volume is turned up again or if the A USB hub can be connected to the USB socket, making it possible to connect several For information, see page 232. sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via the menu system, select Play/Pause. USB devices at the same time. To select one Scan1 of the devices, go to the menu USB menu For information, see page 232. Select USB device

1 USB and iPod only 2 USB only

236 06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

MP3 player Many MP3 players have a file indexing system that is not supported by the vehicle's infotainment system. In order to use an MP3 player, the system must be set to USB Removable device/Mass Storage Device. iPod An iPod receives current and its battery is charged through the USB cable. The system will only play audio files from an iPod.

NOTE When an iPod is used as a sound source, the vehicle's infotainment system has a menu structure similar to the one in the iPod. See the iPod's manual for detailed information. 06 Compatible file formats via the USB socket The following audio and video files are supported by the system when playing a device connected to the USB socket.

Audio formats mp3, wma, aac, m4a

Video formats divx, avi, asf

237 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth media

Introduction The vehicle's media player can only play audio EXIT: Press to go back in the menu struc- The vehicle's media player is equipped with files through the Bluetooth function. ture or cancel a function. Bluetooth and can play streaming audio files Left/right arrow keys: Short press: change from a Bluetooth device such as a cell phone Overview tracks. Long press: fast forward/reverse or mp3 player. Navigation and control of the within a track. The arrow keys on the steer- device can be done through the vehicle's cen- ing wheel keypad can be used in the same ter console control panel or the steering wheel way. keypad. On certain external devices, it is also possible to change tracks from the device. Pairing and connecting an external device NOTE Before an external device can be connected, it Any Bluetooth cell phones used must sup- must be paired to the infotainment system. The port Audio/Video Remote Control Profile procedure for connecting an external device (AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution varies, depending whether or not the device Profile (A2DP). The phone must use AVRCP has previously been paired to the infotainment version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older versions system. A maximum of 10 external devices can of these standards are used, certain fea- Center console control panel tures (e.g., scan or random) may not func- be paired and each device only needs to be tion. VOL: Volume control paired once. To pair a device, see page 241. 06 Not all cell phones are fully compatible with MEDIA button, the most recently used the vehicle's Bluetooth system. A list of active source will start when MEDIA is Automatic connection compatible phones is available at you Volvo pressed. Pressing this key from Media When the Bluetooth function is active and the retailer or at www.volvocars.us. mode's main view will display a shortcut most recently used device is within range, it is menu. automatically connected. When the infotain- Menu navigation TUNE: Turn to navigate among menu alter- ment system searches for the most recently Choices can be made in the Bluetooth menus natives and folders shown in the display. used device, its name is shown in the display. from the center console control panel or the To connect another paired device, press EXIT. steering wheel keypad. For additional informa- OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec- See the following section for information about tion about navigating the various menus, see tion or access the menus. switching to another device. page 214.

238 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth media

Switching to another device Disconnecting an external device Scanning audio files on an external It is possible to switch among paired The external device is automatically discon- device1 Bluetooth devices that are in the vehicle. To nected from the infotainment system if it is This function plays the first ten seconds of do so: moved out of range. each audio file. This function can be activated/ 1. Press MEDIA,scroll to Bluetooth and deactivated under: Bluetooth menu Scan. press the thumb wheel on the steering Removing a paired device Scanning can be canceled by pressing EXIT. wheel keypad or OK/MENU. 1. In Bluetooth mode, press OK/MENU. 2. Be sure the Bluetooth device is discover- 2. Scroll to Remove Bluetooth device and Bluetooth version information able (refer to its user manual if necessary). press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. This feature offers information about the Bluetooth version installed in the vehicle's 3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. 3. Scroll to the device to be removed by turn- infotainment system. This information can be ing the thumb wheel or TUNE and confirm 4. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to Change by pressing the thumb wheel or OK/ found under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth device and confirm by pressing the thumb MENU. software version in car. wheel or OK/MENU. > A question asking if you would like to > After several seconds, the names of any remove the device will be displayed. paired external devices will be displayed. 4. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU to confirm or EXIT to cancel. 5. Scroll to the device to be connected and 06 press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. 1 > The device will be connected. Random This function plays the audio files on the exter- Audio files can now be selected using the nal device in random order (shuffle). This func- / buttons in the center console or on tion can be activated/deactivated under: the steering wheel keypad. Bluetooth menu Random Press the / buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad to change tracks.

1 Function is not supported on all cell phones.

239 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Introduction Compliance Canada: IC 700BIAM2101 This feature makes it possible to set up a wire- FCC/IC common sentence Menu navigation less connection between a Bluetooth-ena- This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules TEL menu selections can be made from the bled cell phone or other device and the vehi- and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject center console or the steering wheel keypad. cle’s infotainment system. This enables the to the following two conditions: (1) this device For additional information about navigating the infotainment system to function as a hands- may not cause interference, and (2) this device various menus, see page 214. free connection and allows you to remote-con- must accept any interference, including inter- trol a number of the phone’s functions. The ference that may cause undesired operation of microphone used by this system is located this device. near the driver's side sun visor (2). The buttons and other controls on the cell phone can USA: FCC ID A269ZUA130 always be used regardless of whether or not FCC WARNING the phone is connected to the hands-free sys- Changes or modifications not expressly tem. approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate NOTE the equipment. Not all cell phones are fully compatible with IC RSS-Gen the hands-free system. A list of compatible This equipment complies with FCC/IC radia- phones is available at your Volvo retailer or System overview 06 at www.volvocars.us tion exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency Cell phone (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to WARNING OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency Location of the microphone (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very Never use the hands-free feature or any Steering wheel keypad other device in your vehicle in a way that low levels of RF energy that it deemed to com- distracts you from the task of driving safely. ply without maximum permissive exposure Center console control panel and display Distraction can lead to a serious accident. evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 8 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

240 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Bluetooth® functions in the center wheel keypad can be used in the same Pairing (connecting) external console control panel way. Bluetooth® devices OK/MENU: Press to answer an incoming A maximum of 10 cell phones or other devices call, confirm your selection or access the can be paired with the hands-free system. Pair- phone menus. Incoming calls can also be ing only needs to be done once for each phone. answered by pressing the thumb wheel on After pairing, the cell phone no longer needs to the steering wheel keypad. be in sight or discoverable. EXIT: Press to end or reject calls, erase Two Bluetooth® devices (e.g., a phone and an characters that have been entered, end an iPod®) can be active at the same. However, two ongoing function and goes back in the phones cannot be used at the same time to menus. This button on the steering wheel make calls. keypad can also be used in the same way. There are two ways of pairing a cell phone to the hands-free system for the first time: Getting started Control panel in the center console. Method 1: Search for the external device using Use the controls on the steering wheel keypad Keypad containing letters and numbers for the infotainment menus and in the center console to access, navigate dialing numbers, adding phone book and make selections in the hands-free sys- 1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth func- entries, etc. tem’s menus. tion to make it discoverable (refer to the TEL: Press this button to activate/deacti- phone’s user manual if necessary) or go to 06 vate the Bluetooth function. If TEL is Activation www.volvocars.com already active, pressing this button again A short press on the TEL button in the center will display a shortcut menu with com- console activates the Bluetooth® hands-free 2. Press TEL. monly used functions. system. If the system is already activated when > The infotainment system will search for previously paired devices. TUNE: From TEL mode's normal view, turn the button is pressed, a shortcut menu will be clockwise to display the phone book or displayed. The symbol at the upper right 3. Press the thumb wheel on the steering counterclockwise for the phone list. It can of the display indicates that the hands-free wheel keypad or OK/MENU and select also be used for navigating in displayed system is active. Add phone.1 menus. The thumb wheel in the steering

1 Select Change phone if the cell phone or device has already been paired with the infotainment system. If several phones or devices have already been paired, their names will also be displayed. Scroll to the device to be connected and press the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad or OK/MENU.

241 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

4. With the cell phone in discoverable mode, 2. Make the vehicle discoverable by pressing Connect manually press OK/MENU. the thumb wheel or OK/MENU and select- To connect a phone other than the one that > The infotainment system will search for ing Phone settings Discoverable. was most recently connected or to switch cell phones or devices that are in range, between cell phones that are already paired 3. Search for the vehicle using the phone or which takes approximately 30 seconds. with the hands-free system, go to Phone external device's Bluetooth function. Any phones detected will be displayed menu Change phone. Refer to its user manual if necessary. using their Bluetooth names. The hands-free system’s Bluetooth name 4. Select My Volvo Car on the phone or Changing phones or devices will appear in the cell phone’s display as external device’s screen and follow the More than one device can be used in the vehi- My Volvo Car. directions provided. cle as long as this device has been paired. To do so, see page 241. 5. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to select 5. Enter a PIN code of your choice in the one of the cell phones shown in the center external device and press its button to pair Changing devices: console display and press the thumb wheel the device. When prompted, enter the 1. Check that the external device is discov- or OK/MENU. same PIN code in the vehicle using the erable. center console keypad. 6. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the 2. Press TEL and select Change phone. 6. Pair My Volvo Car from the external digits (PIN code) shown in the center con- > The infotainment system will search for device. sole display and press the button on the previously paired devices. Those that cell phone used to confirm a choice. When the external device has been paired, its are detected will be displayed on the 06 The external device is now paired and can be Bluetooth name appear in the center console screen. display. This device can now be controlled controlled from the infotainment system. 3. Select the desired device by turning the from the infotainment system. If the connection failed: Press EXIT and con- thumb wheel or TUNE and confirm by nect with method 2 below. Connect automatically pressing the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. When the hands-free system is active and the Method 2: Search for the vehicle using the > The device will be connected. most recently connected cell phone is within external device’s Bluetooth function. range, it will be connected automatically. If this Making a call 1. Press TEL. If a phone or external device is phone is not within range, the hands-free sys- 1. Ensure that is shown at the top of the already connected, disconnect it. tem will attempt to connect one of the other center console display and that the hands- > The Bluetooth function will search for paired cell phones. When the infotainment sys- free function is in telephone mode. previously paired devices. tem searches for the most recently connected phone, its name appears in the display.

242 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

2. Dial the desired phone number using the Even if the cell phone has been disconnected Call settings center console keypad or use the speed manually, some phones may reconnect auto- While a call is in progress, press OK/MENU or dial function (see page 247). In normal matically, for example when a new call is initi- the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad view (see page see page 213 for informa- ated. to access the following functions: tion about the various display views), it is Mute: mute the infotainment system’s also possible to turn TUNE clockwise to Removing a paired device • microphone. access the phone book and then counter- A paired phone or device can be removed from clockwise for the call list. See page 247 for the list. To do so: • Mobile phone: transfer the call from hands-free to the cell phone. On certain more information about the phone book. 1. Press TEL. cell phones, the connection will be broken, 3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. 2. Select Phone menu Remove which is normal. The hands-free function End or reject a call by pressing EXIT. Bluetooth device. will ask if you would like to reconnect. • Dial number: dial a third party during an Disconnecting the cell phone Handling calls ongoing call using the keypad (the current The cell phone is automatically disconnected call will be put on hold). from the infotainment system if it is moved out Incoming calls Call lists of range. – Press OK/MENU (or the thumb wheel on Call lists are copied to the hands-free function The cell phone can be manually disconnected the steering wheel keypad) to answer a each time a cell phone is connected and the from the hands-free system by pressing and call, even if the infotainment system is cur- lists are updated while the phone is connected. holding TEL or in phone mode, going to Phone rently in another mode (e.g., RADIO or In normal view, turn TUNE counter-clockwise 06 MEDIA). menu Disconnect phone. See also page to see the All calls list. 244 for more information about connections. Press EXIT to reject a call. In phone mode, the various call lists can be The hands-free system is also deactivated Auto answer displayed in Phone menu Call lists: when the ignition is switched off (or if the This function means that incoming calls will be driver’s door is opened). • All calls answered automatically. Activate or deactivate When the cell phone is disconnected from the the function in the menu system under Phone • Missed calls hands-free system, a call in progress can be menu Call options Auto answer. • Answered calls continued using the cell phone’s own speaker • Dialled calls (certain cell phones show and microphone. this list in reverse order) • Call duration

243 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

If no number has been stored, this menu can Ringing volume Phone book be accessed by pressing and holding 1. In phone mode, go to Phone menu Phone The hands-free system uses two phone books (one with the cell phone's list of contacts and Voice mail settings Sounds and volume Ring one with contacts saved directly in the info- In normal view, a speed dial number for voice volume and adjust the volume by turning tainment system), which are combined to form mail can be programmed and accessed by VOL. Save the setting by pressing EXIT. one phone book. pressing and holding 1. Ringing tones • The infotainment system downloads the The number for voice mail can be changed in The hands-free system’s integrated ringing phone book from a connected cell phone. phone mode in Phone menu Call options tones can be selected in Phone menu This phone book will only be displayed Voicemail number Change number. Phone settings Sounds and volume when this cell phone is connected to the Ring signals Ring signal 1, etc. hands-free system. Sound settings • The infotainment system also has an inte- NOTE grated phone book made up of contacts Call volume that have been saved in the system, Call volume can be only be adjusted during a The connected cell phone’s ring tone may regardless of which cell phone is currently not be switched off when one of the hands- call. Use the buttons in the steering wheel key- connected when the contact is saved. free system's ringing tones is used. pad or the infotainment system’s VOL control. These contacts will be displayed regardless of the cell phone that is connected. If Infotainment system volume If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s a contact has been saved in the infotain- 06 If no phone call is in progress, volume for the ring tone2, go to Phone menu Phone ment system, the symbol will be dis- infotainment system can be adjusted in the settings Sounds and volume Ring played next to it. normal way with the infotainment system's signals Mobile phone ring signal. VOL control or from the steering wheel keypad. Infotainment system sound can be automatically muted when a phone call is received in Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Mute radio/media.

2 Not supported by all cell phones.

244 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

NOTE Contact shortcuts Buttons in the center console A quick way of searching the phone book for Button Function Changes made from the infotainment sys- contacts in normal view is to turn TUNE clock- tem to a contact in the cell phone's phone book will result in a new contact being wise to access the phone book and then coun- Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1 added to the infotainment system's phone ter-clockwise to select a contact from the list. book. However, this contact will not be Press OK/MENU to call. A B C Å Ä Æ À Ç 2 saved in the cell phone's phone book. The Each name in the phone book has a default infotainment system's display will show duplicate contacts with different icons. phone number. If the symbol is displayed to D E F È É 3 the right of it, this indicates that there are addi- Please also note that if a speed dial number tional phone numbers for this contact. To use is saved or if a contact's information is edi- G H I Ì 4 ted, this will result in a new contact in the a phone number other than the default one, infotainment system's phone book. press the button on the center console J K L 5 control panel. Turn TUNE to select a different The symbol must be displayed before phone number and press OK/MENU to call. M N O Ö Ø Ñ Ò 6 the phone book can be used and the hands- It is also possible to search for a contact by free function must be in phone mode. using the center console keypad to enter the first letter(s) of the contact's name (see also the P Q R S ß 7 The infotainment system saves a copy of each following table "Buttons in the center console" paired cell phone's phone book. This phone for each button's function). book can be copied each time the phone is T U V Ü Ù 8 06 connected. The list of contacts can also be accessed from normal view by pressing and holding the button W X Y Z 9 – Activate/deactivate this function in phone on the center console keypad with the first let- mode in Phone menu Phone settings ter of the contact's name. For example, press- Download phone book. Shift between upper and lower ing and holding button 6 would provide direct case If the phone book contains information about access to the section of the list with contacts someone who is trying to call you, this infor- whose names begin with M. + 0 p w mation will be shown in the display. # *

245 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Searching for contacts 3. To switch from letter entry mode to the Adding a new contact entry mode for numbers or special characters, or to go to the phone book, turn TUNE to one of the selections (see the explanation in the following table) in the list for switching character entry mode (2) and press OK/MENU.

Character entry modes 123/ Toggle between letters and num- ABC bers by pressing OK/MENU.

More Switch to special characters by Searching for contacts using the text wheel pressing OK/MENU. Enter the name of a new contact List of characters Switch between character entry modes This leads to the phone book (3). (see the following table) Switch between character entry modes Turn TUNE to select a contact (see the following table) and press OK/MENU to display Character entry field the contact's information. Phone book (list of contacts) New contacts can be added in phone mode in Phone menu Phone book New 06 To search for or edit a contact in phone mode, Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character. contact. go to Phone menu Phone book Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the char- Search. acters that have been entered. 1. When Name is highlighted, press OK/ MENU to go to the character entry mode 1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press If a number button on the center console is (see the illustration). OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter pressed while the text wheel is displayed, a list keys on the center console can also be of characters (1) will be displayed. Briefly press 2. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press used. the button once to enter its first letter, twice to OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter enter the second letter, etc. Continue to press keys on the center console can also be 2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The results used. of the search will be displayed in the phone the button to display other characters. Con- book (3). tinue with the next character, etc. To enter a number, press and hold the button.

246 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

3. Continue to the next letter, etc. The name Toggle between upper and lower is activated in Phone menu Phone book entered will be displayed in the character case letters by pressing OK/ Receive vCard. entry field (2). MENU. 4. To switch from letter entry mode to the Memory status entry mode for numbers or special charac- Press OK/MENU and the cursor In phone mode, the memory status of the info- ters, or to toggle between upper and lower will move to the character entry tainment system's phone book and the con- case letters, etc., turn TUNE to one of the field (2) at the top of the display. nected cell phone's phone book can be seen selections (see the explanation in the fol- The cursor can now be moved by in Phone menu Phone book Memory lowing table) in the list (1) and press OK/ turning TUNE to a position where status. MENU. new characters can be entered or deleted by pressing EXIT. In Clearing the phone book When you have finished entering the name, order to add characters, return to In phone mode, all entries in the infotainment select OK in the list in the display (1) and press text entry mode by pressing OK/ system's phone book can be cleared in Phone OK/MENU. Continue by entering the phone MENU. menu Phone book Clear phone book. number in the same way. When you have entered the phone number, Speed dial NOTE press OK/MENU and select a tag for the num- Speed dial numbers can be added in phone Clearing the entries in the infotainment sys- ber ( , , or ). mode in Phone menu Phone book Mobile phone Home Work General tem's phone book does not delete entries in Press OK/MENU to confirm. Speed dial. the cell phone's phone book. When all of the contact's information has been To use speed dial to make a call in phone 06 entered, select Save contact in the menu to mode, press a button on the center console save. keypad followed by OK/MENU. If a contact Bluetooth version information has not been saved on the speed dial number For information about the Bluetooth version 123/ Toggle between letters and num- used, you will be prompted to save a contact installed in the vehicle, go to Phone menu ABC bers by pressing OK/MENU. on the number selected. Phone settings Bluetooth software version in car. More Switch to special characters by Accept vCards pressing OK/MENU. vCards from other cell phones can be added to the infotainment system's phone book. To ena- OK Save and return to Add contact ble this feature, put the infotainment system in by pressing OK/MENU. discoverable mode for Bluetooth. The feature

247 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

Introduction WARNING Languages The infotainment system's voice control fea- 1 As the driver, you have full responsibility for ture enables the driver to voice-activate cer- operating the vehicle safely and adhering to tain functions in a Bluetooth-connected cell all applicable traffic regulations. phone or the navigation system. The voice control feature provides access to a NOTE number of functions in the Bluetooth hands- • The information in this section applies free and navigation systems while allowing you to using voice commands to operate a to keep your hands on the steering wheel. Input Bluetooth-connected cell phone. is in dialogue form using spoken commands See also the section "Bluetooth from the user and verbal prompts from the sys- hands-free connection" beginning on tem. Voice control uses the same microphone page 240 for detailed information about as the Bluetooth hands-free system (see the List of languages. using a cell phone with the vehicle's illustration on page 240) and system prompts infotainment system. are provided through the infotainment sys- Voice control is not available for all languages. The available languages are indicated by the The navigation system has a separate tem's front speakers. • icon. The language can be changed in the user's guide containing information about voice commands for operating MY CAR menu system under MY CAR that system. . 06 Settings System options Language

Voice commands offer convenience and help avoid distractions so that you can concentrate on driving and focus your attention on road and traffic conditions.

1 Available in vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System only

248 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

Getting started • When giving commands, speak at your This feature can be accessed by pressing the usual speed and in a normal tone of voice MY CAR button in the center console and turn- after the tone ing TUNE. • The vehicle's doors, windows and moon- Tutorial roof should be closed when using the voice The tutorial feature can be started in two ways: control system • Avoid background noises in the cabin NOTE when using the system The tutorial feature can only be started when NOTE the vehicle is parked and the parking brake is applied. If you are uncertain of the commands that you can use, saying "help" will prompt the By pressing the voice control button and system to provide a number of commands • Voice control button (1) on the steering wheel. that can be used in a specific situation. saying "Voice tutorial." • By pressing MY CAR and going to Activating the system Voice control commands can be cancelled Settings Voice settings Voice Before any phone voice commands can be by: tutorial. Press OK/MENU to begin the used, a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must Saying "cancel" • tutorial lesson. be paired with the infotainment system. If a • Not speaking phone command is given, the system will The tutorial is divided into three lessons, which Pressing and holding the voice control 06 inform you If there is no cell phone paired. See • take a total of approximately 5 minutes to com- button page 241 for information on pairing a cell plete. phone. • Pressing EXIT or one of the mode but- By default, the system will begin with the first tons (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.). Press the voice control button (1 in the illustra- lesson. To skip to the next lesson, press the tion) to activate the system and initiate a com- voice control button and say "next." Go back mand dialogue. The system will display com- Voice control support feature to a previous lesson by saying "previous." : A feature that helps acquaint you monly used commands on the screen when the • Tutorial Press and hold the voice control button to exit with the system and the procedure for giv- button has been pressed. the tutorial. ing commands. While using the voice control system, keep the following points in mind:

249 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

Voice output volume The following is a list of features that can be User action Press MY CAR and go to Settings Voice voice-controlled with a Bluetooth-connected Begin saying the digits in the phone number. If settings Voice output volume. Press OK/ cell phone. you say several digits and pause, the system will repeat them and prompt you by saying MENU and turn TUNE to raise or lower the Shortcuts "Continue." volume. Press EXIT to save the change and Shortcut commands for using the phone can exit the menu. be found in the MY CAR menu system, under Continue saying the digits. When you have finished, complete the command by saying Settings Voice settings Voice "Dial." Using voice commands command list Phone commands and The driver initiates a voice command dialogue General commands. See page 189 for more • You can also change the number by using by pressing the voice control button (see the information on the menu system. the commands "Correction" (which dele- illustration on page 249). tes the last group of digits spoken) or Dialing a number "Delete" (which will erase the entire phone When a dialogue has been initiated, commonly The system understands the digits zero to nine. number). used commands will be shown in the display. These numbers can be spoken individually, in Grayed-out texts or texts in parentheses are Dialing from a call list groups of several digits at a time, or the entire not part of the spoken command. The dialogue below enables you make a call number can be given at once. Numbers above from one of your cell phone's call lists. Once you become familiar with the system, you nine will not be recognized. can speed up the command dialogue by briefly The user initiates the dialogue by saying: The following is an example of a voice com- pressing the voice control button to skip Phone > dial from call list 06 mand dialogue. The system's response may prompts from the system. vary depending on the situation. or Commands can be given in several ways. Phone dial from call list For example, the command "Phone call con- The user initiates the dialogue by saying: tact" can be spoken as: Phone > dial number Continue by responding to the system's prompts. • "Phone > Call contact"—say "Phone," wait or for a system response, and then continue Phone dial number Calling a contact by saying "Call contact." System response The dialogue below enables you to call the pre- • "Phone call contact"—give the entire com- Number please defined contacts in your cell phone. See the mand at one time phone's user's guide if necessary.

250 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

The user initiates the dialogue by saying: Continue by responding to the system's Phone > call contact prompts. or Phone call contact Continue by responding to the system's prompts. When calling contacts, keep the following in mind: • If there are several contacts with similar names, they will be presented in the display in numbered lines and the system will prompt you to pick a line number • If there are more lines in the list than can be displayed at one time, saying "Down" will enable you to scroll downward in the list (and saying "up" will take you back up through the list). 06 Dialing voice mail The dialogue below enables you to call your voice mail to check any messages that you may have received. Your voice mail phone number must be registered in the Bluetooth function, see page 244. The user initiates the dialogue by saying: Phone > dial voice mail or Phone dial voice mail

251 Driving recommendations...... 254 Refueling...... 257 Loading...... 262 Towing a trailer...... 265 Emergency towing...... 268

252 DURING YOUR TRIP 07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

General information • Do not exceed posted speed limits. WARNING Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra • Driving with the trunk open: Driving with Economical driving conserves natural load) in the vehicle. resources the trunk open could lead to poisonous Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire Better driving economy may be obtained by • exhaust gases entering the passenger com- pressure regularly (when tires are cold). partment. If the trunk must be kept open for thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops any reason, proceed as follows: and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to • Remove snow tires when threat of snow or immediate traffic conditions. ice has ended. • Close the windows Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, Set the ventilation system control to air Observe the following rules: • • increase air resistance and also fuel con- flow to floor, windshield and side win- • Bring the engine to normal operating tem- sumption. dows and the blower control to its high- perature as soon as possible by driving • At highway driving speeds, fuel consump- est setting. with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for tion will be lower with the air conditioning the first few minutes of operation. A cold on and the windows closed than with the Weight distribution affects handling engine uses more fuel and is subject to air conditioning off and the windows open. increased wear. At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a • Using the onboard trip computer's fuel tendency to understeer, which means that the • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle consumption modes can help you learn steering wheel has to be turned more than for driving short distances. This does not how to drive more economically. might seem appropriate for the curvature of a allow the engine to reach normal operating bend. This ensures good stability and reduces temperature. Other factors that decrease gas mileage are: the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that • Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration these properties can alter with the vehicle load. and hard braking. • Dirty air cleaner The heavier the load in the trunk, the less the • Use the transmission's Drive (D) position • Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter tendency to understeer. as often as possible and avoid using kick- • Dragging brakes 07 down. Handling, roadholding • Incorrect front end alignment Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure • Using the transmission's Sport mode1 may Some of the above mentioned items and others increase fuel consumption somewhat. Use all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check the transmission's Drive (D) position as are checked at the standard maintenance that the tires are inflated to the recommended often as possible. See page 119 for addi- intervals. pressure according to the vehicle load. See the tional information about Sport mode. "Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis-

1 Certain models only.

254 07 During your trip

Driving recommendations tributed so that capacity weight or maximum CAUTION WARNING permissible axle loads are not exceeded. • Engine damage will occur if water is The cooling fan may start or continue to Driving through water drawn into the air cleaner. operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off. • The vehicle can be driven through water up • If the vehicle is driven through water to a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm), deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). enter the differential and the transmis- • Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of • Take particular care when driving through sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating the grille when driving in hot weather con- flowing water. capacity and may shorten the service ditions. • Clean the electrical connections for trailer life of these components. • Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm wiring after driving in mud or water. • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil temperature could become too high. • When driving through water, maintain low water up to the door sills longer than speed and do not stop in the water. absolutely necessary. This could result in electrical malfunctions. Conserving electrical current Keep the following in mind to help minimize If the engine has been stopped while the WARNING • battery drain: vehicle is in water, do not attempt to After driving through water, press lightly on restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of • When the engine is not running, avoid the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes the water. using ignition mode II. Many electrical sys- are functioning normally. Water or mud can tems (the audio system, the optional navi- make the brake linings slippery, resulting in gation system, power windows, etc) will delayed braking effect. Engine and cooling system function in ignition modes 0 and I. These Under special conditions, for example when modes reduce drain on the battery. driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and • Please keep in mind that using systems, cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol- accessories, etc., that consume a great deal of current when the engine is not run- 07 lows to avoid overheating the engine. ning could result in the battery being com- • Maintain a low speed when driving with a pletely drained. Driving or having the trailer up long, steep hills. engine running for approximately • Do not turn the engine off immediately 15 minutes will help keep the battery when stopping after a hard drive. charged.

255 07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

Before a long distance trip • Consider your destination. If you will be Moreover, the capacity of the battery It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle driving through an area where snow or ice decreases as the temperature drops. In checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- are likely to occur, consider snow tires. very cold weather, a poorly charged bat- ice technician before driving long distances. tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there- Cold weather precautions Your retailer will also be able to supply you with fore advisable to check the state of charge If you wish to check your vehicle before the bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil approach of cold weather, the following advice your use in the event that problems occur. on the battery posts. is worth noting: • Volvo recommends the use of snow tires As a minimum, the following items should be Make sure that the engine coolant contains on all four wheels for winter driving, see checked before any long trip: • 50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture page 286. • Check that engine runs smoothly and that will reduce freeze protection. This gives • To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from fuel consumption is normal. protection against freezing down to freezing, add washer solvents containing • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage –31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" anti- antifreeze. This is important since dirt is freeze is not approved by Volvo. Different • Have the transmission oil level checked. often splashed on the windshield during types of antifreeze must not be mixed. winter driving, requiring the frequent use of • Check condition of drive belts. • Volvo recommends using only genuine the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer • Check state of the battery's charge. Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and • Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this 4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part well), and replace those that are worn. helps prevent the formation of condensa- washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to Check tire pressures. tion in the tank. In addition, in extremely 0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and 2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): add fuel line de-icer before refueling. steering gear should be checked by a 1 part washer solvent and 1 part water. trained and qualified Volvo service techni- • The viscosity of the engine oil is important. Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. cian only. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves • 07 • Check all lights, including high beams. cold-weather starting as well as decreas- • Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can ing fuel consumption while the engine is cause damage to the locks. • Reflective warning triangles are legally warming up. 0W-30 oil is recommended for required in some states/provinces. driving in areas with sustained low temper- • Have a word with a trained and qualified atures. Volvo service technician if you intend to • The load placed on the battery is greater drive in countries where it may be difficult during the winter since the windshield wip- to obtain the correct fuel. ers, lighting, etc., are used more often.

256 07 During your trip

Refueling

Fuel requirements ness of the emission control system and could sonal air quality standards, some areas require result in loss of emission warranty coverage. the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Deposit control gasoline (detergent State and local vehicle inspection programs Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen- additives) will make detection of misfueling easier, pos- ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis- on page 258 must still be met. oline to control engine deposits. Detergent fueled vehicles. gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and Alcohol – Ethanol intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit NOTE Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume control gasolines will help ensure good driva- may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". an octane enhancing additive called methyl- whether the gasoline contains deposit control cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to additives, check with the service station oper- (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission 15% MTBE may be used. ator. Control System performance may be affected, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc- Methanol NOTE tion indicator light) located on your instru- Do not use gasolines containing methanol ment panel may light. If this occurs, please (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice Volvo does not recommend the use of exter- return your vehicle to a trained and qualified nal fuel injector cleaning systems. Volvo service technician for service. can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered under Unleaded fuel Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers, the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter "Oxygenated fuels" and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv- "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or ering unleaded gasoline be labeled "UNLEA- ethers. In some areas, state or local laws DED". Only these pumps have nozzles which require that the service pump be marked indi- 07 fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis- cating use of alcohols or ethers. However, pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled there are areas in which the pumps are "unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is damages the three-way catalytic converter and alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated with the service station operator. To meet sea- use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-

257 07 During your trip

Refueling

Octane rating NOTE ers, or other store-bought additives to your vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Minimum octane When switching to higher octane fuel or Overuse may damage your engine, and some changing gasoline brands, it may be neces- of these additives contain organically volatile sary to fill the tank more than once before a difference in engine operation is noticeable. chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals.

Fuel Formulations WARNING Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. Never carry a cell phone that is switched Besides damaging the exhaust emission con- on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been rings, this may cause a spark that could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. injury.

G028920 Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to WARNING Typical pump octane label certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per- where you must fill your own gas tank, take Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, formance, but using 87 octane1 or above will precautions. These may include: and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust not affect engine reliability. gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes • standing upwind away from the filler nozzle inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger while refueling Demanding driving compartment is ventilated, and immediately • refueling only at gas stations with vapor return the vehicle to a trained and qualified In demanding driving conditions, such as oper- Volvo service technician for correction. ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, recovery systems that fully seal the mouth or driving for extended periods at higher alti- of the filler neck during refueling 07 tudes than normal, it may be advisable to • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to fuel filler nozzle. change gasoline brands to fully utilize your engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos- Use of Additives sible operation. With the exception of gas line antifreeze during winter months, do not add solvents, thicken-

1 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

258 07 During your trip

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler door tral locking button does not lock the fuel Manually opening the fuel filler door filler door. • Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and is completely closed after refueling. • Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot weather. Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click indicates that it is closed.

CAUTION • Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In addition to causing damage to the environment, gasolines containing The fuel filler door is located on the right rear If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened alcohol can cause damage to painted fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel manually: surfaces, which may not be covered tank symbol on the information display ) under the New Vehicle Limited War- 1. Open the side hatch in the trunk (on the ranty. With the ignition switched off, press and same side as the fuel filler door). release the button on the lighting panel to 2. Grasp the green cord with a handle. unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the 3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the the fuel filler door clicks open. vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks. 07 • If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is being refueled, this feature enables you to lock the doors/trunk while leaving the fuel filler door unlocked. • You can also keep the vehicle locked if you remain inside it during refueling. The cen-

259 07 During your trip

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel cap CAUTION avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter. 2 • Do not refuel with the engine running . • Do not park your vehicle over combustible Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the materials, such as grass or leaves, which ignition is on, an incorrect reading could can come into contact with the hot exhaust occur in the fuel gauge. system and cause such materials to ignite • Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not under certain wind and weather condi- press the handle on the filler nozzle tions. more than one extra time. Too much fuel • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of in the tank in hot weather conditions can one minute), or an intermittently firing or cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling flooded engine can cause three-way cata- could also cause damage to the emis- lytic converter or exhaust system over- sion control systems. heating. Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the • Remember that tampering or unauthorized filler cap slowly. Emission controls modifications to the engine, the Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille- After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turn- Three-way catalytic converter gal and can cause three-way catalytic con- ing it clockwise until it clicks into place. • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain verter or exhaust system overheating. This engine malfunctions, particularly involving includes: altering fuel injection settings or the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition components, altering emission system systems, may cause unusually high three- components or location or removing com- way catalytic converter temperatures. Do ponents, and/or repeated use of leaded not continue to operate your vehicle if you fuel. detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of 07 power or other unusual operating condi- NOTE tions, such as engine overheating or back- firing. A properly tuned engine will help Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with three-way catalytic converters.

2 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

260 07 During your trip

Refueling

Heated oxygen sensors The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed into a control module that continuously monitors engine functions and controls fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously adjusted for efficient combus- tion to help reduce harmful emissions.

261 07 During your trip

Introduction WARNING Load anchoring eyelets The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is Stop the engine, put the gear selector in determined by factors such as the number of • P, and apply the parking brake when passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight loading or unloading long objects. of any accessories that may be installed, etc. • The vehicle's driving characteristics To increase loading space, the rear seat back- may change depending on the weight rests can be folded down, see page 89. and distribution of the load. When loading the trunk, keep the following in • A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a mind: force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h). The trunk lid can be unlocked an pop- ped open slightly via the button • The rear seat should not be loaded to a located on the lighting panel, see page 67. level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear side windows. • Load objects in the trunk against the back- Objects placed higher than this level The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the rest whenever possible. could impede the function of the Volvo vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to help • Unstable loads can be secured to the load Inflatable Curtain. anchor items in the trunk. anchoring eyelets with straps or web lash- ings to help keep them from shifting. Folding down the rear seat backrests • Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long The rear seat backrests can be folded down for objects. The gear selector can be knocked additional loading space, see page 90. out of position by long loads, which could set the vehicle in motion. 07

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 During your trip

WARNING The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags in place. • Cover sharp edges on long loads to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the 1. Open the hatch in the floor of the trunk. load to help prevent shifting during sud- 2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap. den stops. • Always secure large and heavy objects Ski hatch with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps. • Always secure the load to help prevent it from moving in the event of sudden There is a hatch in the right section of the rear stops. seat backrest that can be opened for transportation. • Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P Fold the right backrest forward. when loading and unloading the vehicle. Release the hatch in the rear seat backrest by sliding the catch up while folding the Grocery bag holder* hatch forward. Return the backrest to the upright position with the hatch open. Use the seat belt to prevent the load from moving.

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the trunk

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263 07 During your trip

WARNING Volvo has developed especially for your vehicle. Always secure the load to help prevent • Volvo-approved removable roof racks are it from moving in the event of sudden • designed to carry the maximum allowable braking. roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg). • Switch off the engine, apply the parking For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man- brake and put the gear selector in P ufacturer's weight limits for the rack. when loading and unloading the vehicle. • Never exceed the rack manufacturer's weigh limits and never exceed the maxi- The cover on the rear seat armrest/child seat mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg). has no hinge. The cover must be removed • Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads before the ski hatch is used. evenly. Removal: • Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the load. – Open the cover 30 degrees and lift straight up. • Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate tie-down equipment. Installation: • Check periodically that the load carriers – Insert the cover in the grooves behind the and load are properly secured. upholstery and close the cover. • Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity and handling change when you Roof loads carry a load on the roof. • The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel con- Using load carriers 07 sumption will increase with the size of the Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso- load. ries. Observe the following points when in use: • Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast • To avoid damaging your vehicle and to cornering and hard braking. achieve maximum safety when driving, we recommend using the load carriers that

264 07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

Introduction when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. WARNING Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer Use a lower gear and turn off the air con- Bumper-attached trailer hitches must hitches that are specially designed for the vehi- ditioner if the temperature gauge needle • not be used on Volvos, nor should cle. enters the red range. safety chains be attached to the If the automatic transmission begins to • bumper. NOTE overheat, a message will be displayed in the text window. • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle See page 344 for the maximum trailer and rear axle must not be used. Avoid overload and other abusive opera- tongue weights recommended by Volvo. • tion. • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to the vehicle Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil- Observe the legal requirements of the • brake system, nor a trailer's lighting • ity, and economy. state/province in which the vehicles are system directly to the vehicle lighting It is necessary to balance trailer brakes All Volvo models are equipped with • system. Consult your nearest author- • with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump- ized Volvo retailer for correct installa- safe stop (check and observe state/local ers. Trailer hitch installation should not tion. regulations). interfere with the proper operation of this • When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety bumper system. • Do not connect the trailer's brake system wire must be correctly fastened to the directly to the vehicle's brake system. Trailer towing does not normally present any hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch particular problems, but take into considera- • More frequent vehicle maintenance is on the vehicle. The safety wire should tion: required. never be fastened to or wound around the drawbar ball. Remove the ball holder when the hitch is Increase tire pressure to recommended full • • not being used. pressure. See the tire inflation table on page 279. • Volvo recommends the use of synthetic engine oil when towing a trailer over long When your vehicle is new, avoid towing 07 • distances or in mountainous areas. heavy trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km). • Maximum speed when towing a trailer: 50 mph (80 km/h). • Engine and transmission are subject to increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant temperature should be closely watched

265 07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

NOTE Detachable trailer hitch (accessory) 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch assembly/ball holder. • When parking the vehicle with a trailer on a hill, apply the parking brake before 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end putting the gear selector in P. Always of the locking bolt. follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking. Removing the ball holder 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt C • When starting on a hill, put the gear and slide the locking bolt out of the ball selector in D before releasing the park- holder/hitch assembly. ing brake. See also page 125 for more detailed information about starting off D 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem- E on a hill while towing a trailer. B bly.

• If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift A G010496 positions while towing a trailer, make NOTE Ball holder sure the gear you select does not put A cover for the hitch assembly is also too much strain on the engine (using too Locking bolt included in the kit. high a gear). • The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may Cotter pin be rated for trailers heavier than the Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) Hitch assembly vehicle is designed to tow. Please Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer Safety wire attachment help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer weights. when the vehicle and trailer have begun to • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of Installing the ball holder sway and is part of the Dynamic Stability and more than 15%. 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from Traction Control system (DSTC). See page 07 the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt 130 for information on DSTC. out of the hitch assembly. Trailer cable Function An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem- A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has bly. various reasons. Normally this only occurs at 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one high speeds but, for example, if the trailer is Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on in the hitch assembly. overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed the ground. in the trailer, there is risk of swaying at speeds

266 07 During your trip

Towing a trailer between approximately 45-55 mph (70-90 km/ movement. If the system detects a tendency to h). sway, the brakes are applied individually on the front wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on Swaying may be caused by factors such as: the vehicle and trailer. This is often enough to • The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden, enable the driver to regain control of the vehi- strong crosswind cle. • The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an If this is not adequate to stop the swaying uneven road surface or drive over a bump motion, the brakes are applied to all of the • Sudden movements of the steering wheel wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is equipped with brakes, and engine power is Facts about TSA temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion • TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi- begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer have mately 40 mph (60 km/h) once again become stable, TSA will no stop • The DSTC symbol ( ) in the instru- regulating the brakes/engine power and the ment panel will flash when TSA is working driver regains control of the vehicle. • If the driver switches off the DSTC system's Spin Control function, TSA will also be switched off (but will be on again the next time the engine is started) • TSA may not intervene when the vehicle and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries to compensate for the swaying motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly 07 How TSA works Once swaying has begun, it can be very difficult to stop, which makes it difficult to control the vehicle and trailer. The TSA system continuously monitors the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral

267 07 During your trip

Emergency towing

Towing eyelet sides of either the front or rear bumper (see NOTE illustration). On certain models equipped with a trailer There are two different types of covers over hitch, the towing eyelet cannot be screwed the openings for the towing eyelet and they into the hole in the rear bumper. The towing have to be opened differently. rope should be attached to the trailer hitch instead. For this reason, the detachable • If the cover has a notch, insert a coin, section of the trailer hitch should be safely etc., into the notch and pry open the stowed in the vehicle at all times. edge of the cover. Open the cover completely and remove it.

Location of the towing eyelet • If the cover has a mark along one edge or in a corner, press the mark while pry- ing out the opposite side/corner using a coin, etc. Open the cover and remove it. Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand and then using the tire iron until it is securely in place. After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet should be removed and returned to its storage location. Press the cover for the attachment point back into position.

07 Removing the front/rear covers Attaching the towing eyelet The towing eyelet is located under the floor of the trunk. This eyelet must be screwed into the positions provided on the right

268 07 During your trip

Emergency towing

WARNING Towing the vehicle CAUTION 1. With the remote key fully pressed into the • When the vehicle is being towed, the General towing precautions: ignition slot1, press START/STOP ignition should be in mode II (in mode I, • Please check with state and local all of the vehicle's airbags are deacti- ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds to activate ignition mode II. authorities before attempting this type vated). See page 85 for more informa- of towing, as vehicles being towed are tion about ignition modes. 2. The remote key must remain in the ignition subject to regulations regarding maxi- • Never remove the remote key from the slot2 for the entire time that the vehicle is mum towing speed, length and type of ignition slot when the vehicle is being being towed. towing device, lighting, etc. towed. For vehicles with keyless drive, 3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing • If the vehicle's battery is dead, attach the remote key must remain inside the vehicle slows down by applying light pres- jumper cables (see page 116) to provide vehicle. sure on the brake pedal. This will help pre- current for releasing the electric parking • The power brakes and power steering vent jarring movements of the vehicle brake and to move the gear selector will not function when the engine is not being towed. from the P position to N. If this is not running. Approximately 5 times more possible, see page 120 for information pressure will be required on the brake 4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop the about manually overriding the shiftlock pedal and the steering wheel will be vehicle being towed. system to move the gear selector from considerably harder to turn. P to N. • The towing eyelets must not be used for • Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for not exceed the maximum allowable any similar purpose involving severe towing speed. strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to • Maximum distance with front wheels on pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow ground: 50 miles (80 km). truck. The vehicle should only be towed in the • 07 forward direction.

1 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive. 2 For vehicles with the the optional keyless dirive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.

269 07 During your trip

Emergency towing

Having the vehicle towed by a tow truck Call for professional help from an authorized towing company.Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equipment.

CAUTION • The vehicle should always be towed in the forward direction. • Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)* that are being towed with the front wheels off the ground should not be towed at a speed above approx. 45 mph (70 km/h) and should not be towed farther than 30 miles (50 km). • If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck, the towing eyelet must not be used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Consult the tow truck operator.

270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 During your trip

271 General information ...... 274 Tire inflation...... 277 Inflation pressure ...... 279 Tire designations ...... 280 Glossary of tire terminology ...... 282 Vehicle loading ...... 283 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 285 Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires ...... 286 Temporary Spare ...... 287 Tire Sealing System...... 288 Changing a wheel ...... 294 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)...... 298

272 WHEELS AND TIRES 08 Wheels and tires

General information

Introduction without the "all-season" rating. However, for Tire rotation Your vehicle is equipped with tires according optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire to the vehicle's tire information placard on the roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on wear is affected by a number of factors such B-pillar (the structural member at the side of all four wheels. as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires style, etc. opening). are the same size designation, type (radial) and preferably from the same manufacturer, on all NOTE CAUTION four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering • If the tires are rotated, they should only Some Volvo models are equipped with an the car's roadholding and handling characte- be moved from front to rear or vice Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com- ristics. versa. They should never be rotated left bination designed to provide maximum dry to right/right to left. New Tires pavement performance with consideration Ideally, tire rotation should be done the for hydroplaning resistance. They may be • first time after approximately 3,000 more susceptible to road hazard damage and, depending on driving conditions, may miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles 6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. Some (30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped customers find that tire rotation may with Volvo’s advanced AWD or DSTC sys- help to get extra mileage from tire life. tem, these tires are not designed for winter • Tire rotation should only be performed driving, and should be replaced with winter if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and tires when weather conditions dictate. tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

The tires have good road holding characteris- Tire age tics and offer good handling on dry and wet Tires degrade over time, even when they are surfaces. It should be noted however that the not being used. It is recommended that tires tires have been developed to give these fea- Remember that tires are perishable goods. As generally be replaced after 6 years of normal tures on snow/ice-free surfaces. of 2000, the manufacturing week and year (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent Most models are equipped with "all-season" will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1510 means high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) 08 tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree that the tire illustrated was manufactured dur- exposure can accelerate the aging process. of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires ing week 15 of 2010). The temporary spare1 should also be replaced

1 Option or accessory on some models

274 08 Wheels and tires

General information at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the Summer and winter tires used. same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera- tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle. A tire's age can be determined by the DOT stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). Improving tire economy A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration • Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire should be replaced immediately. inflation table on page 279. • Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard Tread wear indicator braking and tire screeching. • Tire wear increases with speed. • Correct front wheel alignment is very

important. G021778 Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy • The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the and driving comfort. tire Tires must maintain the same direction of • When switching between summer and rotation throughout their lifetime. • winter tires, mark the tires to indicate • When replacing tires, the tires with the where they were mounted on the car, e.g., most tread should be mounted on the rear LF = left front, RR = right rear

G021829 wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer Tires with tread designed to roll in only one during hard braking. • direction are marked with an arrow on the The tires have wear indicator strips running • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the sidewall. tires and/or wheels permanently. across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI • Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's are printed on the side of the tire. When braking properties and ability to force approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the aside rain, snow and slush. tread, these strips become visible and indicate that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less • The tires with the most tread should always be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid- than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac- ding). tion. 08 • Contact a Volvo workshop if you are When replacing worn tires, it is recommended unsure about the tread depth. that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size

275 08 Wheels and tires

General information

Storing wheels and tires When storing complete wheels (tires mounted on rims), they should be suspended off the floor or placed on their sides on the floor. Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on their sides or standing upright, but should not be suspended.

CAUTION Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, dry, dark place, and should never be stored in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc.

WARNING • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo are specified to meet stringent stability and handling requirements. Unap- proved wheel/tire size combinations can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling. • Any damage caused by installation of unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from such 08 installations.

276 08 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

Inflation placard NOTE WARNING • The placards shown indicate inflation • Under-inflation is the most common pressure for the tires installed on the cause of tire failure and may result in vehicle at the factory only. severe tire cracking, tread separation, • A certain amount of air seepage from or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of the tires occurs naturally and tire pres- vehicle control and increased risk of sure fluctuates with seasonal changes injury. in temperature. Always check tire pres- • Under-inflated tires reduce the load car- sure regularly. rying capacity of your vehicle.

• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation When weather temperature changes occur, tire G032521 pressure, including the spare1, at least inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree Tire inflation placard once a month and before long trips. You temperature drop causes a corresponding are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check Tire inflation pressure gauge, as automatic service sta- your tire pressures frequently and adjust them Check tire inflation pressure regularly. tion gauges may be inaccurate. to the proper pressure, which can be found on See the tire inflation table on page 279. A tire • Use the recommended cold inflation pres- the vehicle's tire information placard or certifi- inflation pressure placard is also located on the sure for optimum tire performance and cation label. wear. driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at Checking tire pressure the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's • Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause door opening). This placard indicates the des- uneven treadwear patterns. Cold tires ignation of the factory-mounted tires on your Inflation pressure should be checked when the vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation pres- tires are cold. sure. The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after the 08 vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

1 Available as an accessory

277 08 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are Speed ratings (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular- you have to drive farther than this distance to ities. T 118 mph (190 km/h) pump your tire(s), check and record the tire 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ- pressure first and add the appropriate air pres- H 130 mph (210 km/h) ing the spare2. sure when you get to the pump. V 149 mph (240 km/h) If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, NOTE never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires W 168 mph (270 km/h) are hot from driving and it is normal for pres- • If you overfill the tire, release air by Y 186 mph (300 km/h) sures to increase above recommended cold pushing on the metal stem in the center pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge. Load ratings cold inflation pressure could be significantly See page 280 for an explanation of the load under-inflated. • Some spare tires (available as an accessory) require higher inflation pressure rating on the sidewall of the tire. To check inflation pressure: than the other tires. Consult the tire 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, inflation pressure table on page 279 or then firmly press the tire gauge onto the see the inflation pressure placard. valve. 2. Add air to reach the recommended air pressure. Tire ratings 3. Replace the valve cap. Speed ratings 4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there The speed ratings in the table translate as fol- are no nails or other objects embedded low: that could puncture the tire and cause an air leak. Speed ratings M 81 mph (130 km/h)

08 Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

2 Available as an accessory

278 08 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure table The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 277 for its location) for information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory. Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to five persons Front Rear psi (kPa) psi (kPa)

235/45 R17 Extra load 36 (250) 36 (250) 235/45 R17 SST Extra loadA

215/50 R17 Extra load 38 (260) 38 (260) 235/40 R18 Extra load

Temporary spare tireB 61 (420) 61 (420) T125/80R17

A Run-flat tire B Available as an accessory

NOTE Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts department for the most up-to-date specifications.

279 08 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

Information on the sidewall 1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters) 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The Terrain, AS = All Season 5 6 7 9 8 larger the number, the wider the tire. 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" in percent. and indicates that the tire meets all federal 4 3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the standards. The next two numbers or letters 10 symbol indicate that the vehicle is are the plant code where it was manufac- 3 tured, the next two are the tire size code equipped with optional self-supporting run and the last four numbers represent the flat tires1. See page 300 for more informa- 2 week and year the tire was built. For exam- 11 tion about these tires). 1 ple, 1510 means that the tire was manu- 12 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in factured during week 15 of 2010. The num- G010753 inches). bers in between are marketing codes used at the manufacturer's discretion. This infor- Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a mation helps a tire manufacturer identify a place standardized information on the sidewall load index of 95 equals a maximum load of tire for safety recall purposes. of all tires (see the illustration). 1521 lbs (690 kg). 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material The following information is listed on the tire speed at which the tire is designed to be Used: Indicates the number of plies indi- sidewall: driven for extended periods of time, carry- cates or the number of layers of rubber- The tire designation: ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. with correct inflation pressure. For exam- Tire manufacturers also must indicate the NOTE ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, (210 km/h). which include steel, nylon, polyester, and Please be aware that the following tire des- others. ignation is an example only and that this particular tire may not be available on your NOTE vehicle. The tire's load index and speed rating may not appear on the sidewall because they are 08 not required by law.

1 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

280 08 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire information placard located on the B-Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. 11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature grades: see page 285 for more information. 12. Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

281 08 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

Terms • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this The tire suppliers may have additional mark- unit of air pressure. chapter. ings, notes or warnings such as standard load, • B-pillar: The structural member at the side • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be radial tubeless, etc. of the vehicle behind the front door. cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem- • Tire information placard: A placard • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. perature is normally reached after the vehi- showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire cle has been parked for at least 3 hours. sizes, recommended inflation pressure, • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the and the maximum weight the vehicle can bead area and the tread. carry. • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim- • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num- eter of the tire that contacts the road when ber on the sidewall of each tire providing mounted on the vehicle. information about the tire brand and man- • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man- a tire and tube assembly upon which the ufacturer. tire beads are seated. : A measure of the • Inflation pressure • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating amount of air in a tire. the maximum load in pounds and kilo- • Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met- grams that can be carried by the tire. This ric tires designed to carry a maximum load rating is established by the tire manufac- at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. turer. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond • Maximum permissible inflation this pressure will not increase the tires load pressure: the greatest amount of air pres- carrying capability. sure that should ever be put in the tire. This • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric limit is set by the tire manufacturer. tires designed to carry a heavier maximum • Recommended tire inflation pressure: load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric inflation pressure, established by Volvo, tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure which is based on the type of tires that are beyond this pressure will not increase the mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This 08 tire's load carrying capability. information can be found on the tire infla- • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- tion placard(s) located on the driver's side sure.

282 08 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

Loads Permissible axle weight 2. Determine the combined weight of the Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi- The maximum allowable weight that can be driver and passengers that will be riding in mum return of vehicle design performance. carried by a single axle (front or rear). These your vehicle. numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ with the following terms for determining your and passengers from XXX kilograms or CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must XXX pounds. vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a never exceed its maximum permissible weight. trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian 4. The resulting figure equals the available Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ Gross vehicle weight (GVW) amount of cargo and luggage load CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount tion placard: gers. equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the Curb weight amount of available cargo and luggage The weight of the vehicle including a full tank NOTE load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not • The location of the various labels in your (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) include passengers, cargo, or optional equip- vehicle can be found on page 340. ment. • A table listing important weight limits for 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage your vehicle can be found on page and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Capacity weight 344. That weight may not safely exceed the All weight added to the curb weight, including available cargo and luggage load capacity cargo and optional equipment. When towing, calculated in Step 4. trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo Steps for Determining Correct Load 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load weight. Limit from your trailer will be transferred to your 1. Locate the statement "the combined vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine NOTE weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi- how this reduces the available cargo and For trailer towing information, please refer to cle's placard. luggage load capacity of your vehicle. the section "Towing a trailer" on page 265.

1 See page 265.

283 08 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

WARNING • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, gross vehicle weight, or any other weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent defor- mation or catastrophic failure. • Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the correct load carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo retailer for information.

284 08 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grading information may have poor traction performance. The trac- WARNING ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST tion grade assigned to this tire is based on The temperature grade for this tire is estab- CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. lished for a tire that is properly inflated and REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE not overloaded. Excessive speed, under- GRADES inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa- WARNING rately or in combination, can cause heat Quality grades can be found, where appli- buildup and tire failure. cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread The traction grade assigned to this tire is shoulder and maximum section width. For based on braking (straight-ahead) traction example: tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A TREADWEAR TEMPERATURE The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested and C, representing the tire's resistance to the under controlled conditions on a specified gov- generation of heat and its ability to dissipate ernment test course. For example, a tire gra- heat when tested under controlled conditions ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. times as well on the government course as a Sustained high temperature can cause the tire graded 100. The relative performance of material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tires depends upon the actual conditions of tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to their use, however, and many depart signifi- sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds cantly from the norm due to variation in driving to a minimum level of performance that all pas- habits, maintenance practices and differences senger vehicle tires must meet under the Fed- in road characteristics and climate. eral Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance TRACTION on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are required by law. AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur- 08 faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

285 08 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

Winter driving conditions CAUTION cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail- ure to do so could reduce traction to an Snow chains • Check local regulations regarding the unsafe level or adversely affect handling. use of snow chains before installing. Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with • Do not mix tires of different design as this the following restrictions: • Use single-sided snow chains only. could also negatively affect overall tire road • Snow chains should be installed on front • Always follow the chain manufacturer's grip. wheels only. Use only Volvo approved installation instructions carefully. Install • Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads snow chains. chains as tightly as possible and in warm weather. They should be removed • If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires retighten periodically. when the winter driving season has ended. and wheels are installed and are of a size • Never exceed the chain manufacturer's • Studded tires should be run-in different than the original tires and wheels, specified maximum speed limit. (Under 300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during chains in some cases CANNOT be used. no circumstances should you exceed which the vehicle should be driven as Sufficient clearances between chains and 31 mph (50 km/h). smoothly as possible to give the studs the brakes, suspension and body components • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns opportunity to seat properly in the tires. must be maintained. when driving with snow chains. The tires should have the same rotational direction throughout their entire lifetime. • Some strap-on type chains will interfere • The handling of the vehicle can be with brake components and therefore adversely affected when driving with CANNOT be used. chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well NOTE • All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains as locked wheel braking. Please consult state or provincial regula- should only be installed on the front tions restricting the use of studded winter wheels. tires before installing such tires. Snow tires, studded tires1 • Certain size tires may not allow the assembly of snow chains/traction devices. Tires for winter use: • Owners who live in or regularly commute Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow through areas with sustained periods of chain information. snow or icy driving conditions are strongly advised to fit suitable winter tires to help retain the highest degree of traction. 08 • It is important to install winter tires on all four wheels to help retain traction during

1 Where permitted

286 08 Wheels and tires

Temporary Spare

Spare tire A spare tire can be purchased for your vehicle as an accessory. Follow the instructions included with the spare tire regarding use and stowing in the vehicle. See also page 294 for additional information.

287 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Location The 12-volt sockets are located in the front WARNING tunnel console and on the rear side of the center console in the rear seat, see page 208. • After using the tire sealing system, the vehicle should not be driven farther than Accessing the tire sealing system approximately 120 miles (200 km). The tire sealing system is stowed under the • Have the tire inspected by a trained and floor of the trunk. To access it: qualified Volvo service technician as 1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area. soon as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must be 2. Lift out the tire sealing system. replaced. • The vehicle should not be driven faster NOTE than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire • The tire sealing system is only intended that has been temporarily repaired with to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not the tire sealing system. Introduction the sidewall. • After using the tire sealing system, drive The vehicle is equipped with a tire sealing sys- • Tires with large holes or tears cannot be carefully and avoid abrupt steering tem that enables you to temporarily seal a hole repaired with the tire sealing system. maneuvers and sudden stops. in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, or • After use, stow the tire sealing system to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. properly to help prevent rattling. The system consists of an air compressor, a container for the sealing compound, wiring to connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a hose used to connect the system to the tire’s inflation valve.

NOTE 08 The tire sealing system's compressor has been tested and approved by Volvo.

288 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Tire sealing system–overview WARNING • Inhalation: Move the exposed person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medi- Please keep the following points in mind cal attention. when using the tire sealing system: • Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in unless directed to do so by medical per- the illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, sonnel. Get medical attention. natural and 2) ethanediol. These sub- Disposal: Dispose of this material and stances are harmful if swallowed. • its container to a hazardous or special • The contents of this bottle may cause waste collection point. allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the respiratory tract, the skin, the central nervous sys- NOTE tem, and the eyes. Do not break the seal on the bottle. This Precautions: Speed limit sticker occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder. • Keep out of reach of children. On/Off switch • Do not ingest the contents. Electrical wire • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with the skin. Bottle holder (orange cover) • Wash thoroughly after handling. Protective hose cover First aid: Air release knob • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Get medical attention Hose if symptoms occur. Bottle with sealing compound • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the Air pressure gauge upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. 08

289 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Tire sealing system–temporarily NOTE WARNING repairing a flat tire Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, Contact with the sealing compound may etc.) from the tire before using the sealing cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash system. the affected area immediately with soap and water. • Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is checked and adjusted if necessary. 4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle WARNING of sealing compound. Never leave the tire sealing system • NOTE unattended when it is operating. • Keep the tire sealing system away from Do not break the seal on the bottle. This children. occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder. • Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off the road and away from moving traffic. 5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder. • Apply the parking brake. WARNING Stage 1: Sealing the hole The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep 1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit. it securely in place and help prevent sealing

G014338 2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it compound leakage. Once in place, the bot- to the steering wheel hub where it will be tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two clearly visible to the driver. by a trained and qualified Volvo service stages: technician. 3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi- • Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be 6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla- sealing compound into the tire. The car is pressed down). tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys- 08 then driven a short distance to distribute the sealing compound in the tire. tem’s hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand.

290 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest WARNING CAUTION 12-volt socket in the vehicle. • Never stand next to the tire being inflated The compressor should not be used for when the compressor is in operation. more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid NOTE overheating. • If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire, Be sure that none of the other 12-volt sock- switch off the compressor immediately. ets is being used while the compressor is in operation. • If there is visible damage to the sidewall WARNING or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. If the pressure remains below 22 psi The vehicle should not be driven if this 8. Start the vehicle’s engine. (1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes, occurs. Contact a towing service or turn off the compressor. In this case, the Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle WARNING applicable. should not be driven. The vehicle´s engine should be running when the tire sealing system is used to avoid NOTE 11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket. is parked in a well ventilated place, or out- The air pressure gauge will temporarily doors, before using the system. show an increase in pressure to approxi- 12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com- valve and reinstall the valve cap. pound is being pumped into the tire. The 9. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor pressure should return to a normal level 13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi- by pressing the on/off switch to position I. after approximately 30 seconds. mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the sealing compound in the tire. 10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge.

291 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

CAUTION WARNING Replacing the sealing compound container If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the behavior, or noises should occur while driv- The sealing compound container must be use of the sealing compound may lead to ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a replaced if: incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps, • the tire sealing system has been used to cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. cracks, or other visible damage, and repair a tire Use the tire sealing system to check and recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure. is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue • the container’s expiration date has passed driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained (see the date on decal). and qualified Volvo service technician. NOTE NOTE • Safely stow the tire sealing system in a Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure • After use, the sealing compound bottle, convenient place as it will soon be used 1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri- the hose, and certain other system again to check the tire’s inflation pres- bed in stage 1. components must be replaced. Please sure. 2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this consult your Volvo retailer for replace- The empty bottle of sealing compound ment parts. • chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If cannot be removed from the bottle the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire • If the sealing compound bottle’s expi- holder. Consult a trained and qualified sealing system’s compressor. If neces- ration date has passed, please take it to Volvo service technician to have the a Volvo retailer or a recycling station bottle removed and properly disposed sary, release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise. that can properly dispose of harmful of. substances. CAUTION The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.

WARNING 08 If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 hour, check the inflation pressure in the damaged tire again before continuing.

292 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Inflating tires WARNING 9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off The tire sealing system can be used to inflate switch to position 0) when the correct infla- The vehicle’s engine should be running the tires. To do so: • tion pressure has been reached. when the tire sealing system is used to 1. Park the car in a safe place. avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure 10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated valve and reinstall the valve cap. 2. The compressor should be switched off. place, or outdoors, before using the sys- Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the tem. The parking brake should be 12-volt socket. 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be securely applied and the gear selector pressed down). should be in the P (park) position. 3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. • Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle when the engine is running. 4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the hose connector 7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the onto the valve as tightly as possible by gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to hand. get a clear reading from the pressure 5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest gauge. 12-volt socket in the vehicle. 8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this chap- 6. Start the vehicle’s engine. ter for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s compressor (press the on/off switch to position I). If necessary, release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid 08 overheating.

293 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

Removing a wheel table on page 279 and in the tire inflation placard on the driver's side door jamb at the rear of the driver's door opening.

Vehicle with four loading hooks Location of jack and tools Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out toward you. Secure the stitched strap hooks in Spare wheel Vehicle with two loading hooks the front loading eyelets. Secure the long strap The following instructions only apply if you in one of the front loading eyelets, wrap the Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag in have purchased an accessory temporary strap diagonally over the spare wheel and toward the rear seat. Secure the stitched strap spare wheel for your vehicle. If there is no through the upper handle. Secure the short hooks in the loading eyelets. Secure the long temporary spare wheel in your vehicle, please strap on the long strap. Secure in the rear load- strap in one of the loading eyelets, wrap the see page 288 for instructions on using the tire ing eyelet and tighten. sealing system. strap around the spare wheel and through the lower handle. Secure the short strap on the The accessory temporary spare wheel is prolong strap. Secure in the other loading eyelet WARNING vided in a bag that must be securely strapped and tighten. Current legislation prohibits the use of the in place in the trunk while the vehicle is being “Temporary Spare” tire other than as a tem- driven. porary replacement for a punctured tire. It The spare wheel is only intended for temporary must be replaced as soon as possible by a use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as standard tire. Road holding and handling 08 may be affected with the “Temporary possible. The vehicle's handling may be Spare” in use. altered by the use of the spare wheel. The correct tire pressure is stated in the tire pressure

294 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

CAUTION WARNING The vehicle must never be driven with more • If there is a wheel in the bag, the bag must than one temporary spare wheel. be securely restrained using its straps and the load anchoring eyelets in the Taking out the spare wheel trunk. Carefully follow the instructions on page 294 1. Release the bag's retaining straps. • If the wheel with the punctured tire is too 2. Lift the bag out of the vehicle and remove big to fit in the bag, it should be securely the spare wheel from the bag. restrained in the trunk using suitable 3. Fold up the floor hatch in the trunk. straps, a net for anchoring cargo, etc. 4. Remove the jack* and tools* from the foam block and change the wheels (see the instructions in the following section Changing a wheel "Changing a wheel"). 1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear Lug wrench and towing eyelet selector in P. 5. After changing wheels, return the jack and 5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug tools to the foam block and close the floor 2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the towing wrench as shown in the illustration. hatch. eyelet and the wheel cover removal tool* stowed under the floor of the trunk. 6. If possible, place the wheel with the punc- CAUTION 3. Remove the wheel cover (where applica- tured tire in the bag. The towing eyelet must be screwed into the ble) using the removal tool or remove the lug wrench as far as possible. 7. If there is a wheel in the bag, strap the bag wheel cover by hand. securely in place in the trunk. 4. Block the wheels that are on the ground with wooden blocks or large stones.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 295 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

WARNING • The jack must correctly engage the jack attachment. • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- slippery surface. • Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. • Use the jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle. Jack attachment points • Apply the parking brake and put the 7. There are two jack attachment points on gear selector in the Park (P) position. each side of the vehicle. Position the jack 6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the • Block the wheels standing on the correctly in the attachment (see the illus- lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or tration) and crank while simultaneously wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting down- large stones. guiding the base of the jack to the ground. ward (counterclockwise) pressure. The jack should be kept well-greased The base of the jack must be flat on a level, • and clean, and should not be damaged. firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising the vehicle, check that the jack is still cor- • No objects should be placed between rectly positioned in the attachment. the base of jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment 8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be bar on the vehicle. changed is lifted off the ground. 9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and remove the wheel.

296 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

NOTE 3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand- tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross- The jack provided with your vehicle is wise until all nuts are snug. intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in the 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter- event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came nately tighten the bolts crosswise to with your particular model should be used 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm). to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more frequently or for a prolonged 5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable). period, using a garage jack or hoist is rec- The opening in the wheel cover for the tire's ommended. Always follow this device’s inflation valve must be positioned over the instructions for use. valve.

Re-installing the wheel 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel and hub. 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

08 Tighten the lug nuts

297 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Introduction NOTE Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure NOTE er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- warning light will flash for approximately sure, even if under-inflation has not reached 1 minute and Tire press. syst Service USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002 the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low required will be displayed. This device complies with part 15 of the tire pressure telltale. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not Each tire, including the spare2 (if provided), Your vehicle has also been equipped with a cause harmful interference, and (2) this should be checked monthly when cold and TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when device must accept any interference inflated to the inflation pressure recommended the system is not operating properly. The received, including interference that may by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with cause undesired operation. placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your the low tire pressure telltale. When the system vehicle has tires of a different size than the size detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses sen- indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation approximately one minute and then remain sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla- pressure label, you should determine the continuously illuminated. This sequence will tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov- proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit As an added safety feature, your vehicle has function indicator is illuminated, the system inflation pressure data to a receiver located in been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring may not be able to detect or signal low tire the vehicle. system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may sure telltale when one or more of your tires is occur for a variety of reasons, including the When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when installation of replacement or alternate tires or will light up the tire pressure warning light the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS ( ) (also referred to as a telltale) in the should stop and check your tires as soon as from functioning properly. Always check the instrument panel and will display one of the possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one following messages in the text window: Tire sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to pressure low or tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel Tire needs air now. and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the function properly. 08 vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

1 Not available in all markets or in all models. 2 Available as an accessory

298 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

NOTE Changing wheels with TPMS CAUTION Please note the following when changing or TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/ When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press not replace normal tire maintenance. For the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the information on correct tire pressure, please tires on the vehicle: valve to help avoid bending or otherwise refer to the tire inflation pressure table in this • Only the factory-mounted wheels are damaging the valve. chapter or consult your Volvo retailer. equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves. • If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary NOTE Erasing warning messages spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS When a low tire pressure warning message has sensor. • If you change to tires with a different recommended inflation pressure, the been displayed, and the tire pressure warning If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun- • TPMS system must be recalibrated to light has come on: ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST these tires. On U.S. models, this must SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the be done by a trained and qualified Volvo each time the vehicle is driven above inflation pressure of all four tires. service technician. On Canadian mod- 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more. 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure els, see the following section "Recali- • Once TPMS sensors are properly installed, (consult the tire pressure placard or the brating TPMS." the warning message should not reappear. If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen- inflation pressure table on page 279. If the message is still displayed, drive the • sor is moved to another wheel, the sen- vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to sor's seal, nut, and valve core should be 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the drive the vehicle for several minutes at a replaced. speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This message. When installing TPMS sensors, the will erase the warning text and the warning Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be • • vehicle must be parked for at least light will go out. fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle. 15 minutes with the ignition off. If the Volvo does not recommend moving sen- vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a sors back and forth between sets of WARNING TPMS error message will be displayed. wheels. Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models vehicle. only)* 08 In certain cases, it may be necessary to recalibrate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recommended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 299 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

tion pressure table on page 279), for example, 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con- WARNING if higher inflation pressure is necessary when sole control panel and select Settings transporting heavy loads, etc. • SST tires should only be mounted by Car settings Tyre pressure service technicians who are familiar This is done in the vehicle's menu system. See 4. Select Tyre pressure system and press with tires of this type. page 189 for a description of the menu system. OK/MENU to turn the system on or off. • SST tires may only be mounted on vehi- To recalibrate: cles equipped with TPMS. 1. Switch off the engine. Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)* • Do not drive faster than 50 mph Self-supporting run flat tires are available as (80 km/h) if TPMS indicates that a tire 2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and has lost inflation pressure. put the ignition in mode I or II (see page optional equipment. The vehicle must be Do not drive farther than 50 miles 85 for additional information). equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring • System (TPMS) if tires of this type are installed. (80 km) before replacing a damaged 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con- SST tire. sole control panel and select Settings Tires of this type have specially reinforced sidewalls that make it possible to continue • Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hard braking or fast turns. Car settings Tyre pressure driving to a limited extent even though the tire 4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tyre has lost some or all of its inflation pressure. • SST tires must be replaced if they are damaged. A tire of this type cannot be pressure and press OK/MENU again. These tires are mounted on special rims (normal tires can also be mounted on these rims). repaired. 5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) continuously for at least If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yel- 10 minutes. low TPMS symbol illuminates in the instrument > When the calibration message is no panel and a text message is also displayed. If longer displayed, TPMS has been reca- this happens, reduce speed to not more than librated to the new inflation pressure. 50 mph (80 km/h). The tire should be replaced as soon as possible. Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian Drive carefully; it may be difficult to determine models only)* which tire is damaged. To find the damaged 1. Switch off the engine. tire, check the inflation pressure in all four tires. 08 2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see page 85 for additional information).

300 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Wheels and tires

301 Volvo maintenance...... 304 Maintaining your car...... 305 Hood and engine compartment...... 307 Engine oil...... 308 Fluids...... 310 Replacing bulbs...... 312 Wiper blades and washer fluid...... 318 Battery...... 320 Fuses...... 324 Vehicle care...... 332

302 MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Volvo maintenance

Introduction recommended that receipts for vehicle emis- prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance sion maintenance be retained in case ques- to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main- program outlined in the Warranty and Service tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec- tenance. The schedule includes components Records Information booklet. This mainte- tion and maintenance should also be per- that affect vehicle emissions. This page nance program contains inspections and serv- formed anytime a malfunction is observed or describes some of the emission-related com- ices necessary for the proper function of your suspected. ponents. vehicle. The maintenance services contain Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada several checks that require special tools and In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana- training, and therefore must be performed by a dian regulations, the following list of warranties qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top is provided. condition, specify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. • New Vehicle Limited Warranty • Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S. The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle • Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty manufacturers to furnish written instructions to • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys- the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper tems Limited Warranty servicing and function of the components that • Emission Design and Defect Warranty control emissions. These services, which are Emission Performance Warranty listed in the "Warranty and Service Records • Information" booklet, are not covered by the These are the federal warranties; other warran- warranty. You will be required to pay for labor ties are provided as required by state/provin- and material used. cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for Maintenance detailed information concerning each of the Your Volvo passed several major inspections warranties. before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance Periodic maintenance helps minimize procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv- emissions ice Records Information booklet, many of Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi- which will positively affect your vehicle's emis- cle running well. Your Warranty and Service sions, should be performed as indicated. It is Records Information booklet provides a com-

304 09 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car 09

Owner maintenance As needed: They are specially reinforced to bear the weight Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup under the front of the engine support frame. and Service Records Information booklet. of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt Take care not to damage the splash guard residues. under the engine. Ensure that the jack is posi- The following points can be carried out tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at between the normally scheduled maintenance Always use axle stands or similar structures. services. the base of the windshield, and from other places where they may collect. If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the Each time the car is refueled: front and rear lift arm pads should be centered • Check the engine oil level. NOTE under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, edge of the sill rail (see illustration). • Complete service information for qualified headlights, and taillights. technicians is available online for purchase or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. Emission inspection readiness Monthly: • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect What is an Onboard Diagnostic System the tires for wear. Hoisting the vehicle (OBD II)? • Check that engine coolant and other fluid OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized levels are between the indicated "min" and engine management system. It stores diagnos- "max" markings. tic information about your vehicle's emission • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass controls. It can light the Check Engine light cleaner and soft paper towels. (MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A • Wipe driver information displays with a soft "fault" is a component or system that is not cloth. performing within an expected range. A fault may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will Visually inspect battery terminals for cor- • store a message about any fault. rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal connector, or a battery near the end How do states use OBD II for emission of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo inspections? retailer for additional information. Many states connect a computer directly to a If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can two jack attachments points should be used. then read "faults." In some states, this type of

305 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Maintaining your car

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission way driving is typically needed to allow test. OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can provide you with more infor- How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission mation on planning a trip. inspection? • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- your vehicle's maintenance schedule. tion for any of the following reasons. • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your vehicle may fail inspection. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, but went out without any action on your part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in your area. • If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection. How can I prepare for my next OBD II emission inspection? • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was lit but went out without service, have your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. • If you recently had service for a lit Check Engine light, or if you had service that required disconnecting the battery, a period of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-

306 09 Maintenance and specifications

Hood and engine compartment 09

Opening and closing the hood Engine compartment, overview WARNING The cooling fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off.

WARNING Before performing any operations in the engine compartment, the ignition should always be completely switched off (in mode 0, see page 85) and there should be no remote keys in the passenger compartment. Coolant expansion tank The gear selector should be in the P (park) position. If the engine has been running, Power steering fluid reservoir wait until it has cooled before touching any components in the engine compartment. Dipstick-engine oil The distributor ignition system operates at Filler cap-engine oil very high voltages. Special safety precautions must be followed to prevent injury. Cover over brake fluid reservoir Turn the handle located under the left side Always turn the ignition off when: of the dash approximately 20-25 degrees Battery • Replacing distributor ignition compo- clockwise to release the hood lock. nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc. Relay/fuse box Lift the hood slightly. Press the release • Do not touch any part of the distributor control (located under the right front edge Washer fluid reservoir ignition system while the engine is run- of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood. ning. This may result in unintended The appearance of the engine compartment movements and body injury. may vary depending on engine model. WARNING Check that the hood locks properly when closed.

307 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Engine oil

Checking the engine oil Checking and adding oil NOTE The oil level should be checked at regular inter- Before checking the oil: vals, particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service. • The car should be parked on a level surface. • See page 346 for oil specifications. • If the engine is warm, wait for at least • Refer to the Warranty and Service Records 10 – 15 minutes after the engine has Information booklet for information on the been switched off. oil change intervals.

CAUTION

• Not checking the oil level regularly can G021734 result in serious engine damage if the oil level becomes too low. Location of the filler cap and dipstick • Oil that is lower than the specified quality can damage the engine. • Volvo does not recommend the use of oil additives. • Always add oil of the same type and

viscosity as already used. G021737

• Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX could cause an increase in oil consump- marks on the dipstick tion. Checking the oil Oil changes should be carried out by a • 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint- trained and qualified Volvo service tech- free rag. nician. Volvo recommends Castrol oil products 2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check the oil level. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

308 09 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil 09

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to the MIN mark, add approximately 0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil. 4. Recheck the level and add more oil if necessary until the level is near the MAX mark.

WARNING Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

309 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fluids

Coolant CAUTION WARNING • If necessary, top up the cooling system • Never remove the expansion tank cap with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze while the engine is warm. Wait until the only (a 50/50 mix of water and anti- engine cools. freeze). • If it is necessary to top off the coolant • Different types of antifreeze/coolant when the engine is warm, unscrew the may not be mixed. expansion tank cap slowly so that the • If the cooling system is drained, it overpressure dissipates. should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water/anti- Brake fluid freeze. Location of the coolant reservoir • The cooling system must always be kept filled to the correct level, and the Normally, the coolant does not need to be level must be between the MIN and changed. If the system must be drained, con- MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- can be high local temperatures in the nician. engine which could result in damage. See page 347 for information on cooling sys- Check coolant regularly! tem capacities. • Do not top up with water only. This reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it Location of the brake fluid reservoir should freeze. Checking the level • Do not use chlorinated tap water in the The fluid reservoir is concealed under the vehicle's cooling system. round cover at the rear of the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be accessed.

310 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids 09

The brake fluid should always be between the 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. WARNING MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res- The level must be between the MIN and ervoir. Check, without removing the cap, that MAX marks. If a problem should occur in the power there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir. steering system or if the vehicle has no electrical current and must be towed, it is still Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F Power steering fluid possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep (>280 °C), P/N 9437433 in mind that greater effort will be required to turn the steering wheel. Replace: The fluid should be replaced according to the intervals specified in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. CAUTION When driving under extremely hard conditions Keep the area around the power steering (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to fluid reservoir clean when checking. replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Always entrust brake fluid changing to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING Check the level frequently. The fluid does not • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark require changing. The fluid level must be in the reservoir or if a brake-related between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci- message is shown in the information ties and recommended fluid grade, see display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car page 347. towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. • Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any other type of brake fluid.

Filling 1. Turn and open the cover.

311 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Replacing bulbs

Introduction WARNING All bulb specifications are listed on page 317. Active Bending Lights* – due to the high The following bulbs should only be replaced by • voltage used by these headlights, these a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- bulbs should only be replaced by a cian: trained and qualified Volvo service tech- • Dome lighting nician. • Reading lights • Turn off the lights and remove the • Glove compartment lighting remote key from the ignition before changing any bulbs. • Footwell lighting • Turn signals in the door mirrors • Approach lighting in the door mirrors Headlight housing The entire headlight housing must be lifted out • Active Bending Lights and LED bulbs when replacing all front bulbs.

NOTE CAUTION For information regarding any other bulbs Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin- not mentioned in this section, please con- gers. Grease and oils from your fingers tact your Volvo retailer or a trained and vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit authorized Volvo service technician. on the reflector, which will damage it.

WARNING NOTE • The engine should not be running when • Always switch off the ignition before changing bulbs. starting to replace a bulb. • If the engine has been running just prior • The optional Active Bending Light bulbs to replacing bulbs in the headlight hous- contain trace amounts of mercury. ing, please keep in mind that compo- These bulbs should always be disposed nents in the engine compartment will be of by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- hot. ice technician.

312 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs 09

Removing the headlight housing 6. Replace the defective bulb(s). Removing the cover to access the 1. Switch off the ignition by briefly pressing bulbs the START/STOP ENGINE button. Reinserting the headlight housing 2. Remove the remote key from the ignition slot1. 3. (Upper illustration under "Headlight housing") Withdraw the headlight housing's locking pins. Remove the headlight housing by alternatively pulling the front and rear edges until it can be lifted out.

CAUTION 1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into NOTE place. When disconnecting the connector, pull on Before starting to replace a bulb, see the connector itself and not on the wiring. 2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking page 312. pins. The short locking pin should be clos- est to the grille. Check that they are cor- 4. (Lower illustration under "Headlight hous- 1. Loosen the cover's four retaining screws rectly inserted. The headlight housing must ing") with the tool (1) provided in the vehicle's be properly inserted and secured in place tool kit (see page 294). The screws should Unplug the wiring connector by holding before the lighting is switched on or the not be removed completely. down the clip with your thumb. remote key is inserted into the ignition slot. Pull out the connector with the other 3. Check that the lights function properly. hand. 5. Lift out the housing and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

313 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Replacing bulbs

CAUTION 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. Use the tool from the vehicle's tool kit to 5. The guide lug on the new bulb should be 5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn loosen the screws. A screwdriver or other straight up when the bulb is inserted into it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be sharp object could scratch the headlight. the holder and the bulb should snap into secured in one position. place. 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight 2. Push the cover to the side. 6. Put the cover back into position and rein- housing. stall the headlight housing. Reinstall the cover in the reverse order. 7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing. Low beam, Halogen High beam, Halogen Extra high beam2

1. Remove the headlight housing from the 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 312). vehicle (see page 312). 1. Remove the headlight housing from the 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see vehicle (see page 312). page 313). page 313). 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter- page 313). clockwise and pulling it straight out.

2 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

314 09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs 09

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter- 5. Press and turn the new bulb into place. 2. Press the catches together and pull out the clockwise and pulling it straight out. bulb holder. 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. housing. 3. Remove the defective bulb by pressing it in slightly and it turning counterclockwise 5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn 7. Put the cover back into position and rein- before pulling it out. it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be stall the headlight housing. secured in one position. 4. Insert a new bulb, press it in slightly and turn it clockwise. 6. Put the cover back into position and rein- Taillight housing stall the headlight housing. 5. Press the bulb holder until it clicks into place and reinstall the cover. Turn signals Location of taillight bulbs

The bulbs in the taillight cluster are replaced from inside the trunk (not the LED functions).

1. Remove the headlight housing from the NOTE Taillight lens, right side vehicle (see page 312). Before starting to replace a bulb, see Brake lights (LEDs) 2. Remove the cover by pulling it straight out. page 312. Brake light 3. Pull the holder to access the bulb. 1. Remove the covers in the left/right panel to Backup light 4. Press in the bulb and turn it to remove it access the bulb holder. from the holder.

315 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Replacing bulbs

Turn signals 4. Insert a new bulb, press it in slightly and Trunk lighting turn it clockwise. Rear fog light (driver’s side only) 5. Put the bulb holder in place and turn it clockwise. NOTE If an error message remains in the display License plate lighting after a faulty bulb has been replaced, contact an authorized Volvo workshop.

Backup lights G021758

NOTE Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 312.

The trunk lighting is located on opposite sides 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. of the trunk. 2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing and pull it out. 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the bulb housing comes loose. 1. Open the panel on the inside of the trunk 3. Replace the bulb. lid. 2. Replace the bulb. 4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and 2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun- tighten the screws. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press terclockwise. it back into the bulb housing. 3. Remove the defective bulb by pressing it in slightly and turning it counterclockwise before pulling it out.

316 09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs 09

Vanity mirror lighting Bulb specifications Lighting func- Wat- Bulb Removing the lens Lighting func- Wat- Bulb tion tage tion tage Brake light 21 P21W LL Extra high beam 55 H7 LL Trunk lighting 10 SV8.5 (models with Active (length Bending Lights*) 38mm) Low beam (halo- 55 H11 LL gen) NOTE High beam (halo- 65 H9 Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts gen) department for the most up-to-date specifications. Front turn signals 21 HY21W

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the side of License plate light- 5 C5W LL the lens and carefully pry up the lug on the ing edge. Vanity mirror light- 1.2 W2x4.6d 2. Carefully detach and lift out the lens. ing type T5 3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb Glove compart- 5 SV8.5 straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do ment lighting (length not exert too much pressure on the bulb 43mm) with the pliers to help avoid damaging it. Rear turn signals 21 PY21W SV Reinstalling the lens 1. Put the lens back into position. Rear fog light 21 H21W LL 2. Press it into place. Backup light 21 H21W LL

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Wiper blades and washer fluid

Wiper blades CAUTION button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (or The windshield wiper blades are different by starting the engine). Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longer position before attempting to move them to than the one on the passenger side. the service position. CAUTION Service position If the wiper arms have been folded out from 1. Insert the remote key into the ignition the windshield while in the service position, 1 fold them back against the windshield slot and press the START/STOP before returning the wipers to the normal ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in position to help avoid scratching the paint mode I (see page 85 for detailed informa- on the hood. tion about the ignition modes). 2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button Replacing the windshield wiper blades again briefly to switch the ignition off. 3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 second. > The wipers will then move to the vertical Wiper blades in service position (service) position on the windshield. The wiper blades must be in the vertical (service) position for replacement, washing or to lift NOTE them away from the windshield when e.g., After the wiper arms have been in the serv- removing ice or snow. To put them in this posi- ice position, the wipers must be switched on tion: and off at least once before the service position can be used again.

The wipers can be returned to the normal position by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE

1 Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

318 09 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid 09

To return the wipers from the service position ing cold weather, the reservoir should be filled to the normal position, fold the wipers back with windshield washer solvent containing against the windshield and press the START/ antifreeze. For capacities, see page 347. STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (or start the engine). Cleaning Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soap solution or car washing detergent.

Filling washer fluid

With the wipers in the service position, fold out the wiper arm from the windshield. Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull the wiper blade straight out, parallel with the wiper arm. Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks into place. Location of the washer fluid reservoir Check that the blade is securely in place. The windshield and headlight washers share a 4. Press the wipers back against the wind- common reservoir. shield. The washer fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side of the engine compartment. Dur-

319 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Battery

Warning symbols on the battery Risk of explosion may also further decrease the battery’s starting capacity. Wear protective goggles. • Because the battery’s starting capacity decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for Recycle properly an extended period of time or if the vehicle Keep away from children. is usually only driven short distances. • Never use a quick charger to charge the battery.

CAUTION Avoid smoking, open flames, and/or sparks. The infotainment system's energy-saving NOTE feature may not function correctly or at all, A used battery should be disposed of in an and/or a message may be displayed if a environmentally responsible manner. Con- battery charger or jumper cables are not See the owner's manual. sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to connected properly. a recycling station. • The negative terminal on the battery must never be used to connect a jumper cable or a battery charger. Only Handling the ground point on the chassis may be Contains corrosive acid. • Check that the battery cables are correctly used. connected and tightened. See page 116 for an illustration and addi- • Never disconnect the battery when the tional information. engine is running (for example, when replacing the battery). • If the battery is fully discharged a number of times, this may shorten its service life. • The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as the number of starts, driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold

320 09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery 09

WARNING • Never disconnect the battery when the Changing engine is running, or when the key is in the • Never expose the battery to open flame ignition. This could damage the vehicle's or electric spark. electrical system. • Do not smoke near the battery. • The battery should be disconnected from • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do the vehicle when a battery charger is used not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, directly on the battery. skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con- • To help keep the battery in good condition, tact occurs, flush the affected area the vehicle should be driven for at least 15 immediately with water. Obtain medical minutes a week or connected to a charger help immediately if eyes are affected. with an automatic charging function. • If the battery is fully discharged a number NOTE of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps The life of the battery is shortened if it prolong its service life. becomes discharged repeatedly. • The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as driving conditions and cli- Maintenance mate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery’s starting capacity. • Use a screw driver to open the caps or cover and a flashlight to inspect the level. • Because the battery’s starting capacity decreases with time, it may be necessary • If necessary, add distilled water. The level to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for should never be above the indicator. an extended period of time or if the vehicle • The fluid level should be checked if the is usually only driven short distances. battery has been recharged. • After inspection, be sure the cap over each CAUTION battery cell or the cover is securely in Always use distilled or deionized water place. • (battery water). Check that the battery cables are correctly • Never fill above the level mark in the cell. connected and properly tightened. •

321 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Battery

information in the vehicle's electrical system Rally bar R-Design models* can be stored in the control modules. Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover. Release the rubber molding so that the rear cover is free. Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable. Detach the red positive cable Detach the ventilation hose from the battery Rally bar and bulkhead hatch Vehicles with the optional R-Design package Loosen the screw holding the battery are equipped with a rally bar in the engine com- clamp. partment that must be removed before the bat- Move the battery to the side and lift it up. tery can be replaced. 1. Remove the hatch in the bulkhead on both WARNING WARNING sides of the engine compartment (pry them up carefully with a plastic knife or similar Connect and disconnect the positive and PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! negative cables in the correct sequence. object). Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, 2. Remove the screw on each side of the Removal chemicals known to the state of California engine compartment holding the rally bar Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key to cause cancer and reproductive harm. in place. Wash hands after handling. from the ignition slot and wait at least 5 minutes 3. Lift out the rally bar. before disconnecting the battery so that all > The battery can now be removed (see the instructions in the previous section).

322 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery 09

• After a new battery has been installed (see 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal). the following section), reinstall the rally bar 8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal). in the reverse order. 9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with NOTE the clips. (See Removal). When reinstalling the rally bar, tighten the screws to 22 ft lbs (30 Nm).

Installation 1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box. 3. Tighten the clamp that secures the battery. 4. Connect the ventilation hose. > Be sure that it is correctly connected to the battery and the vent in the vehicle's body. 5. Connect the red positive cable. 6. Connect the black negative cable.

323 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Replacing fuses Location of the fuse boxes There are relay/fuse boxes located in the engine compartment, the passenger compartment, and the trunk. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it. To do so: 1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult to remove, a special fuse removal tool is located on the inside of the engine compartment fuse box cover. 2. From the side, examine the curved metal Engine compartment wire in the fuse to see if it is intact. Under the glove compartment If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the Under the glove compartment same color and amperage (written on the fuse). If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical Trunk system inspected by a trained and qualified Not in use Volvo service technician.

WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system.

324 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Engine compartment

325 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Engine compartment, upper Pos Function A Pos Function A Engine compartment, front Circuit breaker 60 Engine Control Module 10 Engine compartment, lower (ECM), transmission, SRS – Heated washer nozzles* 10 Positions – These fuses are all located in the engine com- Vacuum pump (5-cylinder 5 partment box. Fuses in are located under Headlight washers* 20 engine) . Windshield wipers 30 Lighting panel 5 NOTE – - • Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be changed at any time when necessary. Climate system blower 40 - Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/ • - circuit breakers and should only be – removed or replaced by a trained and Relay - engine compart- 5 qualified Volvo service technician. ABS pump 40 ment box • There is a special fuse removal tool on ABS valves 20 the underside of the cover. Auxiliary lights* 20 – Horn 15 Pos Function A Active Bending Lights- 10 Engine Control Module 10 headlight leveling* Circuit breaker 50 (ECM) Central electrical module 20 Circuit breaker 50 Control module - automatic 15 transmission Circuit breaker 60 ABS 5 A/C compressor 15 Circuit breaker 60 Speed-dependent steering 5 force* Relay-coils 5

326 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Pos Function A Pos Function A Starter motor relay 30 Cooling fan 60 (5- Ignition coils 20 cyl. engi Engine Control Module 10 ne)

Injection system, mass air 15 80 meter, engine control mod- (6- ule cyl. engi A/C compressor, engine 10 ne) valves, engine control module (6-cyl.), solenoids (6- Electro-hydraulic power 100 cyl. non-turbo only), mass steering air meter (5-cyl. only)

EVAP valve, heated oxygen 15 sensor

Vacuum pump/crankcase 10 ventilation heater (5-cylinder engine)

Fuel leakage detection 5

–

327 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Under the glove compartment

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse Pos Function A Pos Function A boxes. 1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up. - Controls in right rear pas- 20 senger's door 2. The fuses are accessible. - Controls in left rear pas- 20 Positions-fuse box A Keyless drive* (door han- 5 senger's door dles) Pos Function A Keyless drive* 7.5 Circuit breaker - infotain- 40 - ment system Power driver's seat* 20 Controls in driver's door 20 - Power front passenger's 20 Controls in front passeng- 20 seat* - er's door

328 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Pos Function A Pos Function A Pos Function A Folding rear seat head 15 Heated driver's seat* 15 Adaptive cruise control/ 10 restraints collision warning* Park assist*, trailer hitch 5 Infotainment control mod- 5 control module*, park Courtesy lighting, rain sen- 7.5 ule assist camera* sor* Infotainment system, Sir- 10 Blind Spot Information Sys- Steering wheel module 7.5 iusXM൅ satellite radio* tem (BLIS)* Cental locking: fuel filler 10 Infotainment system 15 All Wheel Drive* control 5 door module Bluetooth hands-free sys- 5 - tem Active chassis system* 10 Windshield washer 15 - Positions-fuse box B Trunk open 10 Power moonroof* 5 Pos Function A Electrical folding rear seat 10 Courtesy lighting, climate - system sensor outboard head restraints* - 12-volt sockets 15 Fuel pump 20 Front courtesy lighting, 7.5 Heated rear seat* (pas- 15 Climate system control 5 driver's door power win- panel senger's side) dow controls, power ® Alarm movement sensor* Heated rear seat* (driver's 15 seat(s)*, HomeLInk Wire- side) less Control System* - - Instrument panel informa- 5 tion display Alarm, On-board diagnos- 5 tic system Heated front passenger's 15 seat*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 329 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Pos Function A -

Airbag system, occupant 10 weight sensor

Collision warning system* 5

Throttle pedal, auto-dim 7.5 mirror function, heated rear seats*

Brake lights 5

Power moonroof* 20

Immobilizer 5

330 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Cargo area

Positions Pos Rear fuse box A Pos Rear fuse box A Pos Rear fuse box A 12-volt socket in trunk 15 Trailer socket 1* 40 Electric parking brake (left 30 side) - -

Electric parking brake (right 30 - side) NOTE - Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts Heated rear window 30 department for the most up-to-date speci- - fications. Trailer socket 2* 15

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 331 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Vehicle care

Washing the car considerably and also helps prolong the Exterior components The following points should be kept in mind service life of the wiper blades. Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning when washing and cleaning the car: • Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel products, available at your Volvo retailer, for housings, fenders, etc). cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental The car should be washed at regular inter- • components such as chromed strips on the vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots • In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre- exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for adhere to the paint and may cause dam- quent washing is recommended. using these products should be followed care- age. To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important to wash the car frequently NOTE fully. Solvents or stain removers should not be in the wintertime. used. When washing the car, remember to remove Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. • dirt from the drain holes in the doors and CAUTION Doing so may cause detergents and wax sills. to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid • Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub- scratching, use lukewarm water to soften ber components CAUTION the dirt before you wash with a soft • Polishing chromed strips can wear sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. • During high pressure washing, the away or damage the surface • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork spray mouthpiece must never be closer • Polishes containing abrasive sub- as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not stances should not be used may be permanently damaged. spray into the locks. • A detergent can be used to facilitate the • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can softening of dirt and oil. reduce lighting capacity considerably. Automatic car wash • We do NOT recommend washing your car • Dry the car with a clean chamois and Clean the headlights regularly, for example when refueling. in an automatic wash during the first few remember to clean the drain holes in the months (because the paint will not have doors and rocker panels. Special moonroof cautions: hardened sufficiently). • Tar spots can be removed with tar remover • Always close the moonroof and sun • An automatic wash is a simple and quick after the car has been washed. shade before washing your vehicle. way to clean your car, but it is worth • A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy • Never use abrasive cleaning agents on remembering that it may not be as thor- water can be used to clean the wiper the moonroof. ough as when you yourself go over the car blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind- • Never use wax on the rubber seals with sponge and water. Keeping the under- shield and wiper blades improves visibility around the moonroof. body clean is most important, especially in the winter. Some automatic washers do

332 09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care 09

not have facilities for washing the under- Exterior lighting • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct body. Condensation may form temporarily on the sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C). CAUTION headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand CAUTION • Before driving into an automatic car moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi- wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to Volvo does not recommend the use of long- avoid damaging the windshield wipers. pate after the lights have been on for a short life or durable paint protection coatings, time. some of which may claim to prevent pitting, • Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil- fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any not been tested by Volvo for compatibility antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Polishing and waxing with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them Otherwise there is risk of the machine • Normally, polishing is not required during may cause the clear coat to soften, crack, dislodging them. the first year after delivery, however, wax- or cloud. Damage caused by application of • Chromed wheels: Clean chrome- ing may be beneficial. paint protection coatings may not be covered under your vehicle's paint warranty. plated wheels using the same deter- • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle gents used for the body of the vehicle. must be washed and dried. Tar spots can Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can be removed with kerosene or tar remover. permanently stain chrome-plated Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing Cleaning the interior wheels. compound. Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly After polishing use liquid or paste wax. • and follow the instructions included with the WARNING • Several commercially available products car care product. contain both polish and wax. When the vehicle is driven immediately • Upholstery care after being washed, apply the brakes, • Waxing alone does not substitute for pol- including the parking brake, several ishing a dull surface. Fabric times in order to remove any moisture • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For from the brake linings. be purchased today. These waxes are easy more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, • Engine cleaning agents should not be to use and produce a long-lasting, high- shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric used when the engine is warm. This gloss finish that protects the bodywork stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer. against oxidation, road dirt and fading. constitutes a fire risk. AlcanteraTM suede-like material Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a soft cloth and mild soap solution.

333 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Vehicle care

Leather care 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the CAUTION Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, do not rub. • Under no circumstances should gaso- sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a be used on the plastic or the leather protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and towel, and allow the leather to dry com- since these can cause damage. fading can result. pletely. • Take extra care when removing stains Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy Protecting leather upholstery such as ink or lipstick since the coloring leather care kit formulated to clean and beau- 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on can spread. tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol- protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner • to the upholstery with light circular move- vent can damage the seat padding. removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream ments. protectant restores a barrier against soil and • Start from the outside of the stain and sunlight. 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. work toward the center. Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a Volvo also offers a special leather softener that This will help the leather resist staining and • pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing should be applied after the cleaner and pro- protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. may damage the textile upholstery. tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and reduces friction between leather and other fin- • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as ishes in the vehicle. new jeans or suede garments, may stain the upholstery. Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Cleaning a leather-covered steering Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft- wheel ener 943 7429. • Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp sponge and a neutral soap solution. Cleaning leather upholstery Leather should be allowed to breath. Never 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge • cover the steering wheel with a plastic pro- and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. tector. 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the • Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting sponge with circular movements. and conditioning the steering wheel with Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429.

334 09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care 09

If there are stains on the steering wheel: they should be taken out for drying. Spots on regularly, for instance washing the vehicle. textile mats can be removed with a mild deter- Touch-up if necessary. Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood) gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo rec- Paint repairs require special equipment and – Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the wheel ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any exten- with a solution with 5% ammonia. For Consult your Volvo retailer. sive damage. blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) of water and one ounce (25g) of salt and wipe Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood Minor scratches can be repaired by using the stain. surfaces Volvo touch-up paint. Cleaning interior plastic components should Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate) be done with a cleaning agent specially Color code 1. Same procedure as for type I stains. designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo Make sure you have the right color. The color code number is stated on the model plate. 2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbent retailer. paper or a towel. Minor stone chips and scratches Type 3 (dry soil or dust) Touching up paintwork Material: 1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush. • Primer – can Paint – touch-up pen 2. Same procedure as for type I stains. • • Brush CAUTION • Masking tape Sharp objects, such as rings, could damage If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare the leather on the steering wheel. metal and an undamaged color coat remains, you can add paint immediately after removing dirt. Cleaning the seat belts Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap solution. NOTE Paint code on the model plate1 When touching up the vehicle, it should be Cleaning floor mats clean and dry. The surface temperature The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed Paint damage requires immediate attention to should be above 60 °F (15 °C). clean regularly, especially during winter when avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish

1 see page 340 for the location of the model plate.

335 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Vehicle care

Minor scratches on the surface 4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want If the stone chip has not penetrated down to to protect surrounding paint by masking it the metal and an undamaged layer of paint off remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as 5. After a few days, polish the touched-up soon as the spot has been cleaned. areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish. Repairing stone chips G021832

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush. 3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each application.

336 09 Maintenance and specifications

337 Label information...... 340 Specifications...... 342 Overview of information and warning symbols...... 349 Volvo programs...... 352

338 SPECIFICATIONS 10 Specifications

Label information

Location of labels

340 10 Specifications

Label information

List of labels Vehicle Identification Number Model (VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top 10 plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle Codes for color and upholstery, etc. The Identification Number (VIN) should always model plate is located on the rear side of be quoted in all correspondence concern- the B-pillar (the pillar between the front and ing your vehicle with the retailer and when rear passenger doors) and the rear pas- ordering parts. senger's door must be open in order to see Vehicle Emission Control Information. it. Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards cable emission standards, as evidenced by (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Min- the certification label on the underside of istry of Transport (CMVSS) standards the hood. For further information regarding (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet these regulations, please consult your all applicable safety standards, as evi- Volvo retailer. denced by the certification label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer. Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates the correct inflation pressures for the tires that were on the vehicle when it left the factory. Cana- dian models have the upper decal; U.S. models have the lower one.

341 10 Specifications

Specifications

Dimensions–S60

Position Dimension in (mm) A Wheelbase 109.3 (2776)

B Length 182.2 (4628)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 68.9 (1749)

D Load length, floor 38.0 (965)

E Height 58.4 (1484)

F Load height 18.3 (465)

342 10 Specifications

Specifications

Position Dimension in (mm)

G Track, front 62.5 (1588)A/ 10 62.1 (1578)B

H Track, rear 62.4 (1585)A/ 62.0 (1575)B

I Load width, floor 36.2 (919)

J Width 73.4 (1865)

K Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 82.6 (2097)

L Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 74.8 (1899)

A with 16" wheels B with 17" wheels

343 10 Specifications

Specifications

Weights

10 Category USA Canada Gross vehicle weight 4610 lbs 2090 kg A 5-cyl. FWD 4770 lbs 2165 kg B 5-cyl. AWD 5050 lbs 2290 kg 6-cyl. AWD

Capacity weight 1025 lbs 465 kg 5-cyl. FWD 1025 lbs 465 kg 5-cyl. AWD 1200 lbs 545 kg 6-cyl. AWD

Permissible axle weights, front 2580 lbs 1170 kg 5-cyl. FWD 2635 lbs 1195 kg 5-cyl. AWD 2755 lbs 1250 kg 6-cyl. AWD

Permissible axle weights, rear 2160 lbs 980 kg 5-cyl. FWD 2270 lbs 1030 kg 5-cyl. AWD 2490 lbs 1130 kg 6-cyl. AWD

Curb weight 3480 - 3810 lbs 1580 - 1730 kg

Max. roof load 165 lbs 75 kg

344 10 Specifications

Specifications

Category USA Canada Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs Without brakes: 750 kg 10 With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

A Front Wheel Drive B All Wheel Drive

Engine specifications Specification/Model 5-cyl. 3.0T Engine designation B5254T12 B6304T4

Output (kW/rps) 187/90 224/93

Output (hp/rpm) 254/5400 rpm 300/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 360/30-70 440/35 – 70

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 266/1800-4200 325/2100 – 4200

No. of cylinders 5 6

Bore (in/mm) 3.27/83 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.63/92.3 3.67/93.2

345 10 Specifications

Specifications

Specification/Model 5-cyl. 3.0T 10 Displacement 2.497 liters / (152.4 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 9.5:1 9.3:1

Oil specifications good fuel economy and engine protection. See Extreme engine operation Engine oil must meet the minimum the viscosity chart. SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 require- ACEA A5/B5. Lower quality oils may not offer ments is recommended for driving in areas with the same fuel economy, engine performance, sustained low temperatures. or engine protection. Oil additives must not be used. Oil viscosity Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

Viscosity chart

Oil volume Engine model Volume (incl. filter) 3.0T (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

T12 (5 cyl.) B5254T12 7.6 US qts (7.2 liters)

346 10 Specifications

Specifications

Other fluids and lubricants

Fluid System Volume Specification 10 Transmission oilA Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.4 US qts (7 liters) Transmission fluid AW-1

Coolant 3.0T 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with water (50/50 mix), see T5 packaging.

Air conditioning All models 1.7 lbs (770 g) Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a), PAG oil

Brake fluid 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) DOT 4+

Power steering 1.26 US qts (1.2 liters) Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters) Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with 4.7 US qts (4.5 litersB) water.

Fuel tank volume 18.5 US gallons (70 liters)

A Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions. B Models without headlight washers

347 10 Specifications

Specifications

Electrical system CAUTION 10 General information If the battery is replaced, replace it with a 12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter- battery of the same cold start capacity and nator. Single pole system in which the chassis reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery). and engine block are used as conductors. The negative terminal is connected to the chassis.

Performance, battery Engine 3.0T/T5

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacity (A) 520 – 700

Reserve capacity (min) 100 – 135

WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

348 10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

Introduction Symbols in the main instrument panel Indicator symbols The symbols in the vehicle's various displays Warning symbols Symbol Description P. 10 are divided into three main categories: Symbol Description P. no. • Warning symbols • Indicator symbols no. Fault in the Active 79 Bending Light Information symbols • Low oil pressure 80 (ABL)*system The following tables list the most common symbols, their meaning and the pages in this Parking brake 80 Malfunction indicator 79 manual that provide more detailed information. light

A Warning symbol A The red warning symbol lights up to SRS airbags 80 Anti-lock brake sys- 79 indicate a problem related to safety and/or tem (ABS) drivability. A message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display. Seat belt reminder 80 A

Information symbol Rear fog light on 79 Generator not charg- 81 The information symbol lights up and a ing text message is displayed to provide the driver Stability system 79 with necessary information about one of the Fault in the brake sys- 81 (DSTC), Trailer Stabil- vehicle's systems. tem ity Assist* A Tire pressure monitor- 79 ing sensor (TPMS) Warning symbol 81 Low fuel level 79 A Canadian models Information symbol, 79 see text in information display

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 349 10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

Symbol Description P. Symbol Description P. Symbol Description P. 10 no. no. no. High beam indicator 78 Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Driver Alert System* 165 trol * 146 Left turn signal indica- 78 tor Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Active Bending Lights 96 Right turn signal indi- 78 trol *, Distance Alert* 146, (ABL)* cator 148

A Canadian models Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Fuel filler door (arrow 78 trol *, Distance Alert* 146, indicates it is on right Other information symbols 148 side of vehicle) Symbol Description P. Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Rain sensor* 101 no. trol* 146 Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Driver Alert System* 166 trol * 146 Radar sensor* 143 Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, trol * 146 Driver Alert System*, 168 Lane Departure Warn- Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Camera* 161 ing* trol *, Distance Alert* 146, 148 Laser sensor* Driver Alert System*, 168 Lane Departure Warn- Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, Collision Warning with 163 ing* trol *, Distance Alert* 146, Full Auto-brake and 148 Pedestrian Detection* Adaptive Cruise Con- 139, trol * 146

350 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

Information symbols in the center console display 10 Symbol Description P. no. Audio files 232

CD folder 232

Video files 232

Bluetooth-connected 241 cell phone

BluetoothTM hands- 241 free

HD radio 224

Park Assist* 171

Information symbols in the ceiling console Symbol Description P. no. Seat belt reminder 20

Occupant Weight 27 Sensor

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 351 10 Specifications

Volvo programs

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON 10 CALL roadside assistance. Additional information, features, and benefits are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment. If you require assistance, dial: In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63- VOLVO) In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi- fied technicians have demonstrated a high degree of competence in specific areas. Besides passing exams, each technician must also have worked in the field for two or more years before a certificate is issued. These professional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition.

352 10 Specifications

353 11 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Anti-freeze...... 256, 310 oil...... 347 Anti-lock brake system shiftlock override...... 120 12-volt sockets...... 208 warning light...... 78 Axle weight...... 283 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...... 122 Approach lighting...... 55, 100 11 A B Audio system ABS (anti-lock brake system)...... 122 AUX/USB sockets...... 235 Battery Accessory installation warning...... 13 Bluetooth devices...... 238 changing...... 321, 322 Bluetooth hands-free system...... 240 Active chassis system...... 205 maintenance...... 321 Bluetooth streaming audio...... 238 remote key, replacing...... 58 Active high beams...... 95 getting started...... 213 specifications...... 348 Active yaw control...... 130 HD digital radio...... 224 warning symbols...... 320 introduction...... 212 Adaptive brake lights...... 121 Blind Spot Information System media player...... 231 Adaptive cruise control...... 137, 139 (BLIS)...... 179, 180, 181 overview...... 212 Airbags radio functions...... 222 Bluetooth cell phone connection...... 240 disconnecting the front passenger’s SiriusXM൅ satellite radio...... 226 Booster cushions...... 46 side...... 27, 28 sound settings...... 217 Brake lights...... 121 front...... 23 steering wheel keypad...... 214 Brake system inflatable curtain...... 33 voice control...... 248 side impact...... 31 ABS...... 122 Auto-dim rearview mirror...... 106 Brake pad inspection...... 121 Air conditioning...... 200 Automatic locking retractor...... 38 checking fluid level...... 310 Air distribution...... 196 Automatic transmission emergency brake assistance...... 122 Air distribution table...... 202 Geartronic...... 119 fluid...... 347 Air vents...... 197 general description...... 118, 119 general information...... 121 warning light...... 80 All Wheel Drive...... 120

354 11 Index

Bulbs ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 47 Corner Traction Control...... 130 headlights...... 312, 313, 314 top tether anchors...... 48 Courtesy lighting...... 99 introduction...... 312 Child safety...... 37 Crash event data...... 9 license plate lights...... 316 booster cushions...... 46 Crash mode...... 36 specifications...... 317 child restraint systems...... 40 trunk lighting...... 316 Cruise control...... 135, 136 convertible seats...... 44 11 infant seats...... 42 adaptive...... 137 Curb weight...... 283 C Child safety locks...... 49 City Safety™...... 151 Current, conserving...... 255 Camera, Park Assist...... 175 Climate system...... 200 Capacity weight...... 283 air distribution...... 196, 202 air vents...... 197 D Catalytic converter...... 260 Interior Air Quality System...... 196 Defroster...... 200 Cell phone, hands-free connection...... 240 introduction...... 195 Cell phone voice control...... 248 passenger compartment filter...... 196 Detachable key blade...... 57, 60 Central locking system, introduction...... 52 refrigerant...... 195 Disconnecting the front passenger’s airbag...... 27, 28 Chains...... 286 Clock, setting...... 82 Dome lighting...... 99 Check engine light...... 78 Cold weather driving...... 256 Door mirrors...... 105 Check Engine warning light...... 79 Collision warning system...... 157, 158 Driver alert...... 165 Child restraints Compass in rearview mirror...... 107 recalls and registration...... 39 Conserving electrical current...... 255 Driver distraction warning...... 13 Child restraint systems...... 40 Controls, center console...... 213 Driving economically...... 254 booster cushions...... 46 Convertible seats...... 44 Driving in cold weather...... 256 convertible seats...... 44 Coolant...... 310, 347 Driving through water...... 255 infant seats...... 42 Cooling system, general information...... 255

355 11 Index

E Eyelets for anchoring loads...... 262 Fuses...... 324, 325, 328, 331

ECC...... 200, 201 Economical driving...... 254 F G Electric parking brake...... 124 11 Federal Clean Air Act...... 304 Garage door opener Electronic Climate Control...... 198, 200, 201 ® Flat tires HomeLink Wireless Control System. 110 air distribution table...... 202 repairing with tire sealing system...... 288 Gasoline requirements...... 258 Interior Air Quality System...... 201 Floor mats Gas tank volume...... 347 Emergency locking retractor...... 38 cleaning...... 335 Gauges...... 77 Emergency starting...... 116 placing correctly...... 113 Geartronic...... 119 Emergency towing...... 268 Fluid specifications...... 347 Geartronic automatic transmission...... 119 Emission inspection readiness...... 305 Fog lights Generator warning light...... 80 Engine front/rear...... 97 Glossary of tire terminology...... 282 overheating...... 81 Four C (active chassis system)...... 205 specifications...... 345 Grocery bag holder...... 263 Front airbags...... 23 starting...... 113 disconnecting passenger’s side air- Gross vehicle weight...... 283 switching off...... 116 bag...... 27, 28 Engine compartment overview...... 307 Front park assist...... 171, 173 Engine Drag Control (EDC)...... 130 H Front seats...... 86, 88 Engine oil...... 346 Fuel filler cap...... 260 checking...... 308 Hazard warning flashers...... 98 low pressure warning light...... 79, 80 Fuel filler door, opening...... 259 HD digital radio...... 224 volumes...... 346 Fuel level warning light...... 79 Headlights Engine remote start (ERS)...... 115 Fuel requirements...... 257, 258 Active Bending Lights...... 96 active high beams...... 95 Environment...... 12 Fuel tank volume...... 347

356 11 Index

changing bulbs...... 313, 314 Infant seats...... 42 Interior lighting...... 99 high/low beams...... 93 Inflatable Curtain...... 33 iPod connector (audio system)...... 235 high beam flash...... 94 Inflation pressure...... 277 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 47 tunnel detection...... 96 Inflation pressure table...... 279 Headlight washers...... 102 Information and warning symbols, table Head restraints, rear seat...... 89 11 of...... 349 J Heated oxygen sensors...... 261 Information lights...... 77, 78, 79, 80 Jack Heated rear seats...... 199 Information symbol...... 79 attaching...... 295 High beams...... 93 Infotainment location of...... 294 active...... 95 Menu navigation...... 216 Jump starting...... 116 indicator light...... 79 Infotainment system...... 212 Hoisting the vehicle...... 305 AUX/USB sockets...... 235 ® HomeLink Wireless Control System...... 110 Bluetooth devices...... 238 K Home safe lighting...... 99, 100 Bluetooth® hands-free system...... 240 Key blade...... 52, 57, 60, 61 Hood, opening/closing...... 307 getting started...... 213 media player...... 231 private locking...... 60 Horn...... 92 menus...... 213, 216 valet locking...... 60 radio functions...... 222 Keyless drive sound settings...... 217 general description...... 61 I voice control...... 248 starting the vehicle...... 113

Ignition modes...... 84 Inspection readiness...... 305 Immobilizer...... 54 Instrument lighting...... 93 Important information...... 6 Instrument overview...... 76, 77 Indicator lights...... 77, 78, 79, 80 Instrument panel...... 187 Interior Air Quality System...... 196

357 11 Index

L Malfunction indicator light...... 79 Oil Media player (infotainment system)...... 231 checking...... 308 Labels volumes...... 346 Menu...... 189 list of...... 341 Oil quality...... 346 location of...... 340 Messages in the instrument panel...... 187 OK button...... 187 Mirrors 11 LATCH anchors...... 47 defroster...... 106 On Call Roadside Assistance...... 352 Leather care...... 334 power door...... 105 Overhead courtesy lighting...... 99 Lighting panel...... 93 rearview, auto-dim function...... 106 Overheating, engine...... 81 Load anchoring eyelets...... 262 retractable...... 105 Oxygen sensors, heated...... 261 Loading the vehicle...... 262, 283 vanity...... 208 roof loads...... 264 Moonroof...... 108 Locking...... 65 Motor oil P Locking the vehicle...... 55 checking...... 308 volumes...... 346 Paint, touching up...... 335 Locks, child safety...... 49 MY CAR...... 189 Park assist...... 171, 173 Low beams...... 93 Park Assist Camera...... 175 Low fuel level warning light...... 79 Parking brake Low oil pressure warning light...... 80 O electric, applying/releasing...... 124 warning light...... 80 Occupant safety...... 16 Parking lights...... 97 M Occupant weight sensor...... 27, 28 Personal Car Communicator, unique func- Octane recommendations...... 258 Main instrument panel...... 187 tions...... 56 Odometer, trip...... 82 Maintenance...... 304 Polishing...... 333 hoisting the vehicle...... 305 performed by the owner...... 305

358 11 Index

Power front seat Rear seats Remote key/PCC memory function...... 87 center head restraint...... 89 common functions...... 55 with keyless drive...... 88 folding...... 89 Reporting safety defects...... 17 heated...... 199 Power mirrors...... 105 Roadside Assistance...... 352 defroster...... 106 Rearview mirror Road sign information (RSI)...... 133 Power moonroof...... 108 auto-dim function...... 106 11 compass...... 107 Roof loads...... 264 Power steering fluid...... 311 Rear window defroster...... 106 speed-dependent...... 205 Recalls, child restraints...... 39 S Power steering fluid...... 347 Refrigerant...... 347 Power windows...... 103 Refueling...... 257, 258 Safety, occupant...... 16 Pregnancy, using seat belts during...... 20 fuel filler cap...... 260 Safety defects, reporting...... 17 fuel filler door...... 259 Private locking...... 60 Seat belt fuel tank volume...... 347 reminder...... 20 PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 116, 323, 348 Registering child restraints...... 39 Seat belts Remote control Automatic locking retractor/Emergency R private locking...... 60 locking retractor...... 38 Remote key...... 52 buckling...... 18 Radio approach lighting...... 55 maintenance...... 19 SiriusXM൅ satellite radio...... 226 immobilizer...... 54 pretensioners...... 18 key blade...... 52, 57, 60 reminder...... 19 Radio functions...... 222 locking the vehicle...... 55 reminder warning light...... 80 HD digital radio...... 224 Personal Car Communicator...... 55, 56 securing child restraint systems 42, 44, 46 Rain sensor...... 101 replacing the battery...... 58 unbuckling...... 19 Rear fog light...... 97 unlocking the vehicle...... 55 use during pregnancy...... 20 Rear park assist...... 171, 173 using...... 18

359 11 Index

Seats, front...... 86, 87 Steering wheel glossary of terms...... 282 Sensus...... 186 adjusting...... 92 improving economy...... 275 horn...... 92 inflation pressure...... 277 Shiftlock...... 9 keypad...... 92, 189, 214 inflation pressure table...... 279 override...... 120 Stone chips, touching up...... 335 load ratings...... 278 Side door mirrors...... 105 rotation...... 274 11 Storage spaces...... 206 Side impact airbags...... 31 Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)..... 300 Studded tires...... 286 Sign information (RSI)...... 133 snow...... 286 Sunroof (moonroof)...... 108 spare...... 287 SiriusXM൅ satellite radio...... 226 Sun shade...... 104 specifications...... 278 Snow chains...... 286 speed ratings...... 278 Supplemental restraint system...... 22 Snow tires...... 286 storing...... 276 warning light...... 80 studded...... 286 Spare tire...... 287 Symbols, overview...... 349 tire pressure monitoring system...... 298 Speed-dependent steering...... 205 tire sealing system...... 288 Spin control...... 130 tread wear indicator...... 275 SRS...... 22 T uniform tire quality grading...... 285 Stability system...... 130, 131 Tire sealing system...... 288 Temporary spare tire...... 287 Corner Traction Control (CTC)...... 130 Top tether anchors (child restraint sys- Engine Drag Control (EDC)...... 130 Three-way catalytic converter...... 260 tems)...... 48 indicator light...... 79 Tire designations...... 280 Touching up paint...... 335 Starting the engine...... 113 Tire inflation pressure...... 279 Towing a trailer...... 265, 266 remote start...... 115 Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 298, 299 trailer hitch...... 266 with keyless drive...... 113 indicator light...... 79 Towing the vehicle...... 268 Starting the vehicle Tires...... 274 Traction control...... 130 after a crash (crash mode)...... 36 age...... 274 Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...... 54 changing from summer to winter...... 275

360 11 Index

Trailer towing...... 265, 266 V Warning system, collision...... 157, 158 trailer hitch...... 266 Warranties...... 304 Valet locking...... 60 Transmission Washer fluid...... 319, 347 general description...... 118, 119 Vanity mirror...... 208 Washers oil...... 347 changing bulbs...... 317 headlight...... 102 shiftlock override...... 120 Vehicle Event Data...... 9 windshield...... 101 11 Tread wear indicator...... 275 Vehicle loading...... 262, 283 Water, driving through...... 255 Trip computer...... 203 roof loads...... 264 Waxing...... 333 Trip odometers...... 82 Vehicle maintenance...... 304 Weights...... 344 Trips, long distance...... 255 performed by the owner...... 305 Wheels...... 274 Vehicle weights...... 344 Trunk changing...... 294, 295 changing bulbs...... 316 Voice control storing...... 276 driving with it open...... 254 cell phones...... 248 Whiplash Protection System...... 34 opening manually...... 67 Volvo and the environment...... 12 Windows Tunnel detection...... 96 Volvo maintenance...... 304 power...... 103 Turn signals...... 98 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance...... 352 Windshield indicator lights...... 79 Volvo programs...... 352 rain sensor...... 101 Volvo Sensus...... 186 washers...... 102 U wipers/washers...... 101 Windshield washer fluid...... 319, 347 Uniform Tire Quality Grading...... 285 W Windshield wipers...... 318 Unlocking the vehicle...... 55, 65 service position...... 318 Warning flashers, hazard...... 98 Upholstery care...... 333 Wiper blades Warning lights...... 77, 78, 79, 80 replacing...... 318 Warning symbol...... 81

361 11 Index

362

Owner's Manual L:7 :9&gt;I&gt;DC

Owner's Manual L:7 :9>I>DC